Copyright: Copyright ® Corel Corp. 1996.
Citation: Copyright ® Corel Corp. 1996. All Rights Reserved.


How Do I
Contents

Click an icon or a title to find information.

How Do I  Step-by-step instructions for common tasks

Examples  Pictures of what you can do and how to do it

Search  Index of Help topics and features

Additional Help  What's New, Keystrokes, Glossary, Print Topics, and Available Products

Macros  Macro commands and syntax

Using Help  Hints on learning Help


Additional Help

What's New  New features and enhancements

Keystrokes  Keyboard navigation

Glossary  Terms and definitions

Print Topics  Print multiple Help topics


CUA Keyboard Template

Ctrl+Shift	QuickCorrect		Show Symbols	Clear		Prev Doc
Ctrl	Spell Check		Redisplay	Close	Draft View	Next Doc
Alt+Shift	Grammatik		Ruler Bar		Hide Bars	Prev Window
Alt	Thesaurus	Find Previous	Reveal Codes	Exit	Page View	Next Window
Shift	Help: What Is?	Find Next	Save	New	Full Page View	Prev Pane
Normal	Help	Find and Replace	Save As	Open	Print	Next Pane
Ctrl+Shift	Double Indent				Vert Line	Table Data
Ctrl	Hanging Indent	Margins	Generate	Macro Record/Stop	Horiz Line	Table Format
Alt+Shift	Decimal Tab			Feature Bar Menu		Calculate
Alt	Flush Right	Styles	Sort	Macro Play	Text Box Create	Table Number
Shift	Center Line	Select Cell	Merge	Repeat	Text Box Edit	Table Lines/Fill
Normal	Indent	Select	Font	Menu	Image	Table Create


Keystrokes

Purpose

Use the following CUA or DOS keystrokes to move around in WordPerfect 6.1 for Windows or to select (block) text.

For keystrokes related to a specific keyboard, see CUA Keyboard Template or DOS Keyboard Template.

To move the insertion point to the	Press the CUA keystroke	Press the DOS keystroke
Beginning of a document	Ctrl+Home	Home, Home, Up Arrow
Beginning of a document (before codes)	Ctrl+Home, Ctrl+Home	Home, Home, Home, Up Arrow
Beginning of a line	Home	Home, Home, Left Arrow
Beginning of a line (before codes)	Home, Home	Home, Home, Home, Left Arrow
Bottom of the screen	PgDn	Home, Down Arrow
End of the document	Ctrl+End	Home, Home, Down Arrow
Next character	Right Arrow	Right Arrow
Next line down	Down Arrow	Down Arrow
Next page	Alt+PgDn	PgDn
Next word	Ctrl+Right Arrow	Ctrl+Right Arrow
Previous character	Left Arrow	Left Arrow
Previous line up	Up Arrow	Up Arrow
Previous page	Alt+PgUp	PgUp
Previous word	Ctrl+Left Arrow	Ctrl+Left Arrow
Specified page	Ctrl+G	Ctrl+Home
Previous document	Ctrl+Shft+F6	Ctrl+Shft+F6
Next document	Ctrl+F6	Ctrl+F6
Previous window	Ctrl+Shft+F6	Alt+Shft+F6
Next window	Ctrl+F6	Alt+F6
Previous pane	Shft+F6	Ctrl+Shift+F1
Next pane	F6	Ctrl+F1
To insert a	Press	Press
Back Tab (Margin Release)	Shift+Tab	Shift+Tab
Hard Page Break	Ctrl+Enter	Ctrl+Enter
Hard Return	Enter	Enter
Hard Space	Ctrl+Space	Home, Space
Hyphen, Hard	Ctrl+-	Home+-
Hyphen, Soft	Ctrl+Shft+-	Ctrl+-
To delete the	Press	Press
Character to the left	Backspace	Backspace
Current character	Delete	Delete
Rest of a page	Ctrl+Shft+Delete	Ctrl+PgDn
Rest of a line	Ctrl+Delete	Ctrl+End
Rest of a word	Ctrl+Backspace	Ctrl+Backspace
Other editing keystrokes	Press	Press
Copy text to the Clipboard	Ctrl+C	Ctrl+Insert
Cut text to the Clipboard	Ctrl+X	Shft+Delete
Typeover	Insert	Insert
Cancel	Esc	Esc
Convert case of selected text	Ctrl+K	Ctrl+K
While in a column, to	Press	Press
Move one column to the right	Alt+Right Arrow	Alt+Right Arrow
Move one column to the left	Alt+Left Arrow	Alt+Left Arrow
Move to the top of the column	Alt+Home	Alt+Home
Move to the bottom of the column	Alt+End	Alt+End
While in a dialog, to	Press	Press
Move to the next control	Tab	Tab
Move to the previous control	Shft+Tab	Shift+Tab
Perform the default action	Enter	Enter
While in a table, to	Press	Press
Move up one cell	Alt+Up Arrow	Alt+Up Arrow
Move down one cell	Alt+Down Arrow	Alt+Down Arrow
Move right one cell	Alt+Right Arrow or Tab	Alt+Right Arrow or Tab
Move left one cell	Alt+Left Arrow or Shift+Tab	Alt+Left Arrow or Shift+Tab
Move one tab space	Indent (F7)	Indent (F4)
Decrease column width	Ctrl+,	Ctrl+,
Increase column width	Ctrl+.	Ctrl+.
To select (block) text	Press F8 or Shift and	Press Alt+F4 or F12, then press
One character to the right or left	Right Arrow or Left Arrow	Right Arrow or Left Arrow
One line up or down	Up Arrow or Down Arrow	Up Arrow or Down Arrow
To the end of the line	End	End
To the beginning of the line	Home	Home, Home, Left Arrow
To the top of the screen	PgUp	- (number pad)
To the bottom of the screen	PgDn	+ (number pad)
To the first line on previous page	Alt+PgUp	PgUp
To the first line on the next page	Alt+PgDn	PgDn
One word to the right or left	Ctrl+Right Arrow or Ctrl+Left Arrow	Ctrl+Right Arrow or Ctrl+Left Arrow
One paragraph up or down	Ctrl+Up Arrow or Ctrl+Down Arrow (or press F8, then Shift+Enter)	Ctrl+Up Arrow or Ctrl+Down Arrow
To the beginning of the document	Ctrl+Home	Home, Home, Up Arrow
To the end of the document	Ctrl+End	Home, Home, Down Arrow


Glossary

A

absolute cell address

additional objects template

active

.ALL file

alphanumeric

ANSI

application

application icon

application window

argument

ASCII

associated merge files

attributes

automatic font change (AFC)

B

back up

Back button

baseline

baud

baud rate

BIOS

bitmap

Browse buttons

built-in font

bullet

button

byte

C

cache

card

cartridge fonts

cascade

cascading menu

CD-ROM

cell

cell intersection

check box

check mark

choose

clear

click

Clipboard

close

CMYK

codes

command

command button

compressed file

Contents button

Control menu

Control-menu box

conversion

CUA

current directory

D

data table file

data text file

DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) link

default

delimiter

description

deselect

desktop

dialog box

dialog box title bar

dimmed

directory

directory dialog box

display font

dither

Document Experts

document template

document window

DOS

DOS prompt

double-click

draft view

drag

driver

drop-down list

E

ellipsis

embed

expanded memory

extended memory

F

fat bits

field

field (merge)

file

file extension

file format

filename

fixed-pitch font

floating cell

folder icon

font

form file

function keys

G

group box

H

handle

headings

headword

help prompt

hexadecimal

highlight

History button

HLS

I

icon

image

inactive window

incrementing button

.INI file

insertion point

J

jump term

K

kerning

key

kilobyte (K)

L

landscape orientation

language code

leading

link

link icons

list box

list button

logical page

long prompt

M

macro

main dictionary

maximize button

megabyte (M)

memory

menu

menu bar

message box

MIDI

minimize button

mnemonics

modem

monospaced font

.MOR file

mouse button

mouse pointer

movement keys

multitasking

N

nested function

newspaper column

O

object linking and embedding (OLE)

OLE

open

option

outline family

P

page view

palette

parallel column

parallel interface

parallel printer

parameter

path

pathname

physical page

pitch

pixel

point

point size

polling

pop-up definition

pop-up list

port

portrait orientation

Power Bar

print queue

Print button

printer driver

printer definition

program

proportionally spaced font

.PRS file

publishing

Q

QuickList

QuickMenu

R

radio button

RAM

range

record

relative cell address

Restore button

RGB

ROM

root directory

route

S

scalable font

screen font

scroll

scroll bar

Search button

select (options or commands)

select (text or objects)

selection insertion point

serial interface

serial printer

shortcut key

size

sizing handle

soft font

sort key

sort order

spreadsheet

spreadsheet import

spreadsheet link

Status Bar

submenu

subscribers

supplemental dictionary

syntax

T

template

temporary file

text box (dialog box)

text box (graphics)

text file

tile

title bar

toggle

Toolbar Bitmap Editor Clear Option

Toolbar Bitmap Editor Copy Option

Toolbar Bitmap Editor Paste Option

Toolbar Bitmap Editor Undo Option

two page view

type

U

No entries

V

variable-pitch font

version

Viewer Find Next

Viewer Find Previous

Viewer Info

W

wildcard

window

workgroup

workspace

.WPG file

WYSIWYG

X

No entries

Y

No entries

Z

zoom


DOS Keyboard Template

Ctrl+Shift	Prev Pane		Show Symbols	Select Paragraph		Next Window
Ctrl	Next Pane	Spell Check	Redisplay	Select Sentence	Define Outline Style	Decimal Tab
Alt+Shift	Grammatik		Ruler Bar	Select Cell	Generate	Prev Window
Alt	Thesaurus		Reveal Codes	Select	Tools	Flush Right
Shift	Preferences		Prev Doc	Double Indent	Date	Center Line
Normal	Help Contents	Find and Replace	Next Doc	Indent	Open	Bold
Ctrl+Shift	Clear
Ctrl	Insert	Font	Sort	Macro Record/Stop	Tab Set	Save
Alt+Shift				Feature Bar
Alt	Table Create	Styles	Graphics	Macro Play	Table Create	Envelope
Shift	Print	Format	Merge	Open	Character	Bookmark
Normal	Close	Underline	End Field	Save As	Reveal Codes	Select


Menu Commands

Purpose

The following represent WordPerfect's pull-down menus and provide Help for respective features:

File  Edit  View  Insert  Format  Table  Graphics   Tools  Window  Help


About WordPerfect

Help, About WordPerfect

Purpose

Use About WordPerfect to get information about the Program and Shared DLL release dates, your serial number, your PIN number, and your computer setup.

Steps

To enter or edit your serial and PIN numbers,

1	Choose About WordPerfect from the Help menu.

2	Choose Edit Serial Number/PIN.

3	Type your serial number.

4	Type your Personal Identification Number (PIN).

5	Choose OK.


Table Gridlines

View, Table Gridlines

Purpose

Use Table Gridlines to display your table with dimmed gridlines and no fill style.

This makes your display rewrite more quickly when you edit the table. The table will print with solid lines and with any fill style you have selected.

Steps

1	Choose Table Gridlines from the View menu.

See Also

Document (Display Preferences)


 Hint

Each counter can only be used in the document it is created in. To use a counter in several documents, insert the counter in a Style.

Inserting a counter in a Style also makes it much easier to use the counter. You can add the Styles button to your toolbar and use that button to insert the counter style each time you want to increase the counter.


 Hint

If you do not want the counter to display in your document, simply choose Increase or Decrease.


Italic

Format, Font, Italic

Purpose

Use Italic to italicize text.

Steps

To italicize text,

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Italic from the Appearance group box.

2	Type the text you want italicized.

3	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Italic from the Appearance group box again to turn off Italic.

To italicize existing text,

1	Select the text you want italicized.

2	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Italic from the Appearance group box.

See Also

About Formatting

Font

Select

QuickSelect


About Macros

Tools, Macro or Template Macro

Purpose

Use Macro to play, record, or edit a macro. Use Template Macro to play, record, or edit a macro associated with a template.

A macro is a file that you record and then play back to perform simple or complex tasks. You can record mouse selections and keystrokes, type text, or insert macro commands.

For example, you could record a macro that inserts the closing of a letter. Or you could record a macro that opens a file, moves the insertion point to a specified place, and prompts you to type information.

Steps

To use the Macro feature,

1	Choose Macro from the Tools menu to display the Macro menu.

or

Choose Template Macro from the Tools menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

Play

Record

Pause

Edit

Macro Feature Bar

To display in-depth information about the Macro feature, choose Macros from the Help menu. If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," copy the WPMH61US.HLP file to your main WordPerfect directory (for example, c:\office\wpwin).

See Also

About Templates

Codes (Macros and Find)

Macro Help Manual

Record/Play/Edit a Template Macro


Coaches

Help, Coaches

Purpose

Coaches give you step-by-step instruction on selected features. If you prefer, a Coach will apply a feature for you.

The first time you enter WordPerfect after installing it, the QuickStart Coach will appear. This is a brief tutorial that shows you how to quickly access many of the useful and powerful features of WordPerfect.

The next time you enter WordPerfect, the QuickStart Coach will not run automatically. If you want to review the information again, choose Coaches from the Help menu, highlight QuickStart, then choose OK.

Steps

1	Choose Coaches from the Help menu.

2	Select the task you want to perform.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Tutorial


Feature Bars

Purpose

Feature bars provide easy access to options related to a specific feature.

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Caption

Comment

Cross-Reference

Delay Codes

Footnote/Endnote

Graphics Box

Header/Footer

Hypertext

Index

List

Macro Edit

Merge

Outline

Sound

Table Formula

Table of Authorities

Table of Authorities Full Form

Table of Contents

Template

Text Box

Watermark

See Also

Power Bar

Ruler Bar

Status Bar

Toolbar


Tutorial

Help, Tutorial

Purpose

Tutorial lessons guide you step by step through creating, editing, and formatting a document.

Steps

1	Choose Tutorial from the Help menu.

2	Select the lesson you want.

See Also

Coaches


Customize Paragraph Border

Format, Paragraph, Border/Fill, Customize Style

Purpose

Use Customize Paragraph Border to create a customized paragraph border.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph where you want the border to first appear.

or

Select any amount of text in the paragraphs you want to surround with a border.

2	Choose Paragraph from the Format menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Select a border style from either the Border Style pop-up palette or the Border Style drop-down list.

If you want only horizontal separator lines between paragraphs, select Column Between.

4	Choose Customize Style.

5	Choose from the border customizing options.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

About Borders

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Define Color Printing Palette

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)


Customize Page Border

Format, Page, Border/Fill, Customize Style

Purpose

Use Customize Page Border to create a customized page border.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point anywhere on the page where you want the border to first appear.

or

Select any amount of text on the pages you want to surround with a border.

2	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Select a border style from either the Border Style pop-up palette or the Border Style drop-down list.

4	Choose Customize Style.

5	Choose the border customizing options you want.

6	Choose OK until you return to your document.

See Also

About Borders

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Define Color Printing Palette

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)


Customize Column Border

Format, Columns, Border/Fill, Customize Style

Purpose

Use this feature to create a customized column border.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point anywhere in a column.

2	Choose Columns from the Format menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose a border style from the Border Style drop-down list.

If you want only a vertical separator line between columns, select Column Between.

4	Choose Customize Style.

5	Choose the border customizing options you want.

6	Choose OK until you return to your document.

See Also

About Borders

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Define Color Printing Palette

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)


Create or Edit Border Style (Table)

Table, Lines/Fill, Table, Styles, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Create or Edit Border Style to create a new style or edit a predefined style.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Lines/Fill from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Lines/Fill.

3	Select Table.

4	Choose Styles.

5	Highlight an existing style, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create to make a new border style.

6	If you are creating a new style, type a name for the style in the Style Name text box.

7	Unless you want All lines selected, select individual sides from the Select sides to modify group box.

8	Select a line style from either the Line Style palette or the drop-down list in the Select sides to modify group box.

9	Select a border color from the Border Color palette in the Change Color group box.

10	Select a shadow position from the Type palette in the Drop Shadow group box.

11	Select a shadow color from the Color palette in the Drop Shadow group box.

12	Specify a shadow width from the Width palette or from the text box.

13	Choose OK.

See Also

Document (Display Preferences)

Line Style


Customize Graphics Borders

Graphics, Edit Box, Border/Fill, Customize Style

Purpose

Use Customize Graphics Borders to create or edit borders surrounding graphics boxes.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box in your document.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style, then choose from the following options:

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)

Space (Customize Border)


File Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the File menu to open, save, and print documents.

New

Open

Close

Save

Save As

Master Document

Compare Document

Document Summary

Document Information

Print

Publish New

Subscribe

Send

Exit

Last Opened Files


Edit Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Edit menu to modify text, undo your previous options, create OLE objects, and set preferences.

Undo

Redo

Undo/Redo History

Undelete

Repeat

Cut

Copy

Paste

Append

Select

Paste Special

Links

Object

Find and Replace

Go To

Convert Case

Preferences


View Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the View menu to change what you see in the WordPerfect window.

Draft

Page

Two Page

Zoom

Toolbar

Power Bar

Ruler Bar

Status Bar

Hide Bars

Graphics

Table Gridlines

Hidden Text

Show

Reveal Codes


Insert Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Insert menu to insert an object into your document.

Bullets & Numbers

Character

Abbreviations

Date

Other

Footnote

Endnote

Comment

Sound

Bookmark

Spreadsheet/Database

File

Object

Page Break


Format Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Format menu to change the text format in your document.

Font

Line

Paragraph

Page

Document

Columns

Make It Fit Expert

Drop Cap

Header/Footer

Watermark

Margins

Justification

Typesetting

Envelope

Labels

QuickFormat

Styles


Tools Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Tools menu to add special features to your document.

Spell Check

Thesaurus

Grammatik

QuickCorrect

Language

Object Exchange

Macro

Template Macro

Merge

Sort

Outline

Hypertext

List

Index

Cross-Reference

Table of Contents

Table of Authorities

Generate


Graphics Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Graphics menu to create and edit graphics.

Image

Text Box

Equation

Custom Box

Edit Box

Drag to Create

Draw

Chart

Text Art

Horizontal Line

Vertical Line

Custom Line

Edit Line

Graphics Styles


Table Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Table menu to define and create tables.

Create

Format

Number Type

Expert

Lines/Fill

Insert

Delete

Join

Split

Names

Calculate

Copy Formula

Data Fill

Sum

Cell Formula Entry

Formula Bar


Window Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Window menu to change the document window display.

Cascade

Tile Horizontal

Tile Vertical

Document #


Help Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Help menu to get online Help.

Contents

Search for Help On

How Do I

Macros

Coaches

Upgrade Expert

Tutorial

About WordPerfect

See Also

Using Help


Image Tools

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools

Purpose

Use the Image Tools Palette to crop, scale, rotate, make color adjustments, or change the fill type of an image inside a graphics box.

Steps

To display the palette,

1	Select the graphics image you want to edit.

2	Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics image and select Image Tools.

To close the palette,

1	Double-click the Control-menu box in the upper-left corner of the palette.

or

Click anywhere outside the graphics box and palette.

See Also

Graphics Box

Image Tools Palette


Put Box on Current Page

Graphics, Edit Box, Position, Put Box on Current Page

Purpose

Use Put Box on Current Page to change a paragraph-anchored or a character-anchored graphics box to a page-anchored box.

When a graphics box is anchored to a page, you can position the box anywhere on the page, for example across columns. Also the box remains on that page no matter how much text is added to or deleted around it.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Position.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Position from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Position.

3	Select Put Box on Current Page from the Box Placement group box.

In the Position Box group box, you can select the Position Box At Insertion Point When Created option by editing the box style. Choose Graphics Styles under See Also for more information.

4	Under Horizontal in the Position Box group box, specify a horizontal distance in relationship to a page element (such as the right margin).

or

Under Horizontal, select Across Columns, then specify the horizontal position in relationship to the specified columns.

5	Under Vertical, specify a vertical distance in relationship to a page element (such as the top margin).

6	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Position

Graphics Styles

Put Box in Current Paragraph

Treat Box as Character


Put Box in Current Paragraph

Graphics, Edit Box, Position, Put Box in Current Paragraph

Purpose

Use Put Box in Current Paragraph to change a page-anchored or a character-anchored graphics box to a paragraph-anchored box.

When a graphics box is anchored to a paragraph, the box stays with that paragraph as you add and delete text. If you add so much text before the graphics box that it no longer fits on the page, the box will move to the following page.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Position.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Position from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Position.

3	Select Put Box in Current Paragraph from the Box Placement group box.

In the Position Box group box, you can select the Position Box At Insertion Point When Created option by editing the box style. Choose Graphics Styles under See Also for more information.

4	Under Horizontal in the Position Box group box, specify a horizontal distance in relation to a page element (such as the right margin).

5	Under Vertical, specify a vertical distance from the top of the paragraph.

6	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Position

Graphics Styles

Put Box on Current Page

Treat Box as Character


Treat Box as Character

Graphics, Edit Box, Position, Treat Box as Character

Purpose

Use Treat Box as Character to change a paragraph-anchored graphics box or a page-anchored graphics box to a character-anchored box.

When a graphics box is anchored to a character, the box is treated as a single character in the text line. When you add text before the graphics box, the box moves from left to right as any text character would.

The top of the graphics box aligns with the top line of the document text unless you specify otherwise.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Position.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Position from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Position.

3	Select Treat Box as Character from the Box Placement group box.

4	Select a box alignment type from the Position Box group box.

5	If you want the current text line height to be based on the top-to-bottom height of the character-anchored graphics box, select Box Changes Text Line Height.

6	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Position

Put Box in Current Paragraph

Put Box on Current Page


Caption Position

Graphics, Edit Box, Caption, Caption Position

Purpose

Use Caption Position to position caption text in relation to a graphics box.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box with the caption you want to reposition.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Caption.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Caption from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Select from the following options:

         	Side of Box

Choose the side of the graphics box where the caption is placed.

         	Border

Choose to display the caption inside or outside the box border.

         	Position

Specify the alignment of a caption in conjunction with the Border option above.

         	Absolute Offset

Specify the distance you want to shift the caption text from the Alignment.

         	Percent Offset

Specify a percentage of the distance you want to shift the caption text from the Alignment, based on the width or height of the box.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Caption

Caption Numbering and Styles

Caption Width

Rotate Caption


Caption Width

Graphics, Edit Box, Caption, Caption Width

Purpose

Use Caption Width to adjust the white space above or below the caption.

Steps

1	Select the graphics box with the caption you want to adjust.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Caption.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Caption from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Select from the following options:

         	Auto Width

Automatically adjust the width of a caption based on the caption length and the width or height of the box.

         	Fixed

Specify a caption width measurement no greater than the width or height of the box.

         	Percent

Adjust the caption width by specifying a percentage based on the width or height of the box.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Caption

Caption Numbering and Styles

Caption Position

Rotate Caption


Rotate Caption

Graphics, Edit Box, Caption, Rotate Caption

Purpose

Use Rotate Caption to turn a caption 90, 180, or 270 degrees.

A caption rotates counterclockwise around its center.

Steps

1	Select the graphics box with the caption you want to rotate.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Caption.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Caption from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Select a degree of rotation from the Rotate Caption group box.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close on the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Caption

Caption Numbering and Styles

Caption Position

Caption Width


Caption Numbering and Styles

Graphics, Custom Box, Styles, Create or Edit, Caption, Caption Numbering and Styles

Purpose

Use Caption Numbering and Styles to change the Counter, Initial Style, and Number Style of a graphics box style.

Steps

1	Choose Custom Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Styles.

2	Highlight a box style in the Styles list box, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, then type a name for the new box style in the Style Name text box.

3	Choose Caption, then choose Change to the far right of Counter in the Caption Numbering and Styles group box.

4	Highlight a counter method from the Counters list box, then choose Select.

5	Choose Change to the far right of Initial Style or Number Style, then select the style you want.

6	Choose Apply, then choose OK until you return to the Box Styles dialog box.

7	Choose Select, then choose OK to return to the document window.

8	Choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Caption

Caption Position

Caption Width

Create or Edit Box Style

Rotate Caption

Select Counter

Styles

Styles Editor


Selection (Lines/Fill)

Table, Lines/Fill, Selection

Purpose

Use the Selection option on the Table Lines/Fill dialog box to change the line style, color, and fill options of the current selection, treated as one cell. For example, if you select a group of cells and change the line style for the left side, the entire left side of the selection will be changed.

Steps

1	Select several cells that contain lines and fill you want to change.

2	Choose Lines/Fill from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Lines/Fill.

3	Make sure Selection is selected at the top of the dialog box.

4	Select a line style from the Left, Right, Top, Bottom, Inside, or Outside palettes or drop-down lists in the Line Styles group box.

5	To turn off a line, select <None> from the appropriate drop-down list.

6	If you want all the lines in the current selection to have a uniform color, choose Custom Color, then choose a color from the color palette.

7	Select a fill style from the Fill Style palette or drop-down list in the Fill Options group box.

8	Select a color from the Foreground or Background palettes.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Cell (Lines/Fill)

Define Color Printing Palette

Each Selected Cell (Lines/Fill)

Table (Lines/Fill)


Table (Lines/Fill)

Table, Lines/Fill, Table

Purpose

Use the Table option on the Table Lines/Fill dialog box to change the line and border styles, color, and fill options of an entire table.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Lines/Fill from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Lines/Fill.

3	Choose Table.

4	Select a line style from either the Line Style palette or drop-down list in the Default Line Style group box.

5	Select a color from the Custom Color palette in the Default Line Style group box.

6	To turn off all table lines, choose <None> from either the Line Style palette or drop-down list in the Default Line Style group box.

7	Select a border style from either the Border palette or drop-down list in the Border Lines group box.

8	To turn off the border, select <None> from either the Border palette or drop-down list in the Border Lines group box.

9	Select a fill style from either the Fill Style palette or drop-down list in the Fill Options group box.

10	To specify a fill style for alternating columns or rows in the table, select Columns or Rows from the Alternating Fill pop-up list in the Fill Options group box.

11	To specify a fill style for the remaining alternating columns or rows in the table, select a fill style from either the Secondary Fill Style palette or drop-down list in the Fill Options group box.

12	To specify the number of columns or rows for each alternating fill style, click the arrow buttons next to the Span Count text boxes in the Fill Options group boxes.

13	Select a color for the fill style and secondary fill style from the Foreground and Background palettes in the Fill Options group box.

14	If you want to save the line, border, and fill settings you have created as the default for other tables in the document and for tables you create during subsequent WordPerfect sessions, select Initial Table Settings.

15	Choose OK.

See Also

About Borders

Cell (Lines/Fill)

Create or Edit Border Style (Table)

Define Color Printing Palette

Document (Display Preferences)

Each Selected Cell (Lines/Fill)

Initial Table Settings

Line Style

Selection (Lines/Fill)


Content Position Inside a Graphics Box

Graphics, Edit Box, Content, Content Position

Purpose

Use Content Position Inside a Graphics Box to change the horizontal and vertical positioning of the contents inside the graphics box.

Steps

1	Select the graphics box whose contents you want to move.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Content.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Content from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Content.

3	Choose the horizontal position you want from the Horizontal Position pop-up list.

4	Choose the vertical position you want from the Vertical Position pop-up list.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Position

Box Content

Rotate Contents Counterclockwise


Last Opened Files

File, Filename

Purpose

Use Last Opened Files to open one of the last four opened documents.

Steps

1	Choose the filename from the File menu.

or

Choose File, then type the number to the left of the file you want to retrieve.

See Also

Menu (Environment Preferences)


Position/Length

Graphics, Edit Line, Position/Length

Purpose

Use Position/Length to move a horizontal or vertical graphics line or to increase or decrease the line length.

Steps

1	Double-click the graphics line you want to edit.

2	Choose from the following options in the Position/Length group box:

         	Horizontal

Specify the horizontal position of a line (Set, Left, Right, Centered, Full, or Column Aligned). Select Set to specify a distance from the left edge of the page. Select Full if you want the horizontal line to extend from the left to the right margin.

         	Vertical

Specify the vertical position of a line (Set, Baseline, Top, Bottom, Centered, or Full). Select Set to specify a distance from the top edge of the page. Select Baseline to position the bottom edge of the horizontal line along the text baseline. Select Full if you want the vertical line to extend from the top margin to the bottom margin.

3	Specify a line length in the Length text box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Change Color

Change Thickness

Create or Edit Graphic Line

Custom Line/Graphics Spacing

Custom Box/Line Styles

Line Style


Change Color (Borders)

Graphics, Edit Box, Border/Fill

Purpose

Use Change Color to change the border line color of graphics boxes, graphics lines, or borders surrounding document text.

Steps

To change the color of a graphics box border,

1	Select the graphics box with the border color you want to change.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	To use the line color specified in the current line style, make sure Use Line Style Color is selected.

or

Select a line color from the Border Color pop-up palette.

5	Choose OK twice, then choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

To change the color of a paragraph, page, or column border,

1	Place the insertion point anywhere inside a paragraph, page, or column border.

2	Choose Paragraph, Page, or Columns from the Format menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	To use the line color specified in the current line style, make sure Use Line Style Color is selected.

or

Select a line color from the Border Color pop-up palette.

5	Choose OK.

To change the color of a horizontal or vertical graphics line,

1	Select a graphics line to edit.

2	Choose Edit Line from the Graphics menu.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics line, then choose Edit Horizontal Line or Edit Vertical Line.

3	To use the line color specified in the current line style, make sure Use Line Style Color is selected.

or

Select a line color from the Line Color pop-up palette.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Corners (Customize Border)

Create or Edit Graphic Line

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)

Space (Customize Border)


Change Thickness

Graphics, Edit Line, Change Thickness

Purpose

Use Change Thickness to alter the thickness of a graphics line.

Steps

1	Select a graphics line to edit.

2	Choose Edit Line from the Graphics menu.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics line, then select Edit Horizontal Line or Edit Vertical Line.

3	To use the line thickness specified in the current line style, make sure Use Line Style Thickness is selected.

or

Specify a line thickness from either the Thickness pop-up palette or the Thickness text box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Change Color

Create or Edit Graphic Line

Custom Box/Line Styles

Custom Line/Graphics Spacing

Line Style

Position/Length


Custom Line/Graphics Spacing

Graphics, Edit Line, Spacing

Purpose

Use Custom Line/Graphics Spacing to specify the spacing above and below a horizontal graphics line or the spacing between the margin and a left- or right-aligned vertical line.

Steps

1	Select a graphics line to edit.

2	Choose Edit Line from the Graphics menu.

You can also click the right button, then choose Edit Horizontal Line or Edit Vertical Line.

3	If the line type is horizontal, specify line spacing from either the Above Line or Below Line pop-up palette or the Above Line or Below Line text box.

or

If the line type is vertical, specify line spacing from either the Border Offset pop-up palette or the Border Offset text box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Change Color

Change Thickness

Create or Edit Graphic Line

Custom Box/Line Styles

Line Style

Position/Length


Blend Colors

Format, Font, Palette, Blend

Purpose

 Use Blend to combine two colors on the color palette.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Palette.

2	If you want the blend to span a complete row of the color palette, drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

or

If you want the blend to be contained to a block of the color palette, mark Select Rectangle, then drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

3	Choose Blend.

4	Choose OK to replace the current palette.

or

Choose Save As to save the palette with a new name.

See Also

Color Model

Color Wheel

Copy or Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Rainbow Colors


Color Model

Format, Font, Palette, Color Model

Purpose

Use Color Model to specify which color model (RGB, HLS, or CMYK) you want to use when creating color text.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Palette.

2	Choose Size, then select a size for the palette.

The numbers represent how many color squares will be included in the palette.

3	Highlight the square on the color palette that you want to replace.

4	Choose a color model from the Select Model pop-up list:

RGB

HLS

CMYK

5	Specify a value for each color model method in the Color Model group box.

6	Repeat steps 3-5 for each color you want to replace.

7	Choose OK to replace the current palette.

or

Choose Save As to save the palette with a new name.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Wheel

Copy or Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Rainbow Colors


Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)

Graphics, Edit Box, Border/Fill

Purpose

Use Select Sides to Modify to select which border lines (top, bottom, left, right, or all) you want to modify for a graphics box or a paragraph, page, or column border.

Steps

To select the graphics box border lines you want to modify,

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Make sure All is selected in the Select sides to modify group box.

or

Select or deselect individual lines.

5	Choose a line modification option from the list below.

To select the paragraph, page, or column border lines you want to modify

1	Place the insertion point anywhere inside a paragraph, page, or column border.

2	Choose Paragraph, Page, or Columns from the Format menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Make sure All is selected in the Select sides to modify group box.

or

Select or deselect individual lines.

The Separator line option inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.

5	Choose from the following line modification options:

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Space (Customize Border)


Space (Customize Border)

Purpose

Use Space to adjust the spacing inside and outside graphics box borders and borders surrounding paragraphs, pages, or columns.

Steps

To adjust the border space of a graphics box,

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Select Show Inside/Outside Spacing.

5	Make sure Auto Spacing is selected.

or

Specify spacing from either the Inside Space pop-up palette or text box, or the Outside pop-up palette or text box.

6	Choose OK until you return to the document window.

7	Choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

To adjust the border space of a paragraph, page, or column border,

1	Place the insertion point anywhere inside a paragraph, page, or column border.

2	Choose Paragraph, Page, or Columns from the Format menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Select Show Inside/Outside Spacing. This allows you to see the spacing (as indicated by the gray area) in the preview box.

5	Make sure Auto Spacing is selected.

or

Specify spacing from either the Inside Space pop-up palette or text box, or the Outside pop-up palette or text box.

6	Choose OK twice to return to your document window.

See Also

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)


Corners (Customize Border)

Graphics, Edit Box, Border/Fill

Purpose

Use Corners to make rounded or square corners for a graphics box that has identical line styles on all sides.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	If you want square corners, select Square Corners from the Corners group box.

or

If you want rounded corners, specify a corner radius in the Radius text box.

5	Choose OK twice, then choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Change Color

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)

Space (Customize Border)


Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Graphics, Edit Box, Border/Fill

Purpose

Use Drop Shadow to specify the color, placement, and width of a shadow behind a graphics box or a paragraph, page, or column border.

Steps

To specify a drop shadow for a graphics box,

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Select a shadow position from the Type pop-up palette in the Drop Shadow group box.

5	Select a shadow color from the Color pop-up palette.

6	Specify a shadow width from either the Width pop-up palette or the Width text box.

7	Choose OK twice, then choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

To specify a drop shadow for a paragraph, page, or column border,

1	Place the insertion point anywhere inside a paragraph, page, or column border.

2	Choose Paragraph, Page, or Columns from the Format menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Select a shadow position from the Type pop-up palette in the Drop Shadow group box.

5	Select a shadow color from the Color pop-up palette in the Drop Shadow group box.

6	Specify a shadow width from either the Width pop-up palette or the Width text box.

7	Choose OK twice.

See Also

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)

Space (Customize Border)


Color Wheel

Format, Font, Palette, Color Wheel

Purpose

Use the Color Wheel to define colors to be added to the color palette.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Palette.

2	Choose Size, then select a size for the palette.

The numbers represent how many color squares will be included with the palette.

3	Highlight the square on the color palette that you want to replace.

4	Drag the pointer on the color wheel until the color you want to use appears in the Current Color box, then release the mouse button.

5	Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each color you want to add.

6	Choose OK to replace the current palette.

or

Choose Save As to save the palette with a new name.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Model

Copy or Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Rainbow Colors


Power Bar

View, Power Bar

Purpose

Use the Power Bar to access commonly used features with the mouse.

To learn what the Power Bar can do, place the mouse pointer over the buttons and read the QuickTips nearby or the Help prompts at the top of the window.

Steps

To display or hide the Power Bar,

1	Choose Power Bar from the View menu.

After it is displayed, you can right click on the Power Bar, then choose Hide Power Bar.

To add or delete buttons, see Toolbar/Power Bar Editor.

To change display options and specify fonts, see Toolbar/Power Bar Options.

See Also

Toolbar

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences


Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Insert, Footnote or Endnote, Create

Purpose

You can create footnotes that print at the bottom of the page, or you can create endnotes that print at the end of the document. WordPerfect inserts the reference number in the text at your insertion point and keeps track of the corresponding note in the endnote or footnote. This means you can edit or add notes and WordPerfect will update the note and reference numbers for you.

Best of all, WordPerfect formats footnote pages for you, so you don't have to worry about how much text to type on the page and still leave room for the footnote.

Choose from the following to create either endnotes or footnotes:

Endnotes

Footnotes


Hypertext Feature Bar

Tools, Hypertext

Purpose

Use the Hypertext feature bar to perform a hypertext link you have created; create, edit, or delete a hypertext link; or edit the hypertext style.

Steps

1	Choose Hypertext from the Tools menu, then click the Deactivate button to change it to Activate.

2	Place the insertion point on the hypertext link you want to perform, edit, or delete.

or

Place the insertion point where you want to create a hypertext link or select the words or symbols you want to use as hypertext, then choose Create. (Skip step 3.)

3	Choose a button to perform one of the following actions:

         	Perform

Perform the defined hypertext link: jump to a bookmark within the current document, jump to another document, or run a macro.

         	Back

Take you back to the link in the original document. This button functions only if you have already jumped from a hypertext link to another document.

         	Next

Jump to the next hypertext link located after the insertion point in the current document.

         	Previous

Jump to the previous hypertext link located before the insertion point in the current document.

         	Edit

Edit a hypertext link.

         	Delete

Delete the current or selected hypertext link(s).

         	Style

Edit the hypertext style.

         	Close

Close the Hypertext feature bar.

See Also

About Macros

Bookmark

Create or Edit Hypertext Link

Styles


Column Break

Format, Columns, Column Break

Purpose

Use this feature to end a column and move to the next column.

Steps

1	Choose Columns from the Format menu.

2	Choose Column Break.

See Also

Column Spacing, Column Widths


Booklet Printing

Format, Page, Binding/Duplex

Format, Page, Subdivide Page

File, Print, Options, Booklet Printing

Purpose

Use Booklet Printing (with Subdivide Page and Duplexing) to create programs and booklet-style documents with pages numbered and arranged for you.

If you have a printer that supports duplexing, you can also print on both sides of the page.

Steps

1	If your printer supports double-sided printing, choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Binding/Duplexing.

2	Select a Duplexing option, then choose OK.

3	To subdivide pages, choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Subdivide Page.

4	Specify 2 columns and 1 row for booklet format, then choose OK.

5	Create the text and graphics for your document in normal sequential order.

For example, create the front cover, then page 1 through the last page.

6	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Options.

7	Select Booklet Printing.

8	Choose OK, then choose Print.

When the document finishes printing, information will be arranged and numbered on the physical page so that you can fold the pages in the middle to make a booklet.

See Also

Print Output Options

Subdivide Page


Print Individual Labels

File, Print, Multiple Pages

Purpose

Use this feature to print individual labels.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu

2	Select Multiple Pages, then choose Print.

3	Select Page(s), then type the number of each label or a range of labels, according to the following table:

Type	To Print
3	Label 3
3,5,8	Labels 3, 5, 8
3 8	Labels 3 and 8
3-	Label 3 through the end of the document
-3	Beginning of the document through label 3
3-8	Labels 3 through 8
-3 8	Labels 1 through 3 and label 8
3,5,9-15	Labels 3, 5, and 9 through 15
4	Choose Print.

See Also

Labels

Printers/Labels (File Preferences)


Numbering Method (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Insert, Endnote, Options, Numbering Method

Insert, Footnote, Options, Numbering Method

Purpose

Use Numbering Method to change the footnote or endnote numbering method.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Footnote Options or Endnote Options dialog box.

2	Choose a numbering method from the Method pop-up list.

If you choose Characters, type the character(s) in the Characters text box. You can also press Ctrl+w, then specify any WordPerfect character.

3	If you want to restart footnote numbering on every page, select Restart Numbering on Each Page.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Edit Numbering Style (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Footnote or Endnote Number


Edit Numbering Style (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Insert, Endnote, Options, Edit Numbering Style

Insert, Footnote, Options, Edit Numbering Style

Purpose

Use Edit Numbering Style to specify a format for all footnote or endnote numbers in document text and to format your footnotes or endnotes so they look the same throughout the document.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Footnote Options or Endnote Options dialog box.

2	If you want to specify a format for all footnote or endnote numbers in document text, choose In Text, make formatting changes, then choose OK.

3	If you want to format your footnotes or endnotes so that they look the same throughout the document, choose In Note, make formatting changes, then choose OK.

See Also

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Footnote or Endnote Number

Numbering Method (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Styles Editor


Spacing Between Notes

Insert, Endnote, Options, Spacing Between Notes

Insert, Footnote, Options, Spacing Between Notes

Purpose

Use Spacing Between Notes to specify the amount of space between footnotes or endnotes.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Footnote Options or Endnote Options dialog box.

2	Specify a new measurement in the Space text box, then choose OK.

See Also

Continuous Notes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Endnote Placement (in Document)

Footnote or Endnote Number

Line Separator

Position of Footnotes (on Page)


Continuous Notes

Insert, Endnote, Options, Continuous Notes

Insert, Footnote, Options, Continued Footnotes

Purpose

Use Continuous Notes or Continued Footnotes to change the formatting for notes that continue from one page to another.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Footnote Options or Endnote Options dialog box.

2	If you want, change the amount of footnote or endnote to keep together.

If space is not available for a footnote near the bottom margin of a page, it is moved to the next page.

3	If you want to print (continued...) on the last footnote line of each page and the first footnote line of each subsequent page, select Insert (continued...) Message.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Edit Numbering Style (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Endnote Placement (in Document)

Endnote Options

Footnote or Endnote Number

Footnote Options

Line Separator

Numbering Method (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Spacing Between Notes


Position of Footnotes (on Page)

Insert, Footnote, Options, Position

Purpose

Use Position of Footnotes to specify whether footnotes print immediately below the last line of text or at the bottom of the page.

Steps

1	Choose Footnote from the Insert menu, then choose Options.

2	Select an option under Position to indicate whether you want to print footnotes immediately below the last line of text or at the bottom of the page.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Footnote or Endnote Number

Line Separator

Spacing Between Notes


Options (Style List or Outline Style)
Options (Styles or Outline Style)

Format, Styles, Options

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Options

Purpose

Use Options to set up, copy, delete, reset, retrieve, and save styles.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Style List dialog box or the Outline Define dialog box.

2	Choose any of the following options:

Setup

Copy

Delete

Retrieve

Save As

See Also

Styles

Styles Editor


Convert Case

Edit, Convert Case

Purpose

Use Convert Case to change text to uppercase or lowercase letters or initial caps.

Steps

1	Select the text to be changed.

or

Position the insertion point anywhere in the word you want to change.

2	Choose Convert Case from the Edit menu.

3	Choose Lowercase, Uppercase, or Initial Capitals.

If you change selected text from uppercase to lowercase, the first letter in each sentence remains uppercase.

See Also

Select

QuickSelect


Cut, Copy, Paste

Edit, Cut or Copy or Paste

Purpose

Use Cut with Paste to move selected text or graphics, or use Copy with Paste to copy selected text or graphics. Once you have cut or copied information, you can paste it anywhere in the current document, in another document, or in another application, until you exit Windows.

Steps

To cut or copy information,

1	Select the text or graphics you want to cut or copy.

2	Choose Cut or Copy from the Edit menu.

To paste information,

1	Position the insertion point where you want to insert the information.

2	Choose Paste from the Edit menu.

See Also

Append

Drag and Drop Text

Select

QuickSelect

Undo or Redo


Append

Edit, Append

Purpose

Use Append to add selected text to the end of the contents on the Windows Clipboard.

The Windows Clipboard must contain text before you can use Append.

Steps

1	Select the text you want to append.

2	Choose Append from the Edit menu.

The selection stays on the Clipboard until you use Cut or Copy to replace it with a new selection or until you exit Windows.

3	Paste the Clipboard contents into a document by choosing Paste from the Edit menu.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Select

QuickSelect


Select

Edit, Select

Purpose

Use Select to highlight (or block) text you want to modify. To quickly select a word, sentence, or paragraph with the mouse, use  QuickSelect. Also, to select text in a table with the mouse, use QuickSelect.

Steps

To use the mouse,

1	Hold down the mouse button, drag across the text you want to select, then release the mouse button. Notice that text is selected word by word instead of character by character.

To select text character by character (part of a word), you can press Alt before you drag across text.  You can also turn off Automatically Select Words in Environment Preferences.

To cancel a selection,

1	 Click the mouse anywhere outside the selection.

To select text using the menu,

1	Place the insertion point anywhere in the text you want to select.

2	Choose Select from the Edit menu, then choose from the following options:

         	Sentence

Select the sentence at the insertion point.

         	Paragraph

Select the paragraph at the insertion point.

         	Page

Select all text and graphics on the page.

         	All

Select the entire document.

         	Tabular Column

Select columns created using Tab or Indent.

         	Rectangle

Select a rectangular-shaped portion of text without disturbing other text on the page.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Drag and Drop Text

Environment Preferences

Find and Replace Text

Keystrokes

Undelete

Undo or Redo


Undo or Redo

Edit, Undo or Redo

Purpose

Use Undo to reverse your last editing action. Use Redo to reverse the last Undo action.

Unlike Undelete, which lets you restore recently deleted information at the insertion point, Undo lets you restore information in its original location.

Steps

1	Choose Undo from the Edit menu to reverse your last editing action.

or

Choose Redo from the Edit menu to reverse the last Undo action.

You can undo changes made to text, graphics, or tables. However, some actions, such as scrolling or saving a document, are not affected by Undo.

See Also

Undelete

Undo/Redo History


View Modes

View, Draft or Page or Two Page

Purpose

You can work with your documents in three view modes: Draft, Page, and Two Page. In Draft and Page view, you can use Zoom to change the display size of the text or graphics you are viewing.

Steps

To change the view mode,

1	Choose Draft, Page, or Two Page from the View menu.

To use Page view with full page zoom,

1	Choose Zoom from the View menu, choose Full Page, then choose OK.

or

Click the magnifying glass button on the Toolbar.

To change the default view mode,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Display.

2	Choose View/Zoom.

3	Select the Default View you want, choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Windowing

Zoom


Show Symbols

View, Show

Purpose

Use Show Symbols to display a symbol wherever there is a space, a hard return, a tab, or an indent. Symbols also display when you use center, flush right, soft hyphen, advance, or center page.

Steps

To display or hide symbols,

1	Choose Show from the View menu.

To customize the display of symbols,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Show.

Make sure that the options you want to display symbols for are selected.

If you choose Show Symbols on New and Current Document, all of the symbols you have selected will appear each time you start WordPerfect until you change them.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Show (Display Preferences)


Reveal Codes

View, Reveal Codes

Purpose

Use Reveal Codes to view the formatting codes in your document.

Steps

To view or hide codes,

1	Choose Reveal Codes from the View menu.

You can make the Reveal Codes area larger or smaller by dragging the Reveal Codes dividing line up or down.

You can also drag the divider line to the top or bottom of the window, or click the right mouse button in the Reveal Codes area, then choose Hide Reveal Codes from the QuickMenu that appears.

To remove codes,

1	If necessary, choose Reveal Codes from the View menu.

2	Drag the code off.

See Also

Reveal Codes (Display Preferences)


Record Types (Sort)

Tools, Sort, New, Sort By

Purpose

You can sort using different record types, such as lines, paragraphs, and rows in a table.

Steps

1	Select the text you want to sort.

2	Choose Sort from the Tools menu, then choose New.

3	Select one of the record types listed below:

         	Line

Each line ends with a hard return.

Record Division: Field, Word

         	Paragraph

Each paragraph ends with two or more hard returns.

Record Division: Field, Line, Word

         	Merge Record

Each merge record ends with an ENDRECORD code.

Record Division: Field, Line, Word

         	Table Row

Each record is a row of cells.

Record Division: Column, Line, Word

         	Column

Each record is a row of columns.

Record Division: Column, Line, Word

Records are subdivided into smaller pieces to give you more flexibility for sorting. The following defines the terms used to divide records:

         	Fields

In ordinary text, each line is a field. Tabs and indents divide a single line into two or more fields.

         	Lines

Each line ends with a hard return (or a soft return when sorting a paragraph).

         	Words

Words are separated by spaces and by the separators listed in the Date and Time separator fields of your language resource file (WP.LRS).

         	Columns

Columns are divided by hard page breaks and are numbered from left to right. In a table, a column is a vertical row of cells.

See Also

Key Definitions (Sort)

Select Records (Sort)

Sort

User's Guide: Language Resource File


Key Definitions (Sort)

Tools, Sort, Key Definitions

Purpose

A sort key determines the order in which a list will be sorted. For example, when sorting a list of names, you may want to use two keys. The first key would sort by last name, and the second key would sort by first name. This way, if the last names are identical, the items would be sorted by first name.

Steps

1	Select the text you want to sort.

2	Choose Sort from the Tools menu.

3	Choose New to create a new key definition.

4	Type a name in the Sort Name text box.

5	Select the type of sort you will sort by.

6	Change the options in the Key Definition group box:

Key

Type

Sort Order

If you want to sort by the last item in a list, use a negative number (-1).

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Record Types (Sort)

Select Records (Sort)

Sort


Select Records (Sort)

Tools, Sort, Select Records

Purpose

When you create a new sort definition or edit an existing sort definition, you can use the Select Records option to extract records that meet specified criteria.

Steps

1	Select the text from which records will be extracted. If you do not select text, records will be extracted from the entire document.

2	Choose Sort from the Tools menu.

3	Specify the input file (the file you are extracting records from) and the output file (where you want the extracted records to go).

4	Choose new to create a new sort definition.

or

Highlight an existing sort definition in the Defined Sorts list box, then choose Edit.

5	Specify the name of your sort in the Sort Name text box.

6	Place the insertion point in the Select Records text box.

7	Using the selection operators (visible on the Status Bar), type the selection statement in text box.

For example, key 4=84057 selects only those records that have 84057 in the field defined in key 4.

         	| (OR)

Selects records that meet the conditions of either key.

         	& (AND)

Selects records that meet the conditions of both keys.

         	=

Selects records that have exactly the same information in an indicated key.

         	< >

Selects records that do not match the information for an indicated key.

         	>

Selects records that have information greater than the information for an indicated key.

         	<

Selects records that have information less than the information for an indicated key.

         	> =

Selects records that have information greater than or equal to the information for an indicated key.

         	< =

Selects records that have information less than or equal to the information for an indicated key.

8	If you do not want to sort the records that will be extracted, choose Select Without Sorting.

9	Choose OK to return to the Sort dialog box.

Your sort definition is now saved in the Defined Sorts list box. You can save up to 50 definitions for use later.

10	Make sure Allow Undo is selected (checked) from the Options pop-up list.

11	Choose Sort to extract the records.

12	If the records were not extracted as you wanted them to be, choose Undo from the Edit menu.

See Also

Key Definitions (Sort)

Record Types (Sort)

Sort


Page Numbering Options

Format, Page, Numbering, Options

Purpose

Use Page Numbering Options to format the page numbers in your document with text and multiple numbers.

Steps

To change the number type,

1	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Numbering.

2	Choose Options.

3	Select a numbering method from the Page, Secondary, Chapter, or Volume pop-up list.

4	Choose OK.

To include text with the page number,

1	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Numbering.

2	Choose Options.

3	Type the text in Format and Accompanying Text.

The page number code [Pg#] shows the position of the page number in the text you type.

4	Choose OK until you return to your document.

To include chapter numbers, volume numbers, and secondary numbers,

1	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Numbering.

2	Choose Options.

3	In Format and Accompanying Text, place the insertion point where you want the chapter, volume, or secondary number to go.

4	Choose Insert.

5	Choose Chapter Number, Volume Number, or Secondary Number.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Numbering Value (Pages)

Page Numbering


Document Summary Options

File, Document Summary, Options

Purpose

Use Document Summary Options to perform several tasks.

Steps

To print a summary,

1	Choose Document Summary from the File menu.

2	Choose Options, then choose Print Summary.

To delete a summary,

1	Choose Document Summary from the File menu.

2	Choose Options, choose Delete Summary From Document, then choose Yes.

To extract information from a document,

1	Choose Document Summary from the File menu.

2	Choose Options, then choose Extract Information From Document.

To save a summary as a separate document file,

1	Choose Document Summary from the File menu.

2	Choose Options, then choose Save Summary As New Document.

3	Type a filename in the Filename text box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Document Summary

Document Summary Configuration

Document Summary Preferences


Code Page (Font Mapping)

Format, Font, Font Map, Code Pages

Purpose

Different ASCII or ANSI character sets are used for different languages. If you are using a non-English font (such as Greek or Hebrew) for the printer you have currently selected, you need to select the code page that corresponds to that font.

Steps

To edit the Code Pages mapping table for a non-English font,

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Font Map.

2	Choose Code Pages in the Item to Map group box.

3	Select the non-English font to which you want to assign a new code page.

4	Select the language code page that corresponds to the font face you have chosen.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Automatic Font Change

Display (Font Mapping)

Document (Font Mapping)

Edit Printer/Document Font Mapping


Word Spacing Justification Limits

Format, Typesetting, Word/Letter Spacing, Word Spacing Justification Limits

Purpose

Use Word Spacing Justification Limits to adjust spacing between words in fully justified text.

Steps

1	Choose Typesetting from the Format menu, then choose Word/Letter Spacing.

2	Specify the lower limit (Compressed To:  (0% to 100%)).

If the lower limit is set at 60%, then the space between words in justified text will be at least 60% of the original space.

3	Specify the upper limit (Expanded To:  (100% to 9999%)).

If the upper limit is set at 400%, then the space between words in justified text will not be larger than 400% of the original space.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Word Spacing and Letterspacing


Line Height (Leading) Adjustment

Format, Typesetting, Word/Letter Spacing, Adjust Leading

Purpose

Use Line Height (Leading) Adjustment to adjust the spacing between lines of text in your document.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the new leading to begin.

or

Select the text for which you want to change the leading.

2	Choose Typesetting from the Format menu, then choose Word/Letter Spacing.

3	Select Adjust Leading.

4	Specify the amount of space you want to add to the line height. A negative number will decrease the line height.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Line Height


Automatic Kerning

Format, Typesetting, Word/Letter Spacing, Automatic Kerning

Purpose

Use Automatic Kerning to adjust the spacing for all occurrences of predefined pairs of letters. The font you are using determines which letter pairs are kerned.

Steps

1	Choose Typesetting from the Format menu, then choose Word/Letter Spacing.

2	Select Automatic Kerning.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Advance

Manual Kerning

Word/Letter Spacing


Baseline Placement for Typesetting

Format, Typesetting, Word/Letter Spacing, Baseline Placement for Typesetting

Purpose

Use Baseline Placement for Typesetting to place the first baseline at the top margin of the page.

Steps

1	Choose Typesetting from the Format menu, then choose Word/Letter Spacing.

2	Select Baseline Placement for Typesetting.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Advance


Date

Insert, Date

Purpose

Use Date to place the current date and time in your documents and to change the date format.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the date.

2	Choose Date from the Insert menu, then choose Date Text or Date Code.

Date text is never updated to reflect the current date. A date code is updated each time you open, insert, or print the document.

See Also

Custom Date Format

Date Format


Insert Filename/Path and Filename

Insert, Other, Filename or Path and Filename

Purpose

Use Insert Filename to insert the name of the current file into your document text, comment, header, or footer.

Use Insert Path and Filename to insert both the path and the filename.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the name.

2	Choose Other from the Insert menu.

3	Choose Filename to insert the filename.

or

Choose Path and Filename to insert the path with the filename.

A Filename code is inserted. If the document has been saved, its filename displays on screen. Otherwise, the filename will be displayed when the document is saved.

Whenever you change the name, WordPerfect updates it.

See Also

Comment

Header/Footer

Managing Files


Invert Colors

Format, Font, Palette, Invert

Purpose

Use Invert to create complements for a single color or for a group of colors.

Complementary colors are colors found at opposite sides of the color wheel.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Palette.

2	Select a color from the color palette.

or

If you want to invert a complete row of the color palette, drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

or

If you want to invert a block of the color palette, mark Select Rectangle, then drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

3	Choose Invert.

4	Choose OK to replace the current palette.

or

Choose Save As to save the palette with a new name.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Model

Color Wheel

Copy or Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Rainbow Colors


Copy or Paste Colors

Format, Font, Palette, Copy or Paste

Purpose

Use Copy and Paste to copy a color from one cell of the color palette to another.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Palette.

2	Select a color from the color palette.

or

If you want to copy a complete row of the color palette, drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

or

If you want to copy a block of the color palette, mark Select Rectangle, then drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

3	Choose Copy.

4	Select the box where you want to copy the color, then choose Paste.

5	Choose OK to replace the current palette.

or

Choose Save As to save the palette with a new name.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Model

Color Wheel

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Rainbow Colors


Page Break

Insert, Page Break

Purpose

Use Page Break to insert a hard page break anywhere you want a new page to begin.

Steps

To insert a hard page break,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to end the page.

2	Choose Page Break from the Insert menu.

To delete a hard page break,

1	Move the insertion point to the end of the page before the hard page break, then press Delete.

or

Choose Reveal Codes from the View menu, then drag the [HPg] code off the screen.

See Also

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Header/Footer

Keep Text Together

Master Document

Reveal Codes


Center Line

Format, Line, Center

Purpose

You can center a single line of text between the left and right margins of your document.

Steps

To type centered text,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to type centered text.

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Center.

To add dot leaders, perform step 2 twice.

You can also click the right mouse button anywhere in the document window, then choose Center.

3	Type the text, then press Enter.

You can also center existing text by placing the insertion point in front of the text, then following step 2.

To center text at a specific position,

1	Tab or space to the position on the line where you want to begin centering text.

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Center.

To add a dot leader, choose Center again.

You can also click the right mouse button anywhere in the document window, then choose Center.

3	Type the text, then press Enter.

See Also

About Formatting

Center Page(s)

Justification


Flush Right

Format, Line, Flush Right

Purpose

Use Flush Right to align a single line of text with the right margin, to align selected lines of text, to move part of a line to the right margin, or to insert dot leaders.

Steps

To align a single line of text,

1	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Flush Right.

2	Type the text you want aligned at the right margin.

The text should be one line or shorter.

3	Press Enter to end the flush right alignment and begin a new line.

To align selected text,

1	Select the text you want aligned at the right margin.

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Flush Right.

To align part of a line,

1	Place the insertion point at the beginning of the text you want aligned at the right margin.

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Flush Right.

To insert a dot leader,

1	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Flush Right.

2	Repeat step 1, then type text.

See Also

About Formatting

Justification


DDE Execute

DDE Execute is a Windows feature that enhances product integration by allowing applications to instruct each another to perform specific tasks (execute commands).  For example, using DDE Execute you can create macros in WordPerfect 6.1 that send commands to control other Windows applications.  In order for this to work, the other application must accept DDE Execute strings.  See the WordPerfect 6.1 Macros Help file for information on the DDEInitiate(), DDEExecute(), and DDETerminate() programming commands.  Also, see the documentation for the other Windows application.  The information you need includes the service (application) name, topic name, and list of commands it will accept through DDE Execute.

In addition, Windows applications can use DDE Execute to control WordPerfect 6.1.  The application must first initiate a DDE conversation using the service (application) name of "WPWin60_Macros" and topic name of "Commands".  Before terminating the conversation, the application can send DDE Execute strings made up of one or more WordPerfect 6.1 macro commands.  Note that WordPerfect 6.1 will accept only product commands, not programming commands.  These product commands may not contain variables or expressions.  See the WordPerfect 6.1 Macros Help file for a list of product commands and descriptions.

Windows applications can also send commands to WordPerfect 6.1 as a DDE Request item in order to receive a string representing the command's return value.  The application must send the DDE Execute string or DDE Request item in ANSI text format.  WordPerfect 6.1 will return the DDE Request result as an ANSI text string.  If either a DDE Execute string or a DDE Request item returns an error, the application can send a DDE Request on the item "LastCmdError" to find out what went wrong.  This item will return an ANSI text string containing a three-digit error code and a description of the error.

DDE Execute Application Names, Services, and Topics:

Application	Service, Topic
GroupWise	GroupWise, Command
InfoCentral	WPIC, RunMacro
Envoy	Envoy, System
Presentations	WPPresentations, Command
Quattro Pro	QPW, <full path and filename of open notebook>
WPWin	WPWin60_Macros, Commands
Envoy and InfoCentral act as servers for DDE Execute, but not clients. This means that you can use DDE Execute in products to send commands to Envoy and InfoCentral, but you cannot use DDE Execute in Envoy or InfoCentral to send commands to other products. For information about the DDE commands you can use with Envoy and InfoCentral, see the Software Development Kits that are available for these products.

See Also

Macros Online Help


Close and Exit

File, Close or Exit

Purpose

Use Close to exit the current document. Use Exit to exit any open documents and then exit WordPerfect.

WordPerfect prompts you to save any changes you have made to a document before you close or exit it.

Steps

To close the current document,

1	Choose Close from the File menu.

If you have not changed the document since the last time you saved it, the document closes. If you have changed the document, you are prompted to save your work.

2	Choose Yes to save the changes and exit the document.

or

Choose No to close the document without saving it.

To exit WordPerfect,

1	Choose Exit from the File menu.

2	Choose Yes to save the changes to the document and exit WordPerfect.

or

Choose No to continue exiting without saving the document.

See Also

Clear


Line (Format)

Format, Line

Purpose

Choose from the following topics for information on changing the format of a line:

Tab Set

Height

Spacing

Numbering

Hyphenation

Center

Flush Right

Other Codes

See Also

About Formatting

Document (Format)

Font

Page (Format)

Paragraph (Format)


Indent

Format, Paragraph, Indent

Purpose

Use Indent to move a complete paragraph one tab stop to the right. Use Hanging Indent to move all but the first line of a paragraph one tab stop to the right. Use Double Indent to move an entire paragraph in one tab stop from both margins.

When creating a bibliography, use a hanging indent.

Steps

1	Choose Paragraph from the Format menu, then choose Indent, Hanging Indent, or Double Indent.

2	Type the text you want to indent.

3	Press Enter to end the indentation.

You can indent an existing paragraph by placing the insertion point in front of the first character in the paragraph, then choosing the type of indent you want.

See Also

About Formatting

Margins

Paragraph Format

Tab Set


Back Tab

Format, Paragraph, Back Tab

Purpose

Use Back Tab to move the insertion point to the previous tab setting. You can also move the insertion point left of the left margin to the previous tab setting.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to tab to the left.

2	Choose Paragraph from the Format menu, then choose Back Tab.

or

Press Shift+Tab.

You can use Back Tab on an existing paragraph by placing the insertion point in front of the first character in the paragraph, then choosing Back Tab.

See Also

Indent

Margins

Ruler Bar

Tab Key

Tab Set


Paragraph (Format)

Format, Paragraph

Purpose

Choose from the following topics for information on changing the format of a paragraph:

Format

Border/Fill Styles

Indent

Hanging Indent

Double Indent

Back Tab

See Also

About Formatting

Document (Format)

Font

Line (Format)

Page (Format)


Page (Format)

Format, Page

Purpose

Choose from the following topics for information on changing the format of a page:

Center

Suppress

Delay Codes

Force Page

Keep Text Together

Border/Fill Styles

Numbering

Subdivide Page

Binding/Duplex

Paper Size

See Also

About Formatting

Document (Format)

Font

Line (Format)

Paragraph (Format)


Document (Format)

Format, Document

Purpose

Choose from the following topics for information on changing the format of a document:

Initial Font

Initial Codes Style

Redline Method

Character Mapping

See Also

About Formatting

Font

Line (Format)

Page (Format)

Paragraph (Format)


Justification

Format, Justification

Purpose

Use Justification to align text on the right and left margins or to center text between the margins.

Steps

To use justification,

1	Place the insertion point where you want the justification to begin.

2	Choose Justification from the Format menu, choose the justification type you want, then type the text.

To justify existing text,

1	Select the text you want to justify.

or

Place the insertion point anywhere on a line or in a paragraph where you want justification to begin.

2	Choose Justification from the Format menu, then choose the justification type you want.

See Also

About Formatting

Center Line

Center Page(s)

Flush Right

Format (Table)

Power Bar

Select


Typesetting

Format, Typesetting

Purpose

Use the typesetting features to adjust justification limits, letterspacing, word spacing, text advance and overstrike, baseline placement, and kerning and to insert printer commands.

Choose from the following topics:

Advance

Overstrike

Printer Command

Word/Letter Spacing

Manual Kerning

See Also

About Formatting

Baseline Placement for Typesetting

Line Height (Leading) Adjustment


Graphics Box

Graphics, Image or Text Box or Equation or Figure or Table or User or Button or Watermark or Inline Equation or OLE 2.0 Box

Purpose

Use Graphics Box to import clip art images, logos, charts, or drawings into your document and to create tables, quotes, text, sidebars, or equations.

There are several ways to add a graphic to a document. One method is to enable the feature Drag to Create from the Graphics menu to "draw" the graphics box directly into your document. This method gives you greater control over the initial size and location of the box on the page.

Another method is to retrieve a clip art image, a chart, or a drawing directly into a document using the Image or Figure graphics box style.

You can also add a graphic to a document by creating a custom graphics box using the style you want and then put text, a clip art image, a chart, a drawing, or an equation inside the box.

Choose from the following graphics box styles:

     	Image

Clip art images, charts, logos, or drawings created in WordPerfect graphics format (.WPG) or in another supported graphics format

     	Text Box

Quotes, sidebars, or any other textual information you want to set off from the main document

     	Equation

Mathematical, scientific, or business formulas and expressions

     	Figure

Clip art images, charts, logos, or drawings created in WordPerfect graphics format (.WPG) or in another supported graphics format

     	Table

Tables, spreadsheets, statistical data, or text

     	User

Clip art images, drawings, charts, text, equations, or tables

     	Button

Text, clip art images or drawings; use to graphically document a keystroke, a pushbutton, or an icon in your document

     	Watermark

Drawing, chart, logo, clip art image, table, or typed text printed behind the document text

     	Inline Equation

An equation or expression inserted in a line of text

     	OLE 2.0 Box

OLE objects

The Image, Text Box, and Equation box styles are already added to the Graphics menu; you can add additional graphics box styles.

Steps

To add a graphics box,

1	Choose Custom Box from the Graphics menu, then use Drag to Create to draw the graphics box into your document.

or

Place the insertion point in the paragraph where you want the graphics box to appear, then choose Custom Box from the Graphics menu.

2	Highlight a box style in the Style Name group box,then choose OK.

3	Choose Content from the feature bar, then select Empty, Image, Text, Equation, or Image on Disk from the Content pop-up list.

4	If you selected Image or Image on Disk from the Content pop-up list, specify the path and filename of the image file.

or

Click the list button, then specify the path and filename of the image file.

5	If you selected Image or Image on Disk from the Content pop-up list, choose Edit to enter the graphics program and edit the image, or choose OK to return to your document. To return to your document from the graphics program, choose Close and Return to Document from the File menu.

or

If you selected Text from the Content pop-up list, choose Edit, then type the text you want, create a table, define columns, or retrieve an existing document file. When you are finished, choose Close on the feature bar to return to your document.

or

If you selected Equation from the Content pop-up list, choose Edit to enter the Equation Editor and create your equation. When you are finished, choose Close from the File menu.

See Also

Box Content

Create or Edit Equations

Edit Graphics Menu

Insert Images

Watermark


Join Cell/Table

Table, Join, Cell or Table

Purpose

Use Join Cells to join together cells you have selected. Use Join Table to join two tables that have the same number of columns.

Steps

To join cells,

1	Select the cells you want to join.

2	Choose Join from the Table menu, then choose Cell.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Join Cells.

To join tables,

1	If the two tables are separated by text, move the text so that the second table immediately follows the first table.

2	Turn on Reveal Codes, then delete all hard return codes and any other codes between the [Tbl Off] code of the first table and the [Tbl Def] code of the second table until the Table codes are next to each other.

3	Place the insertion point in the first table.

4	Choose Join from the Table menu, then choose Table.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Split Cell

Split Table


Split Table

Table, Split

Purpose

Use Split to divide a table into two parts.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to divide the table.

2	Choose Split from the Table menu, then choose Table.

3	Turn on Reveal Codes and move the insertion point between the [Tbl Off] code of the first table and the [Tbl Def] code of the second table, then press Enter a few times to separate the tables.

See Also

Join Cell/Table

Reveal Codes

Split Cell


Cascade

Window, Cascade

Purpose

When you have more than one document window open (not minimized), you can use Cascade to arrange the windows. Cascaded windows overlap so that the title bar of each window is displayed.

Steps

1	Choose Cascade from the Window menu.

See Also

Arranging Windows

Tile Windows

Windowing


Tile Windows

Window, Tile Horizontal or Tile Vertical

Purpose

When you have more than one document window open (not minimized), you can use Tile Horizontal to arrange wide short windows. Or you can use Tile Vertical to arrange tall narrow windows. Tiled windows are arranged on the screen with no overlapping.

Steps

1	Choose Tile Horizontal or Tile Vertical from the Window menu.

See Also

Arranging Windows

Cascade

Windowing


Select Cell

Purpose

Use this feature to select a cell in your table so you can apply line and fill attributes to that cell.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell you want to select.

2	Press Shft+F8.

You can also use QuickSelect to select a cell, row or column, or the entire table.

See Also

Table Lines/Fill


Spell Check

Tools, Spell Check

Purpose

Use Spell Check to check your document for misspelled words, duplicate words, and irregular capitalization.

Steps

1	Choose Spell Check from the Tools menu.

2	If you want help on a Spell Check feature, choose Contents from the Spell Check Help menu.

or

Choose Spell Check to open Spell Check Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy the WPSH20US.HLP file to your main WordPerfect directory (for example, c:\office\wpwin).

See Also

QuickCorrect

Grammatik

Language

Thesaurus

Writing Tools Preferences


Thesaurus

Tools, Thesaurus

Purpose

Use Thesaurus to display synonyms or antonyms of words.

Steps

1	Choose Thesaurus from the Tools menu.

2	If you want help on a Thesaurus feature, choose Contents from the Thesaurus Help menu.

or

Choose Thesaurus to open Thesaurus Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy the WPSH20US.HLP file to your main WordPerfect directory (for example, c:\office\wpwin).

See Also

Grammatik

Language

Spell Check

Writing Tools Preferences


Grammatik

Tools, Grammatik

Purpose

Use Grammatik to check your document for spelling, grammar and punctuation errors and style flaws.

Steps

1	Choose Grammatik from the Tools menu.

2	If you want help on a Grammatik feature, choose Contents from the Grammatik Help menu.

or

Choose Grammatik to open Grammatik Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy the GKW60US.HLP and WTGW60US.HLP files to your main WordPerfect directory (for example, c:\office\wpwin).

See Also

Spell Check

Thesaurus

Writing Tools Preferences


version

One of possibly many revisions of a published document. As publisher, you can issue new versions of active publications to subscribers at any time. Mailed documents are sent on a one-time basis.


Equation Editor

Graphics, Equation

Purpose

Use the Equation Editor to create and edit mathematical, scientific, or business formulas and expressions, then include them in your WordPerfect documents.

An equation or expression can be composed of numbers, letters, commands, symbols, and mathematical functions.

You can insert numbers and letters (also called variables) into the editing window by typing them from the keyboard. You can insert commands, symbols, and mathematical functions by selecting them from the equation palette on the left side of the equation editor screen.

The equation palette has several groups that contain different sets of commands, symbols, and mathematical functions. You can select the group from the Equation Palette pop-up list.

Choose from the following equation topics:

Create or Edit Equations

Equation Font

Equation Palette


Format Cell

Table, Format, Cell

Purpose

Use Format Cell to customize the text in the current cell or in a group of cells.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell you want to format.

or

Select the cells you want to format.

2	Choose Format from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Format.

3	Choose from the following options:

         	Appearance

Changes the appearance of text in the cell(s).

         	Ignore Cell When Calculating

Prevents WordPerfect from using the contents of a cell when formulas are calculated.

         	Justification

Aligns cell text horizontally.

         	Lock

Prevents information in a cell from being changed.

         	Text Size

Positions text as superscript or subscript, or selects a new size.

         	Use Column Appearance and Text Size

Clears current cell settings and uses column settings.

         	Use Column Justification

Applies the current column justification setting to a cell.

         	Vertical Alignment

Aligns cell text vertically.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Format Column (Table)

Format Row

Format Table

QuickSelect


Format Column (Table)

Table, Format, Column

Purpose

Use Format Column to customize the text in the current column or several columns.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the column you want to format.

or

Select the columns you want to format.

2	Choose Format from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Format.

3	Select Column.

4	Choose from the following options:

         	Appearance

Changes the appearance of text in column(s).

         	Column Margins

Sets the left and right column margins.

         	Column Width

Sets column width.

         	Digits after Decimal

Sets the position, in decimal places, where the decimal will be placed.

         	Fixed Width

Keeps the width of a column fixed regardless of margin or width changes in adjacent columns.

         	Justification

Aligns text horizontally in column(s).

         	Position from Right

Sets the position, in a distance from the right of the cell, where the decimal will be placed.

         	Text Size

Positions text as superscript or subscript, or selects a new size.

5	Choose OK.

You can automatically adjust the width of a column to the width of a selected cell or of the cell with the widest amount of characters.

To adjust the width of a column to the width of a selected cell, select the cell, right-click the mouse button, then select Size Column to Fit.

To adjust the width of a column to the widest cell in the column, place the insertion point in the column, right-click the mouse button, then select Size Column to Fit.

See Also

Format Cell

Format Row

Format Table

QuickSelect


Format Row

Table, Format, Row

Purpose

Use Format Row to customize the text in the current row or several rows.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the row you want to format.

or

Select the rows you want to format.

2	Choose Format from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Format.

3	Select Row.

4	Choose from the following options:

         	Header Row

Designates a row (or rows) as a header.

         	Lines Per Row

Specifies whether a single line or multiple lines of text are allowed in a row.

         	Row Height

Specifies a fixed row height, or sets Auto height adjustment.

         	Row Margins

Specifies top and bottom row margins.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Format Cell

Format Column (Table)

Format Table

QuickSelect


Format Table

Table, Format, Table

Purpose

Use Format Table to customize all cells in a table.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Format from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Format.

3	Select Table.

4	Choose from the following options:

         	Appearance

Changes the appearance of text in a table.

         	Auto Row Insert

Turns off the ability to insert a row by pressing Tab in the last cell of the last row of a table.

         	Column Margins

Sets the left and right column margins.

         	Column Width

Sets column width.

         	Digits after Decimal

Sets the position, in decimal places, where the decimal will be placed.

         	Disable Cell Locks

Temporarily unlocks a cell for editing or places the insertion point in a locked cell so you can calculate it.

         	Fixed Width

Keeps the width of a column fixed regardless of margin or width changes in adjacent columns.

         	Justification

Aligns text horizontally in a table.

         	Position from Right

Sets the position, in a distance from the right of the cell, where the decimal will be placed.

         	Table Position

Positions a table horizontally on the page, or specifies an exact measurement from the left edge of the page.

         	Text Size

Positions text as superscript or subscript, or selects a new size.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Format Cell

Format Column (Table)

Format Row

QuickSelect


Master Document

File, Master Document

Purpose

Use Master Document to help you manage large documents.

A master document is a WordPerfect file with links to subdocuments. When a master document is expanded, the linked subdocuments are retrieved into the master document.

Steps

1	Open an existing or new WordPerfect document.

If you are creating links, place your insertion point where you want the link.

2	Choose Master Document from the File menu.

3	Choose from the following options:

         	Subdocument

Create links to subdocuments from the master document.

         	Expand Master

Retrieve linked documents in the master document.

         	Condense Master

Remove the subdocuments from the master document. (The links for the subdocuments remain in the master document.)

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Condense or Save Subdocuments

Expand Master Document

Include Subdocument


Default Color Palette

Format, Font, Palette, Default

Purpose

Use Default to return the color palette to its original state.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Palette.

2	Choose Default.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Model

Color Wheel

Copy or Paste Colors

Invert Colors

Open Color Palette

Rainbow Colors


Documents/Backup (File Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, File, Documents/Backup

Purpose

Use Documents/Backup to specify a default pathname to document and backup files.

You can also turn on the Timed Document Backup and Original Document Backup features.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Documents/Backup.

3	Type the pathnames you want in the Default Directory and Backup Directory text boxes.

You can click on the list button to select a directory.

4	If you want all your documents to be saved with the same extension, select Use Default Extension on Open and Save, then type an extension in the text box.

5	To make a backup copy of documents at regular intervals, select Timed Document Backup every, then specify a time interval.

6	To guard against accidentally replacing work that you did not intend to replace, select Original Document Backup.

7	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

QuickList

Select Directory


Templates (File Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, File, Templates

Purpose

You can specify default and additional pathnames for template files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Templates.

3	Specify a pathname in the Default Directory text box, Additional Directory text box, or both.

4	Specify a filename for the Default Template.

If you type a template name that does not exist, WordPerfect will create the new template based on STANDARD.WPT unless you have specified an Additional Objects Template. In that case, it will be based on the additional objects template.

5	If you want, specify an additional objects template.

The additional objects template acts as an alternative template which provides objects (keyboards, menus, template macros, toolbars, and styles) in addition to or in place of those on your default template.

6	To change the default template extension (wpt), type the new extension in the Template File Extension text box.

7	If you want your standard template to be continually overwritten by the additional objects template, select Update Default Template from Additional Objects Template.

8	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

About Templates

Additional Objects Template

New Document/Template

QuickList

Select Directory


Spreadsheets (File Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, File, Spreadsheets

Purpose

Use Spreadsheets to specify default and supplemental pathnames for spreadsheet files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Spreadsheets.

3	Type a pathname in the Default Directory text box, Supplemental Directory text box, or both.

You can click on the list button to select a directory.

4	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Import Data or Create or Edit Data Link

QuickList

Select Directory


Databases (File Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, File, Databases

Purpose

Use Databases to specify default and supplemental pathnames for database files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Databases.

3	Type a pathname in the Default Directory text box, Supplemental Directory text box, or both.

You can click the list button to select a directory.

4	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Import Data or Create or Edit Data Link

QuickList

Select Directory


Printers/Labels (File Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, File, Printers/Labels

Purpose

Use Printers/Labels to specify default and supplemental pathnames for printer files and to specify a default label file.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Printers/Labels.

3	Type a pathname in the Default Directory text box, Supplemental Directory text box, or both.

4	Type the filename of the default label file you want to use in the Label File text box.

You can click on the list button to select a directory or filename.

5	To display specific types of labels, select Laser, Tractor-Fed, or Both from the Default Labels to Display group box.

6	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Print

Print Individual Labels

QuickList

Select Directory


Hyphenation (File Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, File, Hyphenation

Purpose

Use Hyphenation to specify a default pathname for hyphenation files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Hyphenation.

3	Type a pathname in the Default Directory text box.

You can click on the list button to select a directory.

4	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Hyphenation

Position Hyphen

QuickList

Select Directory


Graphics (File Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, File, Graphics

Purpose

Use Graphics to specify default and supplemental pathnames for graphics files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Graphics.

3	Type a pathname in the Default Directory text box, Supplemental Directory text box, or both.

You can click on the list button to select a directory.

4	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Graphics Menu

QuickList

Select Directory


Macros (File Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, File, Macros

Purpose

Use Macros to specify default and supplemental pathnames for macros files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Macros.

3	Type a pathname in the Default Directory text box, Supplemental Directory text box, or both.

You can click on the list button to select a directory.

4	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

About Macros

QuickList

Select Directory


publishing

The process of electronically distributing information to remote Workgroup Desktop users. When you publish a document, you establish ongoing information-sharing relationships with remote users. Once you've established a publication, you can issue new versions of it to keep remote users continually up to date.


Document (Display Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, Display, Document

Purpose

Use Document (Display Preferences) to display and activate features that affect the document window.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Document.

3	Select Vertical and Horizontal to display the vertical and horizontal scroll bars. If you want the horizontal scroll bar to appear all the time, select Show Always. If you want the horizontal scroll bar to appear only when text runs off the screen, select When Required.

4	To change the units of measure used on dialog boxes and Reveal Codes, select a unit of measurement from the Units of Measure pop-up list.

5	To change the units of measure used on the Status Bar and Ruler Bar, select unit of measurement from the Status/Ruler Bar Display pop-up list.

6	Select any of the following options:

         	Comments

Display Comments in your document.

         	Table Gridlines

Display dashed lines to represent table lines; turn off display of any table fill.

         	Graphics

Display graphics lines inside the graphics boxes in your document.

         	Hidden Text

Show hidden text.

         	Windows System Colors

Display Windows system colors for text, document background, and dialog boxes.

7	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Graphics (View)

Hidden Text


Macro Triggers

File, New, Options, New Template or Edit Template, Associate, Triggers

Purpose

You can associate a macro with a trigger and have the trigger start the macro at a specified point as you work with your document.

For example, suppose you use a letter template form, and you also have created a spell-checking macro, which you want to run before you print the letters. Because you've used a template to create the letters, you can set the PRE PRINT trigger to run your spell-checking macro when you choose Print from the File menu.

The macro can be played when the template it is associated with is in the current window. For example, if you want to run a macro after closing a window, you must associate the macro to the template that will be in the window that remains open.

Steps

1	Choose New from the File menu.

2	Choose Options, then choose New Template or Edit Template.

3	Choose Associate, then choose Triggers. The following list explains the triggers.

         	POST CLOSE

Runs a macro in the window that is revealed after you close another window.

         	POST NEW

Runs a macro after you open a window by choosing New or Open from the File menu.

         	POST OPEN

Runs a macro after you open a window by choosing Open from the File menu.

         	POST PRINT

Runs a macro after a print job is sent to the printer.

         	POST STARTUP

Runs a macro associated with the default template only when you start WordPerfect.

         	POST SWITCH DOC

Runs a macro in the current window after you switch from another window that has already been opened.

         	POST TABLES

Runs a macro after the table grid you choose is drawn in the document but before you can enter any data in the table.

         	PRE CLOSE

Runs a macro before you close the current window by choosing Close from the File menu.

         	PRE NEW

Runs a macro in the current window before you open another window by choosing Open or New from the File menu.

         	PRE OPEN

Runs a macro in the current window before you open another window by choosing Open from the File menu.

         	PRE PRINT

Runs a macro before the print job is generated but after you choose Print.

         	PRE SWITCH DOC

Runs a macro in the current window before you switch to another window that has already been opened.

         	PRE TABLES

Runs a macro after you choose the table format but before the table grid is drawn in the current window.

4	Choose Exit Template from the feature bar when you are finished, then choose Yes to save the template.

See Also

About Macros

Associate (Templates)

Create or Edit Templates


Show (Display Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, Display, Show

Purpose

Use Show (Display Preferences) to display a symbol wherever there is a space, a hard return, a tab, or an indent. Symbols also display when you use Center, Flush Right, Soft Hyphen, Advance, or Center Page. You cannot edit symbols.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Show Symbols.

3	Make sure that the options you want to display symbols for are selected.

If you choose Show Symbols on New and Current Document, all of the symbols you have selected will appear by default until you change them again.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Show Symbols


View/Zoom (Display Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, Display, View/Zoom

Purpose

Use View/Zoom (Display Preferences) to select a default view type and to specify the default zoom percentage for all documents.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select View/Zoom.

3	Select Draft, Page, or Two Page from the Default View group box.

4	Select a predefined zoom percentage or specify a custom percentage in the Other text box.

5	Select Margin Width, Page Width, or Full Page to calculate a zoom percentage based on your selection.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Zoom


Reveal Codes (Display Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, Display, Reveal Codes

Purpose

Use Reveal Codes (Display Preferences) to change the font, color, and size of Reveal Codes text and set other options.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Reveal Codes.

You can also click the right mouse button in the Reveal Codes window, then choose Preferences.

3	Select a font from the Font list box, then select a point size from the Size list box.

4	Select a color for Reveal Codes text from the Text color palette in the Color group box.

5	Select a color for the background in the Reveal Codes window from the Background palette in the Color group box.

6	You can also choose from the following options:

         	Show Reveal Codes on New and Current Document

Turns on Reveal Codes every time you start WordPerfect or open a new document.

         	Wrap Lines At Window

Prevents codes from running off the display window by breaking codes at the edge of the window.

         	Show Spaces as Bullets

Displays diamond bullets wherever there are spaces.

         	Show Codes in Detail

Displays formatting information with codes in the Reveal Codes window.

         	Show Help Prompts for Codes

Displays Help prompts for codes when you place the insertion point on them.

         	Sculptured Codes

Displays codes that look three dimensional.

         	Window Size

Changes the size of the Reveal Codes window as a percentage of the document window.

7	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Reveal Codes


Ruler Bar (Display Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, Display, Ruler Bar

Purpose

Use Ruler Bar (Display Preferences) to customize the way the Ruler Bar functions.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Ruler Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on the Ruler Bar, then choose Preferences.

3	Choose from the following options:

         	Show Ruler Bar on New and Current Document

Shows the Ruler Bar for the current document and every time you start or open a new document.

         	Tabs Snap to Ruler Bar Grid

Makes tabs snap to invisible grid lines in your document that occur every millimeter or 1/16 of an inch.

         	Show Ruler Bar Guides

Displays a dotted vertical line (ruler guide) that extends from any tab or margin marker to the bottom of the document window when moving the tab or margin marker.

         	Sculptured Ruler Bar

Displays the Ruler Bar so that it looks three dimensional.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Ruler Bar


Merge (Display Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, Display, Merge

Purpose

Use Merge (Display Preferences) to display merge codes as full codes or as markers or to hide the codes completely.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Merge.

3	Choose from the following options:

         	Display Merge Codes

Displays merge codes as text.

         	Display Merge Codes as Markers

Displays merge codes as markers.

         	Hide Merge Codes

Displays text without merge codes.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

About Merge


Column Spacing, Column Widths

Format, Columns, Define, Column Spacing or Column Widths

Purpose

Use Column Spacing to adjust the spacing between columns. Use Column Widths to adjust the widths of columns.

Steps

1	Choose Columns from the Format menu, then choose Define.

2	Choose from the following to adjust Column Spacing:

         	Spacing Between Columns

Sets a default space between columns.

         	Line Spacing Between Rows In Parallel Columns

Changes the space between rows.

3	Choose from the following to adjust Column Widths:

         	Fixed

Keeps the width of the current column or space regardless of width or margin changes in other columns.

         	Space

Adjusts the amount of space between two specific columns.

         	Width

When Fixed is not selected, specifies the width of specific columns.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Columns


Create or Edit Equations

Graphics, Equations

Purpose

Use the Equation Editor to create and edit mathematical, scientific, or business formulas and expressions, then include them in your WordPerfect documents.

Steps

1	To create an equation, place the insertion point where you want the equation to appear, then choose Equation from the Graphics menu to enter the Equation Editor.

or

To edit an existing equation, click the right mouse button on an equation, then select Edit Equation.

2	Type variables, and insert commands and symbols from the equation palette in the editing window.

or

To retrieve an equation, choose Insert File from the File menu, then type the path and filename of the equation file.

If you want to see how the equation looks in the display window, choose Redisplay from the View menu.

3	Choose Close from the File menu to save the equation and return to your document.

See Also

Equation Editor

Equation Font

Equation Palette

User's Guide:  Equations: Examples


Equation Palette

Graphics, Equation, View, Palette

Purpose

Use the Equation Palette to create or edit equations. You can choose from eight palettes on the Equation Palette pop-up list.

Choose any of the following palettes:

     	Commands

Displays formatting commands represented by keywords.

     	Large

Displays large and small mathematical, scientific, bracket, and brace symbols.

     	Symbols

Displays commonly used symbols.

     	Greek

Displays uppercase and lowercase Greek characters and some variants.

     	Arrows

Displays arrow styles and hollow and solid figures such as triangles, squares, and circles.

     	Sets

Displays set symbols, relational operators, and some Fraktur and hollow letters.

     	Other

Displays diacritical marks (accents) and orientations of ellipses.

     	Function

Displays mathematical functions (such as cos, sin, and log).

Steps

1	Choose a palette from the Equation Palette pop-up list.

See Also

Create or Edit Equations

Equation Font

WordPerfect Characters

User's Guide:  Equations: Examples


Redisplay

Graphics, Equation, View, Redisplay

Purpose

Use Redisplay to update the display of an equation in the display window of the Equation Editor or to update the display of text, graphics, and tables in the document window.

Steps

1	From the Equation Editor, choose Redisplay from the View menu.

or

From a document window, press Ctrl+F3.

See Also

Create or Edit Equations

Equation Editor


User Information (Environment Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, Environment, User Info for Comments and Summary

Purpose

Use User Info for Comments and Summary to add your full name, initials, and a unique color to the comments and summaries you insert in documents.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Type your name in the Name text box.

3	Type your initials in the Initials text box.

4	Choose the User Color button, then select a color.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Comment

Document Summary


Formatting (Environment Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, Environment, Formatting

Purpose

Use Formatting to control hyphenation, confirm the deletion of table formulas, confirm the deletion of codes, and note the location of hidden codes as you delete them.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Select how you want WordPerfect to prompt you for hyphenation from the Hyphenation Prompt drop-down list.

         	Always

Prompts you to position the hyphen for each word that spans the hyphenation zone.

         	Never

Hyphenates words that span the hyphenation zone without prompting you.

         	When Required

Prompts you to position the hyphen for any word that spans the hyphenation zone and is not found in the Spell Check file.

3	Select Confirm Deletion of Codes, Stop Insertion Point at Hidden Codes to delete codes only if Reveal Codes is turned on and to note the position of hidden codes.

4	Select Confirm Deletion of Table Formula to guard against accidentally typing text over the formulas you have created in tables or floating cells.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Delete (Table)

Delete Table

Hyphenation


Beep On (Environment Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, Environment, Beep On

Purpose

Use Beep On to specify when your computer sounds a beep in WordPerfect.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Select or deselect Error, Hyphenation, and Find Failure.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Find and Replace Text

Hyphenation


Save Workspace (Environment Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, Environment, Save Workspace

Purpose

Use Save Workspace to save the document windows currently displayed on your screen. This is useful if you plan to work on the same document the next time you start WordPerfect.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Choose one of the following options:

         	Always

Save the workspace every time you exit WordPerfect without being prompted.

         	Never

Do not save the workspace when you exit WordPerfect.

         	Prompt on Exit

Decide at a prompt whether to save the workspace.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Bookmark


Toolbar/Power Bar Editor

Edit, Preferences, Toolbar, Edit or Create

Edit, Preferences, Power Bar, Edit

Purpose

Use the Toolbar Editor to add, delete, or separate buttons on the Toolbar and Power Bar.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, double-click the Toolbar icon, select a Toolbar and choose Edit or choose Create, then choose OK.

or

Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, double-click the Power Bar icon, then choose Edit.

You can also right click on a Toolbar or Power Bar, then choose Edit.

2	Choose from the following options:

         	Activate a Feature

Select a category and feature, then choose Add Button. You can also select a feature directly from the menus.

The Power Buttons category lists buttons that you click and drag on the Power Bar to select an option, such as the font face. Usually, these buttons display the status of that feature, such as Times New Roman for the font face. If the QuickTips option is selected as you edit the Power Bar, you can place the mouse pointer on a button to display the feature name for that button.

         	Play a Keyboard Script

Type the keystrokes the button will play, then choose Add Script.

         	Launch a Program

Choose Select File, specify the file you want to run, then choose OK.

         	Play a Macro

Choose Add Macro or Add Template Macro, specify the location, path, and filename of the macro, then choose Select.

3	Drag a separator onto the Toolbar or Power Bar to add a space between buttons.

4	Drag a button or separator on the Toolbar or Power Bar to move it.

or

Drag buttons back and forth between the Power Bar and the Toolbar to move them.

5	Drag a button or separator off the Toolbar or Power Bar to delete it.

6	Choose OK.

Note that you can add more buttons than you are able to see. For the Toolbar, you can scroll to see more buttons. For the Power Bar, you can change how the buttons display.

See Also

Create Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar

Toolbar Customize

Toolbar Image Editor

Toolbar/Power Bar Options

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences


Menu (Environment Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, Environment, Menu

Purpose

Use Menu to either display or not display last opened filenames on the File menu, the shortcut keys on all menus, and the Help prompts that appear at the top of the screen.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Select or deselect Display Last Open Filenames, Display Shortcut Keys, and Show Help Prompts from the Menu group box.

3	Choose OK.


Create Horizontal or Vertical Line

Graphics, Horizontal Line or Vertical Line

Purpose

Use Horizontal Line or Vertical Line to add horizontal and vertical lines to your document.

Steps

1	For a horizontal line that is placed along the text baseline and extends from the left margin to the right margin, place the insertion point on the line of text where you want to add the line.

or

For a vertical line that is placed on the left margin of the page and extends from the top margin to the bottom margin, place the insertion point anywhere on the page.

2	Choose Horizontal Line or Vertical Line from the Graphics menu.

See Also

Create or Edit Graphic Line


Border/Fill Style

Graphics, Edit Box, Border/Fill

Format, Paragraph or Page or Column, Border/Fill

Purpose

Use Border/Fill Style to add a fill style within a graphics box border or a document text border.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Border/Fill Style dialog box.

2	Select a shade, pattern, or gradient fill style from either the Fill Style pop-up palette or the drop-down list.

If you select a pattern fill style or a gradient fill style, you can select a foreground color and a background color.

3	Select a foreground color from the Foreground pop-up palette.

4	Select a background color from the Background pop-up palette.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

About Borders

Edit Fill Style


Create Text Box

Graphics, Text Box

Purpose

Use Text Box to create a text box in your document.

Steps

1	Choose Text Box from the Graphics menu.

2	Type the text you want.

3	Choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Border/Fill Style


Rainbow Colors

Format, Font, Palette, Rainbow

Purpose

Use Rainbow to insert a spectrum of colors into a block of cells on the color palette.

The first and last colors of the block determine the colors of the spectrum.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Palette.

2	If you want the spectrum to span a complete row of the color palette, drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

or

If you want the spectrum to be contained within a block of the color palette, mark Select Rectangle, then drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

3	Choose Rainbow.

4	Choose OK to replace the current palette.

or

Choose Save As to save the palette with a new name.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Model

Color Wheel

Copy or Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors


Merge Feature Bar Options

Purpose

When working with merge files, you can choose from the following Merge feature bar options:

     	Sort (data only)

Sorts data records.

     	Print (data text only)

Prints a data text file.

     	Display Codes

Displays merge codes as text.

     	Display as Markers

Displays merge codes as markers.

     	Hide Codes

Displays text without merge codes.

     	Remove Merge Bar

Removes the merge bar and changes the merge file to a normal document file.

See Also

About Merge

Create Data File

Merge Data File Feature Bar

Print

Sort


Underline

Format, Font, Underline

Purpose

Use Underline to underline text.

Steps

To underline text as you type,

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Underline from the Appearance group box.

2	Type the text you want underlined.

3	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Underline from the Appearance group box again to turn off Underline.

To underline existing text,

1	Select the text you want underlined.

2	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Underline from the Appearance group box.

See Also

About Formatting

Font

Select

QuickSelect


Specify Conditions for Merge

Tools, Merge, Merge, Select Records, Specify Conditions

Purpose

Use Specify Conditions to limit the records in the data file that you want to merge.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Merge.

or

Choose Merge from the Merge feature bar, then choose Merge.

2	Specify file locations.

3	Choose Select Records, then select Specify Conditions.

4	To specify a range, select Record Number Range, then specify the beginning and ending record you want to define.

5	To specify conditions, select a field from each Field drop-down list.

6	Type the selection criteria in the Condition text boxes.

         	Single Value

Utah

         	List of Values

Utah;Hawaii;California

         	Range of Values

Ohio-Utah

         	Exclude Values

!Utah (not Utah)

         	Zero or More Characters

U-* (from U to the end of the alphabet)

         	One Character Wildcard

J??n (4-letter words beginning with J, ending with n, any letters between)

7	For an example of selection criteria, choose Example.

8	For more examples, choose More, then choose Close twice.

9	Choose OK twice to perform the merge.

See Also

About Merge

Perform Merge


Mark Records (Merge)

Tools, Merge, Merge, Select Records, Mark Records

Purpose

Use Mark Records to limit the records in the data file that you want to merge.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Merge.

or

Choose Merge from the Merge feature bar, then choose Merge.

2	Specify file locations.

3	Choose Select Records, then select Mark Records.

4	Specify the beginning and ending records you want to display in Display Records From and To.

5	Select the field where you want the display to start in the First Field to Display drop-down list.

6	Choose Update Record List to reflect your display choices.

7	Select the records you want to mark.

or

Choose Mark all Records in List.

8	Choose OK twice to perform the merge.

See Also

About Merge

Perform Merge


Drag and Drop Text

Purpose

Use Drag and Drop Text to move or copy selected text.

Steps

1	Select the text you want to move or copy.

2	Place the mouse pointer anywhere on the selected text.

3	Drag to move the insertion point where you want to move or copy the text.

You can drag to any other document window displayed on-screen.

4	To move the text to the insertion point location, release the mouse button.

or

To copy the text at the insertion point location, press Ctrl while you release the mouse button.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Select

QuickSelect

Windowing


Compare Document

File, Compare Document

Purpose

Use Compare Document to contrast the current document with a different version of the document. WordPerfect adds markings to the current document to indicate text that has been added, deleted, moved, or changed.

Steps

1	Make sure you have opened the newest version of the document you want to compare.

2	Choose Compare Document from the File menu, then choose Add Markings.

3	Select Word, Phrase, Sentence, or Paragraph to indicate how you want to compare the documents.

4	If you want to compare the opened document with the old version of the document on disk, choose OK.

or

If you want to compare the opened document with a document that has a different filename, type the path and filename of that document in the text box or select it using the list button, then choose OK.

Text added to the current document appears in Redline. Text deleted from the current document appears as Strikeout.

See Also

Redline Method

Remove Markings


Object

Edit, Object

Purpose

Use Object from the Edit menu to perform an action on an OLE object.

You can also double-click most objects with the left mouse button to switch to the server application where you can edit the object. If you double-click on a sound or movie object, a sound or movie clip will play.

Steps

1	Select the object, then choose Edit (application name) Object from the Edit menu.

You can also select the object, click the right mouse button, then choose Edit (application name) Object.

2	Make your changes in the source file application.

3	Choose Exit & Return to Document from the File menu, then choose whether or not to save the file and update the copy in your document.

or

Choose Update from the File menu if you do not want to exit the server application.

or

If it's an OLE 2.0 application, click in the WordPerfect document window (outside the object window) to return to WordPerfect.

These options may be worded differently in various server applications. See the documentation for your server application.

See Also

Paste Special


Toolbar

View, Toolbar

Purpose

Use the Toolbar to access the features and options you use most simply by clicking with your mouse.

You can choose a different Toolbar layout, or you can create your own. When you use certain features (for example, when you create a table or insert an image), WordPerfect selects the appropriate Toolbar layout for you.

To find out about a Toolbar button, move your mouse pointer over the button and read the QuickTips displayed nearby or the Help prompts at the top of the window.

Steps

To display (or hide) the Toolbar,

1	Choose Toolbar from the View menu.

To move the Toolbar,

1	Move the mouse pointer over a blank area of the Toolbar.

The pointer changes to the shape of a hand.

2	Left mouse click, hold the button down, then drag the Toolbar to where you want to place it.

Toward the center of the window, the Toolbar changes to a smaller rectangle. At any edge of the window, the Toolbar rectangle elongates to fit the window width.

3	Release the mouse button.

To change to a different Toolbar layout,

1	Right click on the Toolbar, then select a layout.

or

Choose Edit, More, or Preferences.

See Also

Power Bar

Toolbar/Power Bar Editor

Toolbar/Power Bar Options

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences


Ruler Bar

View, Ruler Bar

Purpose

Use the Ruler Bar with your mouse to work with margins, paragraph format, tabs, and columns.

Steps

1	Choose Ruler Bar from the View menu to display or hide the Ruler Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on the Ruler Bar, then choose Tab Set, Paragraph Format, Margins, Columns, Tables, Hide Ruler Bar, or Preferences.

2	Place the insertion point in the paragraph, page, column, or table you want to change.

3	Drag markers on the Ruler Bar to change the following:

         	Left/Right Margins

Outside markers at the end of white space

         	Paragraph Format

Inside triangles at each end of white space

         	Column Width

Column markers inside white space

         	Table Column Width

Table column markers inside white space

To set tabs, see Set Tabs on the Ruler Bar.

See Also

About Formatting

Columns

Create Table

Margins

Paragraph Format


Status Bar

View, Status Bar

Purpose

Use the status bar to display and access information about the current document and state of WordPerfect, such as insertion point position, current font, date, time, selected printer, and status of Select mode. The General Status displays information on merges, macros, tables, columns, Insert/Typeover modes, and the style in effect at the insertion point.

You can choose the options you want to display and arrange them where you want. You can also display or hide the status bar.

Steps

To display or hide the status bar,

1	Choose Status Bar from the View menu.

If there is a check mark by the Status Bar option, the Status Bar is displayed.

To access information from the status bar,

1	Double-click on the date and time buttons to enter the current date and time in your document.

2	Double-click on Insert/Typeover, Numlock, Outline, and Scroll Lock buttons to toggle these options on/off.

3	Double-click on Select, then use arrow keys to select a block of text.

4	Double-click on other buttons to display the appropriate dialog box.

To add or delete items from the status bar, see Status Bar Preferences. To change the appearance of buttons and text, see Status Bar Options.

See Also

WordPerfect Bars


Graphics (View)

View, Graphics

Purpose

Use this feature to display or hide graphics in the document window.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics from the View menu.


Other (Insert)

 	Insert, Other

Purpose

Choose Other from the Insert menu to insert bar codes, counters, and path and filenames into your document.

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Filename

Path and Filename

Counters

Bar Code


Spreadsheet/Database

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database

Purpose

Use the Spreadsheet/Database option to import and link information from a spreadsheet file or a database file into a WordPerfect document.

Importing a spreadsheet or database copies information from the spreadsheet or database file one time only. Linking spreadsheet or database information lets you update the information in your WordPerfect document to keep it current with any changes.

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Import Data or Create or Edit Data Link

Link Options

Update

See Also

Define Selection Conditions


RGB (def)
RGB

RGB (red, green, blue) uses the primary colors of light to define colors. When each color is at its maximum intensity, the color defined is white.


Data Fill

Table, Data Fill

Purpose

Use Data Fill to continue a pattern of incrementing values across a row or down a column.

You can use Roman numerals, days of the week, months, or quarters, even if only one cell is used to establish the pattern. To repeat incrementing numbers, however, at least two cells with values are required to establish a pattern.

Steps

1	Select the cells that contain the incrementing pattern of values you want to repeat.

2	Extend the selection to include the cells in which you want to continue the pattern.

3	Choose Data Fill from the Table menu.

You can also choose Data Fill from the Table Formula feature bar.

See Also

Table Formula Feature Bar

Table Functions


Sum in Table Formula

Table, Sum

Purpose

Use Sum to quickly calculate the sum of the values in cells above or to the left of the insertion point position.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the table cell following the group of cells whose total you want to calculate.

or

Select a range of cells to calculate sums for each column and row in the selection. Be sure to include an empty cell in the selection at the end of each column or row.

2	Choose Sum from the Table menu.

You can also click Sum from the Table Formula feature bar.

If you placed your insertion point in a cell instead of selecting a range of cells, the calculated sum overwrites any values, formulas, or text that existed in the cell.

See Also

Table Functions


Cell Formula Entry

Table, Cell Formula Entry

Purpose

Use Cell Formula Entry to type formulas into table cells or floating cells.

Formulas you type are calculated when you move the insertion point out of the cell that contains the formula.

Steps

1	Select Cell Formula Entry from the Table menu.

2	Type a formula directly into a cell or floating cell.

3	Move the insertion point out of the cell.

If the formula is valid, it is calculated.

4	To turn off Cell Formula Entry, choose Cell Formula Entry from the Table menu again.

See Also

Number Type (Table)


Go to Data

Tools, Merge, Form, OK, None, OK, Go to Data, Select or Create

Purpose

Use Go to Data to switch to the associated data file or create a new data file.

Steps

1	From a form file, choose Go to Data from the Merge feature bar.

If no data file is associated, the Associate dialog box appears.

2	Choose Select, select the file from the appropriate directory, then choose OK.

or

Choose Create, type a filename, select Records Stored in a Table (if you want), then choose OK.

3	Type the name of the first field, then press Enter.

4	Repeat step 3 for each field, then choose OK.

5	Fill in the Quick Data Entry by typing information in each field, then pressing Enter.

6	Choose Close when you have finished entering data.

7	Choose Yes to save the data file.

8	Choose Go to Form to return to the associated form file.

See Also

About Merge

Associate (Merge)

Create Data File

Go to Form

Merge Data File Feature Bar

Merge Form File Feature Bar


Go to Form

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK, Close, Go to Form, Select or Create

Purpose

Use Go to Form to switch to the associated form file or create a new form file.

Steps

1	From a data file, choose Go to Form from the Data File feature bar.

If no form file is associated, the Associate dialog box displays.

2	Choose Select, specify file locations, then choose OK.

or

Choose Create, then insert fields and merge codes from the Merge Form File feature bar.

3	Choose Go to Data to return to the associated data file.

See Also

About Merge

Associate (Merge)

Create Form File

Go to Data

Merge Data File Feature Bar

Merge Form File Feature Bar


Windowing

Purpose

The area on the screen where you type your documents is called a document window. You can open, move, size, and arrange as many as nine document windows (depending on available memory).

Steps

To open a document window,

1	Choose New from the File menu to open an empty window or a new template.

or

Choose Open from the File menu to open a document window as you open a file.

To close a document window,

1	Double-click the Control menu in the upper left corner of a document window.

or

Choose Close from the File menu.

To switch between open document windows,

1	Click on a displayed window to make it active.

or

Choose the document you want from the Window menu.

or

Use the following keystrokes:

         	Alt+F4

Quits WordPerfect and other applications; also closes dialog boxes

         	Ctrl+F4

Closes a document window

         	Alt+space bar

Opens WordPerfect Control menu

         	Alt+-

Opens document Control menu

         	Alt+Esc

Cycles through open applications and icons

         	Alt+Tab

Cycles through open applications

         	Ctrl+F6

Displays next document

         	Ctrl+Shft+F6

Displays previous document

         	Ctrl+Esc

Displays Task List of open applications

See Also

Arranging Windows

Cascade

Sizing Windows

Tile Windows


Clear

Purpose

Use Clear to discard the contents of the active document window without saving the document.

If you want to be prompted to save changes, you should use Close.

Steps

1	Press Ctrl+Shift+F4.

See Also

Close and Exit


Hidden Text

View, Hidden Text

Purpose

Use Hidden Text to include questions, notes, or comments in your document. You can then display, print, or hide the text.

You can choose Hidden Text from the View menu to display or hide the hidden text you have created in your document. The hidden text appears in Reveal Codes when the codes are shown in detail.

Steps

To create hidden text,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to create the hidden text.

2	Choose Hidden Text from the View menu.

3	Choose Font from the Format menu, choose Hidden from the Appearance Group, then choose OK.

4	Type the text you want to hide, then press the right arrow key to turn off the Hidden feature.

To create hidden text from existing text,

1	Select the text you want to hide.

2	Choose Font from the Format menu, choose Hidden, then choose OK.

To convert hidden text to document text,

1	Make sure that the hidden text in your document is displayed.

2	Choose Reveal Codes from the View menu.

3	Drag the hidden text code out of the Reveal Codes window.

If you delete a Hide code when the hidden text is not displayed in the document window, you will delete the text. To restore the deleted code, which includes the hidden text, choose Undo from the Edit menu.

See Also

Comment

Reveal Codes

Undo or Redo


Delete (Text)

Purpose

Use Delete to remove text, graphics, and codes from a document.

Steps

To delete text and graphics,

1	Select the text and graphics you want to delete.

2	Press Delete or Backspace.

or

Type new text.

To delete codes,

1	Choose Reveal Codes from the View menu.

2	Place the insertion point to the immediate left or right of the code you want to delete.

3	Press Delete to delete the code to the right of the insertion point.

or

Press Backspace to delete the code to the left of the insertion point.

You can also delete a code by dragging it out of the Reveal Codes area with the mouse.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Find and Replace Text

QuickSelect

Reveal Codes

Select

Undelete

Undo or Redo


Abbreviations

Insert, Abbreviations

Purpose

Use Abbreviations to quickly insert information you often include in your documents. You can expand an abbreviation at any time.

Steps

To create an abbreviation,

1	Select the information for which you want to create an abbreviation.

2	Choose Abbreviations from the Insert menu, then choose Create.

3	Type a short abbreviation for the information, choose OK, then choose Close.

Abbreviations are case-sensitive. For example, if you create an abbreviation in lowercase letters, such as "jsg," you can create another abbreviation for the same document or template using those letters in uppercase, such as "JSG."

To insert an abbreviation,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the information represented by the abbreviation.

2	Type the abbreviation.

Since the abbreviation is saved with the current template, you can expand it in any WordPerfect session as long as you are using the template where the abbreviation information is saved.

To expand an abbreviation,

1	Select the abbreviation or place the insertion point anywhere on it.

2	Choose Abbreviations from the Insert menu, then choose Expand.

or

Press Ctrl+a.

See Also

New Document/Template


document template (def)
document template

Every document you create in WordPerfect is based on a template. A blank document is based on the standard template, which defines the margins, tab settings, and even the Toolbar you see when you start WordPerfect.

Besides the standard template, WordPerfect provides many different templates for you to use. By simply selecting a template and typing your own text, you can quickly create such things as newsletters, memos, faxes, and resumes, without having to do the formatting yourself.


Add Printer

File, Print, Select, Options, Add Printer (WordPerfect)

Purpose

Use Add Printer to add a printer to the list of available printers.

If you want to print using a Windows printer driver, WordPerfect provides access to the necessary Windows dialog boxes from within WordPerfect. For information about adding a printer in Windows, refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation or use the online Help system available on each of the Windows dialog boxes.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Select.

2	Choose Add Printer from the Options drop-down list, then choose WordPerfect.

3	Select Printer Files (*.prs), select the printer you want to add, then choose OK.

or

If the printer you want to add is not listed in the .PRS printer files, select Additional Printers (*.all), select the printer you want to add, then choose OK.

4	If the Create Printer dialog box appears, confirm the printer driver filename, or specify a new filename, then choose OK.

5	Highlight the printer you want for your current printer, then choose Select.

If the printer you want to use is not displayed in the .PRS or .ALL list, you may need to install additional .ALL files using the installation program.

See Also

Printer Information

Printer Setup


HLS (def)
HLS

HLS (hue, lightness, saturation) defines colors in the context of a monitor. Hue adjusts the color (0=red, 120=green, 240=blue, 360=red), lightness adjusts the amount of white and gray, and saturation adjusts the amount of color.


Advance

Format, Typesetting, Advance

Purpose

Use Advance to place text at an absolute position on a page or at a position relative to the current insertion point position.

Steps

To advance to a position or line,

1	Choose Typesetting from the Format menu, then choose Advance.

2	Select From Left Edge of Page or From Top of Page, then specify a distance.

3	To place the advanced text below, rather than above the position measured from the top of the page, deselect Text above Position.

4	Choose OK.

To advance left, right, up, or down from the insertion point,

1	Choose Typesetting from the Format menu, then choose Advance.

2	Select Left from Insertion Point, Right from Insertion Point, Up from Insertion Point, or Down from Insertion Point, then specify a position in the Horizontal or Vertical Distance text box.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Baseline Placement for Typesetting

Manual Kerning


Each Selected Cell (Lines/Fill)

Table, Lines/Fill, Each Selected Cell

Purpose

Use the Each Selected Cell option on the Table Lines/Fill dialog box to change the line style, color, and fill options of the current selection, treated as individual cells. For example, if you select a group of cells and change the line style for the left side, the left side of each cell will be changed.

Steps

1	Select several cells that contain lines and fill you want to change.

2	Choose Lines/Fill from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Lines/Fill.

3	Select Each Selected Cell.

4	Select a line style from the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom palettes or drop-down lists in the Line Styles group box.

5	To turn off a line, select <None> from the appropriate drop-down list.

6	If you want all the lines in the current selection to have a uniform color, choose Custom Color, then choose a color from the color palette.

7	Select a fill style from the Fill Style palette or drop-down list in the Fill Options group box.

8	Select a color from the Foreground or Background palettes.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Cell (Lines/Fill)

Define Color Printing Palette

Selection (Lines/Fill)

Table (Lines/Fill)


Document Experts (def)
Document Experts

You can select a document template instead of formatting a document manually. WordPerfect comes with over 75 preformatted document templates. Just choose one of the preformatted documents and type in the text. Some of the templates come with automated capabilities called Document Experts. If you select one of these, the Document Expert will simplify complicated tasks for you.

See Also

About Templates

New Document/Templates


Bookmark

Insert, Bookmark

Purpose

Use Bookmark to mark a location in a document so that you can return to that location quickly. You can create a number of bookmarks and locate them by name, or you can set a QuickMark. You can only set one QuickMark, and you are always returned to the place where it was set last.

Steps

To set a QuickMark,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to return.

2	Choose Bookmark from the Insert menu, then choose Set QuickMark.

You can also enable Set QuickMark on Save in the Environment Preferences dialog box. This allows you to automatically set a QuickMark at the insertion point whenever you save a document.

To find a QuickMark,

1	Choose Bookmark from the Insert menu, then choose Find QuickMark.

To find a bookmark or QuickMark,

1	Choose Bookmark from the Insert menu.

2	Select the name of the bookmark that you want to find.

3	Choose Go To to move the insertion point to that bookmark.

or

Choose Go To & Select to move the insertion point to that bookmark and select the text.

To move a bookmark or QuickMark,

1	Move the insertion point to the place where you want to move the bookmark.

2	Choose Bookmark from the Insert menu.

3	Select the name of the bookmark that you want to move.

4	Choose Move.

To delete a bookmark or QuickMark,

1	Choose Bookmark from the Insert menu.

2	Select a bookmark, then choose Delete.

3	Choose Yes, then choose Close.

See Also

Create or Rename Bookmark

Environment Preferences


Customize Border

Purpose

Use Customize Border to create or edit borders surrounding document text and graphics boxes.

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Customize Column Border

Customize Graphics Borders

Customize Page Border

Customize Paragraph Border

See Also

About Borders


About Borders

Format, Paragraph or Page or Column, Border/Fill

You can add borders around a paragraph, page, or column. You can then add shading, a pattern, or a gradient fill style to the space inside the borders. With patterns and gradient fill styles, you can also choose separate foreground and background colors.

You can select from existing borders as well as create your own border designs. For more information, choose from the following topics:

     	Creating Borders

Column Borders

Page Borders

Paragraph Borders

     	Customizing Your Own Border Designs

Customize Column Border

Customize Graphics Borders

Customize Page Border

Customize Paragraph Border


Box Caption

Graphics, Edit Box, Caption, Edit

Purpose

Use Box Caption to add caption text to any graphics box in your document.

Steps

1	While in Page view, select the graphics box you want.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Caption.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Caption from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Caption.

3	Choose Edit from the Box Caption dialog box.

4	If you do not want a number in the caption, press Backspace to delete the number style.

5	Type the caption text you want.

6	Choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

See Also

Caption Numbering and Styles

Caption Position

Caption Width

Rotate Caption


Box Content

Graphics, Edit Box, Content

Purpose

Use Box Content to specify the contents of a graphics box, an image, an image on disk, text, equation, or an image that already exists in the document.

Use the Image on Disk option from the Content pop-up list if the file size of your image is large and you do not want to increase the file size of the document. Image on Disk is not available when creating or editing a graphics style.

Use the Document Image option from the Content pop-up list to select from a list of existing images in your document.

You can also use Box Content to change the horizontal and vertical position of the contents inside the graphics box or to rotate text.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box whose contents you want to change.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Content.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Content from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box with a caption, then select Content.

3	Choose a box content type from the Content pop-up list.

If you choose a Content option that is different from the current graphics box contents, choose Yes to delete the current box contents.

4	If you select Image or Image on Disk from the Content pop-up list, specify the path and filename of the image file.

or

Click the list button, then select an image file.

If you want the image height and width of a graphics box to remain proportional when resized, select Preserve Image Width/Height Ratio.

When retrieving graphics created in other versions of WordPerfect, use this option to keep the same proportions.

5	If you select Image or Image on Disk from the Content pop-up list, choose Edit to enter the graphics program and edit the image, or choose OK to return to your document. To exit the graphics program, choose Close and Return to Document from the File menu.

or

If you select Text from the Content pop-up list, choose Edit, then type the text you want, create a table, define columns, or retrieve an existing document file. Choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

or

If you select Equation from the Content pop-up list, choose Edit to enter the Equation Editor,then create your equation. Choose Close from the File menu.

See Also

Content Position Inside a Graphics Box

Rotate Contents Counterclockwise


CMYK

CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, black) is modeled after the colors that printers use for color separation. When all colors are at their maximum level, the color produced is black. An absence of colors produces white.


Edit Box

Graphics, Edit Box

Purpose

Use this feature to locate numbered graphics boxes for editing.

You must have more than one graphics box in your document to use this feature.

Steps

1	Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu.

2	Select Document Box Number, then specify the graphics box number in the text box to the right.

or

Select a counter style in the Counters list box, then specify a number in the Counter Number text box.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Box Size

Custom Box

Image Tools


Box Position

Graphics, Edit Box, Position

Purpose

Use Box Position to change the anchor type of a graphics box or to move the box to a new position on the page.

You can anchor a graphics box to a page, a paragraph, or a single character.

Box Style	Anchor Type
Image	Page
Text	Paragraph
Equation	Paragraph
Figure	Paragraph
Table	Paragraph
User	Paragraph
Button	Character
Watermark	Page
Inline Equation	Character
OLE 2.0 Box	Page

See Also

Put Box in Current Paragraph

Put Box on Current Page

Treat Box as Character


Box Size

Graphics, Edit Box, Size

Purpose

Use Box Size to change the width and height of a graphics box.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Size.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Size from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Size.

3	Select Set from the Width options, then specify a width measurement.

or

Select Full to have the graphics box automatically fill the width of the page from the left margin to the right margin or fill the width of a column.

or

Select Size to Content to automatically adjust the width of the box, based on the width of the box contents.

4	Select Set from the Height options, then specify a height measurement.

or

Select Full to have the graphics box automatically fill the height of the page from the top margin to the bottom margin.

or

Select Size to Content to automatically adjust the height of the box, based on the height of the box contents.

Note that when you select Full for the height of the box, the box placement is automatically changed to a page-anchored box.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close on the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Custom Box

Insert Images


Box Style

Graphics, Graphics Styles, Box, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Box Style to create new graphics box styles or edit existing graphics box styles.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu, then select Box from the Style Type group box.

2	Select a box style from the styles list box, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, then type the name of the new box style in the Style Name text box.

See Also

Create or Edit Box Style

Styles


Create or Edit Box Style

Graphics, Graphics Styles, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Create or Edit Box Style to create a predefined box style based on a custom graphics box style or a style of your own.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu.

2	Select Box from the Style Type group box.

3	Highlight a predefined box style, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, then type a name for the new box style in the Style Name text box.

4	Choose the box options you want to modify.

5	Choose OK until you return to the Create Box Style dialog box or the Edit Box Style dialog box.

6	Choose OK, then highlight the new or edited box style.

7	Choose Close, then choose OK.

See Also

Border/Fill Style

Box Caption

Box Content

Box Position

Box Size

Text Box Initial Style

Wrap Text


Box Style Name

Graphics, Graphics Styles

Graphics, Custom Line, Line Styles, Options, Copy or Retrieve or Save As

Table, Expert, Options, Rename or Retrieve or Save As

Purpose

Use Box Style Name when you are copying, retrieving, or saving line styles, fill styles, border styles, graphics box styles, or table styles.

Steps

To rename, retrieve, or save table styles,

1	Choose Expert from the Table menu, choose Options, then choose Rename, Retrieve, or Save As.

2	Specify a filename in the Filename text box.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

To copy, retrieve, or save graphics styles,

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu, then select a style type from the Style Type group box.

2	If you want to copy a graphics style from the default or supplemental template, choose Setup from the Options drop-down list, select an option, then choose OK.

You must specify your default and supplemental templates in File Preferences before you can access them.

3	Select a style from the Styles list box, then choose Copy or Retrieve or Save As from the Options drop-down list.

4	Specify a filename in the Filename text box.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Graphics Styles

Table Expert (Styles)


Bullets & Numbers

Insert, Bullets & Numbers

Purpose

Use Bullets & Numbers to insert bullets or numbers into your document. The numbers you insert increment automatically. You can choose from several bullet and number styles.

Steps

To insert bullets or numbers before typing text,

1	Choose Bullets & Numbers from the Insert menu.

2	Select a bullet or number style.

3	If you choose a number style, you can select Starting Value, then specify a value you want to use to begin numbering (1 is the default value).

4	If you want to insert a new bullet or number every time you press Enter, select New Bullet or Number on ENTER.

5	Choose OK.

To apply bullets or numbers to existing text,

1	Select the paragraphs to which you want to apply bullets or numbers.

2	Choose Bullets & Numbers from the Insert menu.

3	Select a bullet or number style.

Paragraph Numbers cannot be applied to existing text.

4	Choose OK.

To edit a bullet or number style,

1	Choose Bullets & Numbers from the Insert menu.

2	Select a bullet or number style.

3	Choose Edit.

4	Follow the instructions in Styles Editor.

or

For Paragraph Numbers, use the Edit Outline Definition dialog box.

See Also

Counter Numbering

Create an Outline

Page Numbering


Abbreviations/Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Location

Edit, Preferences, Toolbar or Keyboard or Menu Bar, Create, Template

Insert, Abbreviations, Create, Template

Purpose

Use Location to specify where you want to store a new Toolbar, keyboard, menu bar, or abbreviation.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Toolbar icon, the Keyboard icon, or the menu bar icon.

or

Select text in the document, then choose Abbreviations from the Insert menu.

2	Choose Create, then type a name in the text box.

3	Choose Template, select a storage location from the Location group box, then choose OK and Close.

See Also

Abbreviations

Create Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar

New Document/Template


Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences

Edit, Preferences, Toolbar or Keyboard or Menu Bar

Purpose

Use Preferences to select, create, edit, copy, rename, and delete Toolbars, keyboards, and menu bars.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu.

2	Double-click the Toolbar, keyboard, or menu bar icon.

or

Right click on the menu bar or Toolbar, then choose Preferences.

3	Highlight a predefined Toolbar, keyboard, or menu bar, then choose Select.

or

When available, choose Create, Edit, Copy, Rename, Delete, or Options.

To reset both the keyboard and menu bar to the WordPerfect 6.1 defaults, press Alt+Ctrl+Shift+Backspace from any document window.

See Also

Copy Abbreviations/Toolbar/ Keyboard/Menu Bar

Create Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar

Keyboard Editor

Menu Bar Editor

Rename Abbreviations/Toolbar/ Keyboard/Menu Bar

Toolbar

Toolbar/Power Bar Editor

Toolbar/Power Bar Options


Toolbar/Power Bar Options

Edit, Preferences, Toolbar, Options

Edit, Preferences, Power Bar

Purpose

Use Toolbar Options to change the font face, font size, appearance, display, and location of the Toolbar.

Use Power Bar Options to change the font face, font size, and appearance of the Power Bar and to return the Power Bar to its default settings.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Toolbar or Power Bar icon.

or

From a document window, right click the Toolbar, then choose Preferences; or right click the Power Bar, then choose Options.

2	For the Toolbar, choose Options.

3	For both the Toolbar and Power Bar, choose from the following options:

         	Font Face

Select the font you want to appear on the buttons.

         	Font Size

Select the font size you want to appear on the buttons.

         	Appearance

Select whether you want buttons to display text, pictures, or both.

         	Show QuickTips

Show or hide the QuickTips that display when the mouse moves over the buttons.

4	For the Toolbar, choose from these additional options:

         	Location

Select a default location: Left, Right, Top, Bottom, or Palette.

         	Show Scroll Bar

Select whether to display the scroll bar when buttons exceed the defined space.

         	Maximum Number of Rows/ Columns to Show

Defines the number of rows and columns that can display.

5	For the Power Bar, choose this additional option:

         	Default

Returns the Power Bar to its default settings.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Copy Abbreviations/Toolbar/ Keyboard/Menu Bar

Create Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar

Rename Abbreviations/Toolbar/ Keyboard/Menu Bar

Toolbar/Power Bar Editor


Calculate

Table, Calculate

Purpose

Use Calculate to calculate the formulas only in the current table or in the tables and floating cells throughout the entire document.

Steps

To calculate the current table,

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Calculate from the Table menu, then choose Calc Table.

To calculate the entire document,

1	Choose Calculate from the Table menu, then choose Calc Document.

You can also choose Calculate from the Table Formula feature bar.

To set Automatic Calculation Mode,

1	Choose Calculate from the Table menu.

2	Select Calculate Table to automatically calculate the current table.

or

Select Calculate Document to automatically calculate the entire document.

3	To update any charts associated with tables in your document each time the tables are automatically calculated, select Update Associated Charts.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Create a Chart from a Table

Table Formula Feature Bar


View Error

Table, Formula Bar, View Error

Purpose

Use View Error to display a brief explanation of the ?? and ERR error symbols that may appear in your table as you calculate formulas.

Steps

1	Choose Formula Bar from the Table menu.

2	Choose View Error.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Table Formula Feature Bar


Center Page(s)

Format, Page, Center

Purpose

Use Center Page to center text between the top and bottom margins.

Steps

1	If you are turning centering on or off for a single page, place the insertion point on that page.

or

If you are turning centering on or off for several pages, place the insertion point on the page where you want centering to begin or end.

2	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Center.

3	If you want to turn centering on for the current page only, select Current Page.

or

If you want to turn centering on for the current page and all pages that follow, select Current and Subsequent Pages.

or

If you want to turn centering off, select No Centering.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

About Formatting

Center Line


Compatibility (def)
Compatibility

You can move to WPWin and bring your existing WordPerfect documents and macros with you--there's no need to spend time or money recreating valuable work. You'll also save on training costs because we've retained our familiar WordPerfect look. You even have your choice of keyboard layouts, including WordPerfect for DOS.


Hide Bars Information

View, Hide Bars

Purpose

Use Hide Bars to remove the Toolbar, Power Bar, Ruler Bar, menu bar, scroll bar, and Status Bar from your screen.

This gives you the maximum amount of screen space.

Steps

To remove the bars from the screen,

1	Choose Hide Bars from the View menu.

2	Choose OK.

To restore the bars to the screen,

1	Press Cancel (the Escape key).

or

Press Alt+V, then select Hide Bars from the View menu.

See Also

Power Bar

Ruler Bar

Status Bar

Toolbar


Columns

Format, Columns, Define

Purpose

Use Columns to divide text vertically on a page. You can choose from four types of columns.

     	Newspaper

Flows text down a column to the bottom of a page or column break, then start it again at the top of the next column to the right, as with a newspaper article.

     	Balanced Newspaper

Adjusts newspaper columns so that columns are of equal length.

     	Parallel

Groups columns across the page in rows, or starts subsequent rows below the longest column of the previous row (useful for scripts, charts, or lists).

     	Parallel with Block Protect

Keeps all rows of the columns together across page breaks.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want columns to start.

2	Choose Columns from the Format menu, then choose Define.

3	Specify a number of columns in the Columns text box.

4	Select Newspaper, Balanced Newspaper, Parallel, or Parallel w/Block Protect.

5	Choose OK.

6	Type the information you want in the columns.

7	Choose Columns from the Format menu, then choose Off.

See Also

About Formatting

Column Break

Column Borders

Column Spacing, Column Widths

Create Table


Comment

Insert, Comment, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Comment to add comments to your text. Comments can be included in document text including footnotes, endnotes, and outlines.

Comments are not printed as part of the document.

Steps

To create a comment,

1	Select the text you want to place into a comment.

or

Place the insertion point where you want the comment to appear.

2	Choose Comment from the Insert menu, choose Create, then type the comment text.

If you want to include initials, a name, date, or time, choose Initials, Name, Date, or Time from the Comment feature bar.

Your initials and your name are available only if you have previously specified them in Environment Preferences.

3	If you want to see existing comments in your text, choose Next or Previous.

4	Choose Close from the Comment feature bar to return to your document.

To edit a comment,

1	Place the insertion point near the comment you want to edit.

2	Choose Comment from the Insert menu, then choose Edit.

If you are using Page view, you can quickly access the comment by double-clicking its icon.

3	Edit the comment.

4	Choose Close from the feature bar.

See Also

Converting and Hiding Comments

Environment Preferences

Hidden Text


Condense or Save Subdocuments

File, Master Document, Condense Master

Purpose

Use the Condense Master option when you want to remove the subdocuments from the master document. This does not remove the links to your subdocument.

You can also use this option to save the subdocuments whether or not you condense the master document.

Steps

1	Choose Master Document from the File menu, then choose Condense Master.

2	Select the subdocuments that you want to condense.

or

Choose Mark, then choose Condense All.

3	Select the subdocuments that you want to save.

or

Choose Mark, then choose Save All.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Expand Master Document

Include Subdocument

Master Document


Convert File Format

File, Open

Insert, File

Purpose

When you are opening or inserting a file that is not in WordPerfect format, use Convert File Format to verify the format you are converting from.

Steps

1	Choose Open from the File menu, or choose File from the Insert menu.

2	Specify the file you want to open or insert, then choose OK.

3	If the format in the text box is the format you are converting from, choose OK.

or

If the format in the box is not the format you are converting from, choose the correct format from the List Files of Type drop-down list, then choose OK.

See Also

Conversion Preferences

Conversion Preferences Code Page

Conversion Preferences Fonts

Convert Preferences

Managing Files


Convert Table

Table, Create, Tabular Column or Parallel Column

Purpose

Use Convert Table to convert tabular text or parallel columns into a table.

Steps

1	Select the tabular or parallel columns you want to convert into a table.

2	Choose Create from the Table menu.

3	Choose Tabular Column or Parallel Column, then choose OK.

Tables converted from tabular text may contain extra rows or cells. Use the Join or Delete options to remove the extra rows or cells.

See Also

Delete (Table)

Join Cell/Table


Copy Abbreviations/Toolbar/ Keyboard/Menu Bar

Edit, Preferences, Toolbar or Keyboardor Menu Bar, Copy,

Insert, Abbreviations, Copy

Purpose

Use this feature to copy abbreviations, Toolbars, keyboards, or menu bars to a template of your choice.

Steps

1	Use one of the routes above ( [image]) to display the Copy dialog box, then specify the template you want to copy from.

2	Select the item(s) you want to copy.

3	Select the template that you want to copy to.

4	Choose Copy, then choose Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Keyboard Editor

Menu Bar Editor

New Document/Template

Toolbar/Power Bar Editor


Copy Formula (Table)

Table, Copy Formula

Purpose

Use Copy Formula to copy a formula to a cell you specify.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell that contains the formula you want to copy.

2	Choose Copy Formula from the Table menu.

You can also choose Copy Formula from the Table Formula feature bar.

3	Specify the cell to which you want to copy the formula in the To Cell text box.

or

Select Down or Right, then specify the number of times to copy the formula down or to the right.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Cell Formula Entry

Table Functions


Copy or Create Printer

File, Print, Select, Options, Copy

File, Print, Select, Add Printer

Purpose

Use Copy Printer to create a copy of an existing printer file so that it can be configured separately from the original printer file. Use Create Printer to confirm a printer driver filename or to specify a new filename. These options apply only to WordPerfect printer drivers.

Steps

To copy a printer driver file,

1	Using the first route above ( [image]), display the Copy Printer dialog box.

2	Specify a new filename, then choose OK.

To create a printer driver file,

1	Using the second route above ( [image]), display the Add Printer dialog box.

2	Select the new printer, then choose OK.

3	Choose OK to confirm the printer driver filename.

or

Specify a new filename in the Printer Filename text box, then choose OK.

See Also

Print

Print Preferences


Include Subdocument

File, Master Document, Subdocument

Purpose

Use Include Subdocument when you want to create links to subdocuments from the master document.

Steps

1	Open the master document file, then place the insertion point where you want to insert a subdocument link.

2	Choose Master Document from the File menu, then choose Subdocument.

You can also press the right mouse button in the left margin, then choose Subdocument.

3	Specify the filename of the document you want to create a link for, then choose Include.

You can type the filename in the Filename text box or double-click the filename in the Filename list box.

4	Repeat this procedure for each subdocument you want to link.

See Also

Condense or Save Subdocuments

Expand Master Document

Master Document


Counter Numbering

Insert, Other, Counter

Purpose

Use counters to number anything in your document.

To use a counter, you need to create it and then specify each time you want to increase or decrease it.

Steps

To create a counter,

1	Choose Other from the Insert menu, then choose Counter.

2	Choose Create.

3	As a name for the counter, describe what you want to count in the Counter Name text box.

4	Choose OK.

The counter now appears in the Counter List for that document. You can use it to mark the items you want to number.

To start using the counter,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to display the first counter number.

2	Choose Other from the Insert menu, then choose Counter.

3	Select the counter in the Counter list.

4	Select Display in Document.

To increase or decrease the value of the displayed counter,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to increase or decrease the counter number.

2	Choose Other from the Insert menu, then choose Counter.

3	Select a counter or counter level from the Counter list.

4	Choose Increase and Display.

or

Choose Decrease and Display.

See Also

Create or Edit Counter Definition

Set Value/Number Method (Counter)


Create or Rename Bookmark

Insert, Bookmark, Create or Rename

Purpose

Use Create or Rename Bookmark to create or rename bookmarks.

Steps

To create a bookmark,

1	Place the insertion point where you want the bookmark.

or

Select the text you want for the bookmark.

2	Choose Bookmark from the Insert menu.

3	Choose Create.

4	Type a name for the bookmark, then choose OK.

or

Choose OK.

To rename a bookmark,

1	Choose Bookmark from the Insert menu.

2	Select the name of the bookmark that you want to rename.

3	Choose Rename.

4	Type the new name, then choose OK.

See Also

Bookmark


Create Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar

Edit, Preferences, Toolbar or Keyboard or Menu Bar, Create

Purpose

Use Create Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar to create new Toolbars, keyboards, or menu bars.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Toolbar icon, the Keyboard icon, or the menu bar icon.

2	Choose Create, type a name in the text box, then choose OK.

See Also

Edit Menu Text

Keyboard Editor

Menu Bar Editor

Toolbar/Power Bar Editor


Create or Edit Counter Definition

Insert, Other, Counter, Create or Edit

Purpose

If you have something in your document that you want to count, such as paragraphs, you can create a counter definition and then use it to number that item.

You can use numbers, letters, or Roman numerals to do the numbering.

Steps

1	Choose Other from the Insert menu, then choose Counter.

2	Choose Create.

or

Select a counter or counter level from the Counter list, then choose Edit.

3	As a name for the counter, describe what you want to count in the Counter Name text box.

4	To use more than one numbering level, specify the number of levels you want.

5	To change the numbering method for a counter with only one numbering level, select a method from the Single Level Method pop-up list (numbers, letters, or Roman numerals).

or

To change the numbering method for a numbering level, select a method from the appropriate Numbering Method pop-up list.

6	Choose OK.

The counter now appears in the Counter List for that document. You can use it to mark the items you want to number.

See Also

Counter Numbering

Set Value/Number Method (Counter)


Create Data File

Tools, Merge, Data, OK

Tools, Merge, Form, OK, None, OK, Go to Data, Create

Purpose

Use Create Data File to create a data file to merge with a form file. The data file contains records that can be formatted as a data text file or arranged in a data table.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu.

2	To create a data text file, choose Data.

or

To create a data table, select Place Records in a Table, then choose Data.

3	If you have text in the active window, choose OK to use the current window for the data file.

or

Select New Document Window, then choose OK.

4	Type the name of a field, then press Enter.

or

Choose OK to use field numbers instead of names.

5	Repeat step 4 for each field, then choose OK.

6	Type the data for each record in the Quick Data Entry text boxes, pressing Enter between each field and record.

7	Choose Close when you have finished entering the records you want.

8	Choose Yes to save the data file, specify a filename, then choose OK.

See Also

About Merge

Create Form File

Go to Data

Merge Data File Feature Bar

Perform Merge

Quick Data Entry


Rotate (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Rotate

Purpose

Use this feature to rotate an image around a point inside a graphics box.

Steps

To rotate an image,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image].

4	Drag one of the corner rotation handles in the direction you want to rotate the image.

To specify the degree of rotation,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image], then select Rotate Image.

4	Specify the degree of rotation you want in the Amount text box, then choose OK.

See Also

Invert (Image)

Mirror (Image)

Move (Image)

Reset All (Image)

Use a Graphics Program


Create Form File

Tools, Merge, Form, OK

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK, Close, Go to Form, Create

Purpose

Use Create Form File to create a form file, which can be made up of text, graphics, and merge codes, to direct the pattern of the merged output.

A form file is merged with a data source (usually a data text file or data table).

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Form.

2	Choose OK to use the current window for the form file.

or

Select New Document Window, then choose OK.

3	Specify a filename to associate a data file, then choose OK.

or

Select None, then choose OK.

4	If you want formatting and paper size to apply to all merged documents, choose Document from the Format menu, then choose Initial Codes Style. Enter formatting and paper size options, then choose OK.

5	Type text and retrieve graphics into your form file.

6	To reference a field from a data file, choose Insert Field from the Merge feature bar.

7	Select the field name you want, then choose Insert.

or

If no data file is associated, choose OK, type the field name or number you want, then choose Insert.

You can also choose Data File to associate a data file at this time.

8	Select another field, then choose Insert.

9	Repeat step 8 as often as you need, then choose Close.

10	Choose other options from the Merge Form File feature bar, then save or merge the file.

See Also

About Merge

Create Data File

Go to Form

Merge Form File Feature Bar

Perform Merge


Create or Edit Hypertext Link

Tools, Hypertext, Create

Purpose

Use Create or Edit Hypertext Link to create a link that will let you move from one location in a current document to another place within that document, to another document, or to a macro.

Steps

To create a hypertext link,

1	Select the words or symbols in your document that you want to use as hypertext.

2	Choose Hypertext from the Tools menu, then choose Create from the feature bar.

3	Choose one of the following options and type the name of the bookmark or macro to which you would like to create a link.

You can also click the list buttons for Go to Bookmark, Go to Other Document, or Run Macro to get a list of existing bookmarks, documents, or macros.

         	Go to Bookmark

Inserts a link that will jump to an existing bookmark within the current document.

         	Go to Other Document

Inserts a link that will jump to an existing bookmark in another document.

         	Run Macro

Inserts a link that will run the macro you specify.

4	Select Text or Button to specify how you want hypertext to appear in your document.

If you select Text, you can specify the style of highlighted text you prefer. If you select Button, you can place text or characters inside the button by editing the graphic.

To edit a hypertext link,

1	Place the insertion point on the button or to the right of the underlined hypertext link you want to edit.

2	Choose Hypertext from the Tools menu, then choose Edit.

3	Make any changes, then choose Close.

To delete a hypertext link,

1	Place the insertion point on the button or anywhere within the underlined hypertext link you want to delete, choose Hypertext from the Tools menu, then choose Delete.

See Also

About Macros

Bookmark

Hypertext Feature Bar


Create or Edit List Definition

Tools, List, Define, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use this feature to create or edit a list definition.

Steps

To create a list definition,

1	Choose List from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define from the List feature bar.

3	Choose Create, then type a name in the List text box.

4	Select a position for the page numbers in the list.

5	To use volume numbers, chapter numbers, and secondary page numbers in your list, choose Page Numbering.

6	Choose User-Defined Page Number format, then insert the options you want.

7	Choose OK.

To edit a list definition,

1	Choose List from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define from the List feature bar.

3	Select the list you want to define, then choose Edit.

4	Select a position for the page numbers in the list.

5	To use volume numbers, chapter numbers, and secondary page numbers in your list, choose Page Numbering.

6	Choose User-Defined Page Number format, then insert the options you want.

7	Choose OK.

To change the current style,

1	Choose Change.

To create a list of captions for figure, table, text, equation, or user-defined boxes,

1	Choose List from the Tools menu, then choose Define from the List feature bar.

2	Choose Create.

3	Type a name for the caption list.

4	Edit the list definition.

5	Select the type of graphics box caption you want from the Auto Reference Box Captions drop-down list.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Define List or Table of Authorities

List Feature Bar

List or Table of Authorities Style


Create Merge File

Tools, Merge, Data or Form

Purpose

Use the Create Merge File dialog box when you are creating a data or form file from a window already containing information.

You can choose to use the active window or open a new one. If you choose the active window, the current information becomes part of the data or form file.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Data or Form.

2	Select Use File in Active Window.

or

Select New Document Window.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

About Merge

Create Data File

Create Form File


Create Name (Table)

Table, Names, Create

Purpose

Use Create Name to name cells, ranges, columns, and rows using text that you type manually or text from the current cell.

Steps

To name table components manually,

1	Place the insertion point in the cell, column, row, or table you want to name.

or

If you want to name a range, select a range of cells.

2	Choose Names from the Table menu.

You can also choose Names from the Table Formula feature bar.

3	Choose Create.

4	Select Cell/Range, Column, or Row, then type a name in the Enter Name Manually text box.

A name can contain letters, numbers, and some symbols, but the first character must be a letter.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close.

To name table components using text in the current cell,

1	Place the insertion point in the cell that contains the text you want to use to name the column, the row, the cell to the right, or the cell below.

or

If you want to name several adjacent columns, rows, or cells simultaneously, select the cells containing the text that you want to use as the name.

2	Choose Names from the Table menu.

You can also choose Names from the Table Formula feature bar.

3	Choose Create.

4	Select Use Text from Current Cell to Name.

5	Select Column, Row, Cell Right, or Cell Down.

6	Choose OK.

7	Look at the list of names in the Table Names in Current Document dialog box to confirm them.

8	Choose Close.

See Also

Edit Name/Reference (Table)

Table Names in Current Document


QuickStyle

Format, Styles, QuickStyle

Purpose

Use QuickStyle to create a paragraph style containing all the formatting codes and font attributes in an existing paragraph or to create a character style containing all the font attributes (such as Bold and 12pt) on an existing character.

Steps

1	Format the text on which you want to base your style. For example, format one heading the way you want all your headings to look.

2	With the insertion point on the text you have formatted, choose Styles from the Format menu, then choose QuickStyle.

3	Type a name for the style. If you want, type a description for the style.

4	Select Paragraph if you want the style to affect the paragraph containing the insertion point or the selected text (useful for headings).

or

Select Character if you want the style to affect selected text or text you are about to type.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

New Document/Template

Styles

Styles Editor


Create Table

Table, Create

Purpose

Use Create Table to specify the number of columns and rows in a table or to create a floating cell.

Steps

1	Choose Create from the Table menu, then specify the number of columns and rows you want.

or

Select Floating Cell to create a floating cell.

2	Choose OK.

You can also click the Tables button on the Power Bar, then drag to select the number of rows and columns you want to create in a table.

See Also

About Tables

Create a Chart from a Table

Create a Formula

Insert Columns/Rows Into Table

Join Cell/Table

Split Table

Table Cut or Copy

Table Formula Feature Bar

Table Lines/Fill

Table Names in Current Document


Create or Edit Table of Authorities

Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Create Table of Authorities to create or edit a table of authorities section definition.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Authorities from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define from the Table of Authorities feature bar.

3	Choose Create, then type a name in the Name text box.

or

Select the section you want to define, then choose Edit.

4	Select a position for the page numbers in the table.

5	To use volume numbers, chapter numbers, and secondary page numbers in your table, choose Page Numbering.

6	Choose User-Defined Page Number Format, then insert the options you want.

7	Choose OK.

If you want to change the current style, choose Change.

See Also

List or Table of Authorities Style


Custom Box

Graphics, Custom Box

Purpose

Use Custom Box to define your own graphics box style, then save it with your current document or for use in future documents.

Steps

To create a graphics box style,

1	Choose Custom Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Styles.

2	Choose Create, then type a name for the box style in the Style Name text box.

3	Select options to create the graphics box style.

4	Choose OK until you return to the Create Box Style dialog box, then choose OK to return to the Box Styles dialog box.

5	Choose Close.

To use a graphics box style,

1	Make sure the new box style is highlighted.

2	Choose Select, then choose OK.

To save the style in the current document, the default template, or the supplemental template,

1	Choose Custom Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Styles.

2	Choose Setup from the Options drop-down list, select an option under List Styles From, then choose OK.

See Also

About Borders

Box Caption

Box Content

Box Position

Box Size

Text Box Initial Style

Wrap Text


Custom Date Format

Insert, Date, Date Format, Custom

Purpose

Use Custom Date Format to customize the format of all subsequent dates in the current document.

Steps

1	Choose Date from the Insert menu, then choose Date Format.

2	Select the format you want to edit, then choose Custom.

3	Select and insert codes from the Date Codes and Time Codes list boxes to create a new date and time format.

4	Type any punctuation, spaces, and text you want to include with the date in the Edit Date Format text box. You can also delete punctuation, spaces, text, and codes.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Date

Date Format


Customize Date Type (Table)

Table, Number Type, Date/Time, Custom

Purpose

Use Customize Date Type to change the format of the date and time that is used when you select Date/Time in the Number Type dialog box.

Steps

1	With your insertion point in a table, choose Number Type from the Table menu.

2	Select Date/Time.

3	Choose Custom.

4	Select a date/time format from the Date/Time Types drop-down list.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Customize Number Type (Table)

Number Type


Customize Number Type (Table)

Table, Number Type, Custom

Purpose

Use Customize Number Type to change the format of number types.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the table you want to change, then choose Number Type from the Table menu.

2	Select the Type you want to customize (except Date/Time or Text).

If you choose the Text number type, the Custom button is dimmed.

3	Choose Custom, then change an option:

         	Negative Numbers

Format negative numbers with a minus sign (-), parentheses, or the CR/DR symbol.

         	Use Currency Symbol

Turn on the currency symbol.

         	Align Currency Symbol

Align the currency symbol at the left edge of the cell if Use Currency Symbol is selected.

         	Symbol

Select a different currency symbol.

         	Digits after Decimal

Change the number of digits after the decimal point.

         	Round to Number of Digits after Decimal

The rounded value of a cell is returned when referenced for calculation.

         	Use Commas

Allow commas in the numbers you type in cells (does not affect Scientific or Date number types).

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Customize Date Type (Table)

Number Type (Table)


Custom Line Edit

Graphics, Edit Line, Line Styles, Edit, Custom

Purpose

Use Custom Line Edit to edit a horizontal or vertical line.

Steps

1	Select a graphics line.

2	Choose Edit Line from the Graphics menu.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics line, then select Edit Horizontal Line or Edit Vertical Line.

3	Choose Line Styles.

4	Highlight a line style you want to edit, then choose Edit.

5	Choose Custom, then choose the length and spacing options you want.

You can also add and delete dashes by choosing Add or Del.

6	Choose OK twice, highlight the edited line style, choose Select, then choose OK.

See Also

Create Horizontal or Vertical Line

Custom Box/Line Styles


Define Color Printing Palette

Format, Font, Palette

Purpose

Use Define Color Printing Palette to create and select colors for use in your documents.

To print the colors you specify for your document, you must use a printer that supports color printing.

For more information, choose from the following options:

Blend Colors

Color Model

Color Wheel

Copy or Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Rainbow Colors

See Also

Font

Open Color Palette


Define Index

Tools, Index, Define

Purpose

Use Define Index to define where and how you want the index to appear.

Steps

1	Choose Index from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define from the Index feature bar.

3	Select a position for the page numbers in the index entries.

4	To use volume numbers, chapter numbers, and secondary page numbers in your index, choose Page Numbering.

5	If you want to print each page number out (for example, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8) rather than combined (for example, 4-8), deselect Use Dash to Show Consecutive Pages.

If you are using a concordance file, type the filename or click the list button, then select a file.

6	Choose OK.

To change the current style, choose Change.

See Also

Generate


Index or Table of Contents Styles

Tools, Index, Define, Change

Tools, Table of Contents, Define, Styles

Purpose

Use Index or Table of Contents Styles to change the style used for index and table of contents entries.

Steps

To replace the style with an existing style,

1	Using one of the routes ( [image]) above, display the Index or Table of Contents Styles dialog box.

2	Select the level style you want to change.

3	Select a style from the Styles list.

4	Choose OK.

To create a style,

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Index or Table of Contents Styles dialog box.

2	Choose Create, then create a style.

3	Choose OK.

To edit a style,

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Index or Table of Contents Styles dialog box.

2	Choose Edit, then edit the style.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Define Index

Define Table of Contents

Styles Editor


Page Number Format

Tools, Index or Table of Contents, Define, Page Numbering

Tools, List or Table of Authorities, Define, Create or Edit, Page Numbering

Purpose

Use Page Number Format to customize the way the page numbers appear.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Page Number Format dialog box.

2	Select User-Defined Page Number Format.

3	Choose Insert, then choose the types of numbers you want.

4	Type any text and punctuation that you want to include with the numbers.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Page Numbering


Define Selection Conditions

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Import, Query

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Create or Edit Link, Query

Purpose

Use Define Selection Conditions if you are importing a database and you want to import or link specific information. For example, you could find all the records of people with the last name of Jones who live in the state of Arizona.

Steps

1	Choose Spreadsheet/Database from the Insert menu.

2	Choose Import to import query information from the database one time only.

or

Choose Create Link to create a link that will enable you to update the linked database information after changes are made.

3	Choose the kind of database you want to import or link from the Data Type drop-down list.

4	Choose an option from the Link As or Import As drop-down list.

5	In the Filename text box, type the path and filename of the database file you want to import or link.

You can also click the file icon to select a file, then choose OK.

6	Choose Query, then select the conditions for each of the fields you want to import or link into your document.

You can choose Example from the Define Selection Conditions dialog box to see more information on how conditions should be specified. Choose Close when you have finished viewing the example.

7	Choose OK until you return to the document window.

See Also

Example Select Records

Spreadsheet/Database


Define Table of Contents

Tools, Table of Contents, Define

Purpose

Use Define Table of Contents to define where and how you want the table of contents to appear.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Contents from the Tools menu, then choose Define from the Table of Contents feature bar.

2	Specify the Number of Levels (1-5) you want in the table of contents.

3	Select a position for the page numbers for each level of the table of contents.

If you want to use volume numbers, chapter numbers, and secondary page numbers in your table of contents, choose Page Numbering.

If your table of contents has more than one level and you want the last level wrapped flush left instead of indented, select Display Last Level in Wrapped Format.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Index or Table of Contents Styles

Table of Contents Feature Bar


Define List or Table of Authorities

Tools, List or Table of Authorities, Define

Purpose

Use Define List or Table of Authorities to choose a definition and location for a list or table of authorities section.

Steps

To create a definition,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Choose Create (List) or Create (Table of Authorities).

To insert a definition into your document,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Select a definition, then choose Insert.

To edit a definition,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Select a definition, then choose Edit (List) or Edit (Table of Authorities).

To retrieve a definition,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Choose Retrieve.

See Also

Create or Edit List Definition

Create or Edit Table of Authorities

Retrieve List Definitions


Delay Codes

Format, Page, Delay Codes, Number of Pages to Delay, OK

Purpose

Use Delay Codes to insert codes that will take effect a specified number of pages after the current page.

Steps

To insert a delay code,

1	Place the insertion point on the page in your document where you want to delay codes.

2	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Delay Codes.

3	Specify the number of pages you want to delay codes, then choose OK.

For example, if you are on page 3 and you specify 2, changes will begin on page 5.

4	Choose font and formatting options from the menus.

or

Choose options from the Delay Codes feature bar.

5	When you have finished entering codes, choose Close from the Delay Codes feature bar.

To edit a delay code,

1	Choose Reveal Codes from the View menu.

2	Double-click the delay code you want to edit.

3	Make the changes you want, then choose Close from the Delay Codes feature bar.

See Also

About Formatting

Suppress


Delete (Table)

Table, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete to delete the structure or content of a specific row or column of a table.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the row or column you want to delete or in the cell that contains the contents you want to delete.

or

Select the rows or columns in the table you want to delete, or select the cells that contain the contents you want to delete.

2	Choose Delete from the Table menu.

If you have selected cells, rows, or columns, you can also press Delete or Backspace, or click the right mouse button, then choose Delete.

3	If you selected rows or columns in step 1, select Columns or Rows to completely delete the column(s) or row(s), or select Cell Contents to delete only the contents of the selected cells, or select Formulas Only to delete the formulas in the selected cells without deleting the cell contents.

or

Select Columns or Rows and specify the number of columns or rows you want to delete, or select Cell Contents to delete the contents of the current cell, or select Formulas Only to delete the formulas in the current cell without deleting the cell contents.

If you mistakenly delete part of a table or its content or formulas, use Undo to restore it.

See Also

Delete Table

Undo or Redo


Delete Printer

File, Print, Select, Options, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete Printer to remove a printer from the list of available printers.

Steps

To delete a WordPerfect-driven printer,

1	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Select.

2	Choose Delete from the Options drop-down list, then choose OK.

The .PRS file (where the definition is saved) remains in your printer files directory and can be added again, unless you select Delete the associated .PRS.

To delete a Windows-driven printer,

1	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Select.

2	Choose Delete from the Options drop-down list, then highlight the printer you want to delete in the Printers dialog box.

3	Choose Remove, then choose Yes.

See Also

Add Printer

Printer Information


Code Page (Environment Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, Environment, Code Page

Purpose

Use Code Page to define which ASCII or ANSI character set is used in a document. Different ASCII or ANSI character sets are used for different languages. When you save a document, you can change the code page, and thus the character set, for the document.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Choose Code Page.

3	Select a DOS, Windows, Input File, or Output File code page.

4	Choose OK.


Display Preferences

Edit, Preferences, Display

Purpose

Use Display Preferences to set options that affect your display until you change the options again.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Choose from the following options:

Document (Display Preferences)

View/Zoom (Display Preferences)

Ruler Bar (Display Preferences)

Show (Display Preferences)

Reveal Codes (Display Preferences)

Merge (Display Preferences)


Document Summary Configuration

File, Document Summary, Configure

Purpose

WordPerfect provides you with a default document summary that includes nine fields. There are an additional fifty-one fields available for use in document summaries.

You can choose other fields for your document summaries and change the order in which they appear.

Steps

To change the fields in your document summary,

1	Choose Document Summary from the File menu.

2	Choose Configure.

The Selected Fields list displays the fields currently used in the document summary, in the order they appear.

3	In the Available Fields list, select the fields you want to include in the Selected Fields list.

or

In the Available Fields list, deselect the fields you want to remove from the Selected Fields list.

4	If you want to change the order of the fields, drag and move fields to arrange them in the order you want.

5	Choose OK.

The new document summary applies only to the current document.

To use a personalized document summary as the default document summary for all new documents you create,

1	Choose Document Summary from the File menu.

2	Choose Configure.

3	Arrange the list of Selected Fields in the order you want.

4	Choose Use as Default, then choose Yes.

5	Choose OK.

The default document summary applies to all new documents you create with the default template. Other templates will still use custom summaries if they have been attached to them.

To return to the default document summary with its nine fields,

1	Choose Clear All to empty the Selected Fields list.

2	Choose Use as Default, then choose Yes.

3	Choose OK to return to an empty Document Summary.

4	Choose OK again to return to your document.

The next time you choose Document Summary from the File menu, the default document summary will be displayed.

See Also

Document Summary

Document Summary Options

Document Summary Preferences


Document Character Map

Format, Document, Character Mapping

Purpose

Use Character Mapping to reduce document size when typing in non-Roman languages (such as Greek, Cyrillic, or Hebrew). When you have installed a language module or WordPerfect package for a non-Roman language, you can use Character Mapping to select the character map for the current document.

If you want to select a character map for all new documents, you must add the character map to your template.

Steps

1	Choose Document from the Format menu, then choose Character Mapping.

Character maps are listed only for the non-Roman language modules you have purchased.

2	Select the character map for the language you are currently using, then choose Apply.

See Also

Language

New Document/Template


Date Format

Insert, Date, Date Format

Purpose

Use Date Format to choose from several predefined date formats.

Steps

1	Choose Date from the Insert menu, then choose Date Format.

2	Select a format, then choose OK.

You can also choose Custom to edit the selected format.

See Also

Custom Date Format

Date


Document on Disk

File, Print, Document on Disk

Purpose

Use Document on Disk to print a document stored on a hard disk, floppy disk, or network drive without opening it in the document window.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Document on Disk, then choose Print.

3	Type the filename of the document you want to print in the Filename text box or click the list button, then select a file using the drive, directory, and file lists.

4	Specify the pages, secondary pages, chapters, and volumes to print.

5	Choose Print.

See Also

Multiple Pages

Page Numbering

Printer Setup

Select Printer


Document Summary

File, Document Summary

Purpose

Use Document Summary to create a general overview of a document.

Steps

1	Choose Document Summary from the File menu.

2	Choose Options, then choose Extract Information From Document to fill in some of the summary fields.

3	Select summary fields as necessary, then type or edit the information in them.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Document Summary Configuration

Document Summary Options

Document Summary Preferences


Document Summary Preferences

Edit, Preferences, Summary

Purpose

Use Document Summary Preferences to automate certain summary tasks.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Summary.

2	Choose from the following options:

         	Subject Search Text

Specify the text WordPerfect uses to identify a document subject. For example, if "RE:" is the subject search text, WordPerfect uses the text immediately following RE as the Subject when you extract information from your document.

         	Default Descriptive Type

Specify the default Descriptive Type for document summaries.

         	Use Descriptive Names

Let's you enter a detailed name that is longer than the document's filename.

         	Create Summary on Save/Exit

The Document Summary dialog box is displayed when you save or exit a document.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Document Summary

Document Summary Configuration

Document Summary Options


Image Settings - Edit All

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Image Settings

Purpose

Use this feature to access image editing features on the Image Tools palette.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Image Tools.

3	Click [image] to enter the Image Settings dialog box.

4	Select the options you want and enter values where applicable.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close on the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.


DDE Links

Edit, Links, Update Now or Change Link or Cancel Link

Purpose

Use this feature to update, cancel, or change a link. If you want to manually update your links, you can also set Link Options so that your links are not updated automatically each time you open your file.

Steps

To update a link,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

2	Select the link you want to update manually.

3	Choose Update Now.

4	Choose OK to return to your document.

To change a link,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

2	Select the link for which you want to change the name, application server, filename, or item.

3	Choose Change Link, then change the information for any of the options listed below.

         	Link Name

Give the link a new name.

         	Application

Change the source application.

         	Topic/Filename

Change the source file.

         	Item

Specify which cell or range you want to change if you are working with a database or spreadsheet.

4	Choose OK to confirm the changes and return to the Links dialog box, then choose OK to return to your document.

To cancel a link,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

2	Select the linked information you want to remove from the document.

3	Choose Cancel Link, then choose OK.

See Also

Object

OLE Links

Paste Special


Edit Field Names

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK, Field Names

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK, Close, Quick Entry, Field Names

Purpose

Use Edit Field Names to change field names after you have created a data file.

Steps

1	Create or retrieve a data file.

2	Choose Quick Entry from the Merge Data feature bar.

3	Choose Field Names.

4	Choose from the following options:

         	Add

Type a new field name, then add it below the current selection.

         	Add Before

Type a new field name, then add it before the current selection.

         	Replace

Type a new field name to replace the current selection.

         	Delete

Delete the current selection.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Data File

Go to Data

Merge Data File Feature Bar

Quick Data Entry


Edit Footnote or Endnote

Insert, Footnote or Endnote, Edit

Purpose

Use Edit Footnote or Endnote to edit a footnote or endnote.

Steps

1	Choose Footnote or Endnote from the Insert menu, then choose Edit.

2	Type the number of the note you want to edit, then choose OK.

If you are using Page view, you can also click on the text of the note to edit it.

3	Edit the text of the note.

You can also paste information you have cut or copied, or you can insert a file into the note.

If you delete a number, you can restore it by using the Note Number button.

4	Choose Close.

See Also

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Cut, Copy, Paste

Edit Numbering Style

Endnote Placement

Endnote Options

Footnote Options

Footnote or Endnote Number

Line Separator

Numbering Method

Position of Footnotes

Spacing Between Notes

Styles Editor


Edit Graphics Menu

Graphics, Graphics Styles, Menu

Purpose

Use this feature to add additional graphics box styles to the Graphics menu.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu, then select Menu.

2	Select the box styles you want to add to the Graphics menu.

or

Deselect the box styles you want to remove from the Graphics menu.

3	Choose OK and Close.

See Also

Graphics Styles


Create or Edit Label File

Format, Labels, Change, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use this feature to create a new label file or edit an existing one.

Steps

1	Choose Labels from the Format menu, then choose Change from the Select Label File group box.

2	Choose Create.

or

Highlight the filename of the label file you want to edit, then choose Edit.

3	Specify the filename for the label file.

WordPerfect adds a .LAB file extension.

4	Specify a description, then choose OK.

5	If you want to select the new label file, make sure it is highlighted, then choose Select.

See Also

Create or Edit Labels

Label File

Labels


Create or Edit Labels

Format, Labels, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Create or Edit Labels to create a new label definition or edit an existing one.

When you create a label definition, it is saved to the label file you choose.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point on the page where you want labels to begin.

2	Choose Labels from the Format menu.

3	To edit an existing definition, highlight the definition, then choose Edit.

or

To create a new label definition, choose Create, then type a new label description.

4	Choose from the following options:

         	Label Sheet Size; Change

Select an available paper size or create another.

         	Label Size

Specify the width and height of individual labels.

         	Labels Per Page

Specify how many labels are arranged in columns and rows.

         	Top Left Label

Specify the location of the top left label (measured from paper edge to label edge).

         	Distance Between Labels

Specify the horizontal distance between label columns and the vertical distance between label rows.

         	Label Margins

Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.

         	Label Type

Specify laser, tractor-fed, or both.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Create or Edit Paper Size or Create Envelope Definition

Label File

Labels

Paper Size

Print Individual Labels

Subdivide Page


Edit Name/Reference (Table)

Table, Names, Edit

Purpose

Use Edit Name/Reference to edit the name of a table, floating cell, or table component, to use names for different types of table components, and to change the reference of a name.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Names from the Table menu.

You can also click Names from the Table Formula feature bar.

3	Highlight the name of the table, floating cell, or table component you want to edit.

4	Choose Edit.

5	Type a new name in the Name text box.

If you want to use a name for a different type of table structure (cell/range, row, column), select a new type from the Type pop-up button.

If you want to change the reference of a name, specify a new one in the Reference text box (for example, a cell address, a new address for a range of cells, or a new row or column number). A name can contain letters, numbers, and some symbols, but the first character must be a letter.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Table Names in Current Document

Create Name (Table)


Edit Outline Definition

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Edit Outline Definition to create or edit an outline definition.

Steps

1	Choose Outline from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define Outline from the Options drop-down list on the Outline feature bar.

3	Choose Create.

or

Select the outline definition you want to change, then choose Edit.

4	If necessary, type a name for the outline definition. If you want, type a description.

5	Choose from the following options:

         	Associated Styles

Choose a different style for the level.

         	Custom Number

Change the number or bullet for a level.

         	Quick Numbers

Base the new numbering format on a predefined format.

         	Options

Specify whether you want to use both numbers and styles, numbers only (without level styles that format text), or the level styles that format text only (without numbers) in your outline definition.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Define Outline

Create an Outline

Styles


Create or Edit Paper Size or Create Envelope Definition

Format, Page, Paper Size, Create or Edit

Format, Labels,  Create or Edit, Change, Create

Format, Envelope, Create New Definition

Purpose

Use this feature to create or edit a paper definition for the current document or future use.

The definition is saved with your printer's .PRS file if you are using a WordPerfect printer driver or with your .BIF file if you are using a Windows printer driver.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display a Create or Edit dialog box.

2	If you are creating a new paper size, type a name.

or

Highlight a paper definition, then choose Edit.

3	Select a paper type from the Paper Type drop-down list.

4	Select a paper size from the Paper Size drop-down list.

or

Select [ALL OTHERS] (for WordPerfect printer drivers) or select User Defined Size (for Windows drivers), then specify paper size measurements.

5	Choose from the following options:

         	Paper Location

Specify the paper feed location of your printer.

         	Prompt to Load Paper

Prompt you to load paper in your printer (for WordPerfect printer drivers only).

         	Rotated Font

Rotate the information sideways on the page.

         	Wide Form

Specify a wide form orientation.

         	Text Adjustments

Adjust text on the page when it does not print in the specified margins.

6	Choose OK to save the paper definition.

7	To select the new paper size, highlight it, then choose Select.

or

To exit without selecting a paper size, choose Close.

See Also

Delete a Paper Definition

Paper Size


Edit Paper Size [ALL OTHERS]

Format, Page, Paper Size, [ALL OTHERS], Edit

Purpose

Use Edit to edit the [ALL OTHERS] paper definition.

Changes to the [ALL OTHERS] definition remain in WordPerfect until you edit the current definition.

Steps

1	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Paper Size.

2	Highlight the [ALL OTHERS] definition, then choose Edit.

3	Choose from the following options:

         	Maximum Width

Specify the maximum width of paper your printer can accept.

         	Location

Specify the paper feed location of your printer.

         	Prompt to Load Paper

Have WordPerfect prompt you to load paper in your printer.

         	Text Adjustments

Adjust text on the page when it doesn't print in the specified margins.

4	Choose OK, then choose Select to select the definition.

or

Choose Close.

See Also

ALL OTHERS


workgroup

Anyone with OBEX-enabled applications who has an account/transport you can access.


Edit Printer/Document Font Mapping

Format, Font, Font Map

Purpose

Use Edit Printer/Document Font Mapping to edit the fonts that will be used for automatic font changes (AFCs), for display on your monitor, and for printing a document when the specified font is not available.

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Automatic Font Change

Code Pages (Font Mapping)

Display (Font Mapping)

Document (Font Mapping)

See Also

Document/Printer Initial Font

Font


Table of Authorities Full Form Feature Bar

Tools, Table of Authorities, Create Full Form or Edit Full Form, OK

Purpose

Use the Table of Authorities Full Form feature bar to create or edit the full form of an authority.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Create Full Form or Edit Full Form.

2	Choose Section to specify a section name.

or

Choose Short Form to specify a short form name.

3	Edit the full form text so that it appears exactly as you want it in your table of authorities, then choose Close from the Full Form feature bar.

See Also

Create Full Form

Edit Full Form


Endnote Options

Insert, Endnote, Options

Purpose

Use Endnote Options to change endnote formatting options.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point before the endnotes you want to change.

2	Choose Endnote from the Insert menu, then choose Options.

3	Use any of the following options:

Numbering Method

Edit Numbering Style

Spacing Between Notes

Continuous Notes

See Also

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Endnote Placement

Footnote or Endnote Number


Endnote Placement (in Document)

Insert, Endnote, Placement

Purpose

Use Endnote Placement to specify different endnote locations within your document. The default is to place them at the end of the document.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the endnotes to be placed.

2	Choose Endnote from the Insert menu, then choose Placement.

3	If you want subsequent endnotes to start over at number 1, choose Insert Endnotes at Insertion Point and Restart Numbering.

4	Choose OK.

WordPerfect inserts a hard page to separate the endnotes from the next page of text.

See Also

Continuous Notes

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Edit Numbering Style

Endnote Options

Footnote or Endnote Number

Numbering Method

Spacing Between Notes


Envelope

Format, Envelope

Tools, Merge, Merge, Envelopes

Purpose

Use Envelope to create an envelope using the mailing address from your current document or using the return and mailing addresses you specify.

To create an envelope, you must have a printer selected and an available envelope paper definition for that printer.

To create multiple envelopes with the same return address but different mailing addresses, see About Merge.

Steps

1	If you want, open the document (such as a letter) for the current envelope.

2	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Envelope dialog box.

3	Use the current return address or select one from the drop-down list.

or

Make sure <New Address> is selected in the drop-down list, then type a new return address.

4	Choose from the following options:

         	Add

Add the new address to the list.

         	Delete

Delete the selected address from the list.

         	Font

Change the address font.

         	Print Return Address

Print the selected address on the envelope.

5	Use the displayed mailing address or specify a different one.

or

If you are merging envelopes, choose Field, specify fields for the address, then choose OK.

6	If you want, select a different envelope definition from the Envelope Definitions drop-down list.

or

Choose Create New Definition, specify options, then choose OK.

7	To change address positions or include the USPS POSTNET bar code, choose Options, select the options you want, then choose OK.

8	Choose Print Envelope to print the envelope.

or

Choose Append to Doc to insert it at the end of your current document.

See Also

About Merge

Create or Edit Paper Size or Create Envelope Definition

Envelope Options

POSTNET Bar Code

Printer Setup


Envelope Options

Format, Envelope, Options

Tools, Merge, Merge, Envelopes, Options

Purpose

Use Envelope Options to change address positions and include a USPS POSTNET bar code on the envelope you are creating.

The Bar Code feature is POSTNET certified by the United States Postal Service for laser printers only.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Envelope Options dialog box.

2	Specify a horizontal and vertical setting for the Return Address Position.

3	Specify a horizontal and vertical setting for the Mailing Address Position.

4	Specify an option in the USPS Bar Code Options group box.

5	Choose OK.

6	Type the 5-digit ZIP Code, the ZIP + 4, or the 11-digit Delivery Point Bar Code in the POSTNET Bar Code text box.

7	Finish creating the envelope, then choose Print Envelope or Append to Doc.

If you are using the second route above, the Print Envelope or Append to Doc options are not available.

See Also

Envelope

POSTNET Bar Code


Environment Preferences

Edit, Preferences, Environment

Purpose

Use Environment Preferences to set options that are in effect until you change them again.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Make sure Automatically Select Words is selected. When this option is enabled, you can drag the mouse in the document window and select text word by word instead of character by character.

3	Select Set QuickMark on Save. When this option is enabled, WordPerfect places a QuickMark (a generic bookmark) at the insertion point whenever you save a document. A QuickMark marks a location in a document so that you can return to that location quickly.

4	Select Activate Hypertext. When this option is enabled, WordPerfect activates all hypertext links in the documents you create.

5	If you want to change the interface of WordPerfect to a language version you have purchased, select the language from the Interface drop-down list in the Language group box. You will need to exit WordPerfect and then restart it for the change to take effect.

6	Choose from the following remaining options:

User Info for Comments and Summary (Environment Preferences)

Beep On (Environment Preferences)

Formatting (Environment Preferences)

Menu (Environment Preferences)

Save Workspace (Environment Preferences)

Code Page (Environment Preferences)

See Also

Bookmark

Create or Edit Hypertext Link

Select


Equation Font

Graphics, Edit Box, Content, Edit, Font, Equation Font

Purpose

Use Equation Font to change the font of an equation.

Steps

1	Select an equation to edit.

2	Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, choose Content from the Graphics Box feature bar, then choose Edit.

or

Double-click an equation to enter the Equation Editor.

3	Choose Equation Font from the Font menu.

4	Select the options you want. When you are finished, choose OK to return to the Equation Editor.

5	Choose Close from the File menu.

See Also

Create or Edit Equations

Equation Palette


WordPerfect Bars

Purpose

WordPerfect bars are the bars which normally display at the top or bottom of your document window. You can use your mouse to quickly access often-used features from the default bars. Or in the case of the Power Bar, Status Bar, or Toolbar, you can alter the bars to suit your needs.

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Feature Bars

Power Bar

Ruler Bar

Status Bar

Toolbar


Example Select Records

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Import, Query, Example

Tools, Merge, Merge, Select Records, Example

Purpose

Use Example Select Records to enter information to select records.

     	Single Value

Utah

     	List of Values

Utah;Hawaii;California

     	Range of Values

Ohio-Utah

     	Exclude Values

!Utah (not Utah)

     	Zero or More Characters

U-* (from U to the end of the alphabet)

     	One Character Wildcard

J??n (4-letter words beginning with J, ending with n, any letters between)

See Also

Mark Records

Perform Merge

Specify Conditions for Merge

Spreadsheet/Database


Expand Master Document

File, Master Document, Expand Master

Purpose

Use Expand Master Document when you want to retrieve linked documents into the master document.

Steps

1	Choose Master Document from the File menu, then choose Expand Master.

2	Select the subdocuments you want to expand.

You can select all subdocuments listed by choosing Mark, then choosing Mark All.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Condense or Save Subdocuments

Include Subdocument

Master Document


Move (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Move

Purpose

Use this feature to move an image inside a graphics box.

Steps

To move an image inside a graphics box,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image].

4	Place the mouse pointer on the image so that the pointer changes to an open hand icon.

5	Drag the image to a new location inside the graphics box.

To move an image by specifying a horizontal and vertical position,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image], then select Move Image.

4	Specify a value in the Horizontal text box.

Positive values move the image to the right; negative values move the image to the left.

5	Specify a value in the Vertical text box.

Positive values move the image up; negative values move the image down.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Invert (Image)

Mirror (Image)

Reset All (Image)

Rotate (Image)

Use a Graphics Program


File Preferences

Edit, Preferences, File

Purpose

Use File Preferences to specify where certain types of files are stored and to set backup options.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Choose View All to view a complete listing of pathnames and other settings for all File Preferences options, then choose Close.

3	Choose from the following options:

Documents/Backup (File Preferences)

Templates (File Preferences)

Spreadsheets (File Preferences)

Databases (File Preferences)

Printers/Labels (File Preferences)

Hyphenation (File Preferences)

Graphics (File Preferences)

Macros (File Preferences)

Merge (File Preferences)

View File Location Preferences (File Preferences)


Edit Fill Style

Graphics, Graphics Styles, Fill, Edit

Purpose

Use Edit Fill Style to create a custom fill style for use within a graphics box border or a document text border. You can also edit predefined fill styles.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu.

2	Select Fill from the Style Type group box.

3	Select a predefined line style to edit, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, then type a name for the new fill style in the Style Name text box.

4	Select the Pattern radio button, then choose a pattern from the Pattern pop-up palette. Choose a color from the Foreground Color pop-up palette and the Background Color pop-up palette.

or

Select Gradient, then choose a Foreground Color, a Background Color, a Gradient pattern (linear, circular, or rectangular), and any gradient options you want.

Choose from the following gradient options:

         	Vertical Offset

Specify the vertical center of a circular or rectangular gradient or the top of a linear gradient.

         	Horizontal Offset

Specify the horizontal center of a circular or rectangular gradient or a rotated linear gradient.

         	Rotation Angle

Rotate a linear or rectangular gradient counterclockwise inside the border.

         	Steps

Specify how smoothly the foreground and background colors are blended.

         	Auto Steps

Automatically calculates the number of steps for a given gradient type.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

About Borders

Border/Fill Styles

Styles


Find and Replace Text

Edit, Find and Replace

Purpose

Use Find and Replace to find words, phrases, or codes in your document. You can replace these items with other words, phrases, or codes.

Steps

To find text,

1	Choose Find and Replace from the Edit menu.

2	Type the text you want to find in the Find text box.

or

Click the arrow button to the right of the Find text box, then select a word or phrase you searched for previously.

The Find button that appears is determined by the Find and Replace text direction you have selected.

3	Choose Find Next to search forward in your document.

or

Choose Find Prev to search backward your document.

To find and replace text,

1	Choose Find and Replace from the Edit menu.

2	Type the text you want to find in the Find text box, click the Replace With text box, then type the replacement text.

or

Click the arrow button to the right of the Find text box, then select a word or phrase you searched for previously.

You can also click the arrow button to the right of the Replace With text box, then select replacement text you have used previously.

To delete the text you are searching for, leave the Replace With text box empty.

3	Select any other options you want to use.

4	Choose one of the following options:

         	Find Next

Finds the search text the first time it appears forward from the insertion point.

         	Find Prev

Finds the search text the first time it appears backward from the insertion point.

         	Replace

Selects the search text the first time it appears in the direction you have selected, then replaces it each time you choose it thereafter.

         	Replace All

Simultaneously finds and replaces the search text every time it appears in the direction you have selected.

See Also

Codes (Macros and Find)

Find and Replace Text Direction

Find and Replace Text Options

Find Text Action Options

Find Word Forms

Match and Replace

Specific Codes


Codes (Macros and Find)

Edit, Find and Replace, Match, Codes

Tools, Macro or Template Macro, Macro Bar or Template Macro Bar, Codes

Purpose

Use Codes with the Macro feature to insert codes in a macro.

Use Codes with Find and Replace to find and replace codes regardless of the value the codes may contain. For example, if you search for a font size code, any font size code will be found.

Steps

To insert codes in a macro,

1	Choose Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Macro Bar.

or

Choose Template Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Template Macro Bar.

2	Choose Codes, select a code, then choose Insert.

3	To insert Merge codes, select Display Merge Codes Only, select a code, then choose Insert.

4	When done inserting codes, choose Close.

To find a code,

1	Choose Find and Replace from the Edit menu.

2	Choose Codes from the Match menu.

3	Select the code you want to find, choose Insert, then choose Close.

4	Choose Find to find the code.

5	Choose Close.

To find and replace a code,

1	Choose Find and Replace from the Edit menu.

2	Choose Codes from the Match menu, select the code, choose Insert, then choose Close.

3	Click the Replace With text box, choose Codes from the Replace menu, select the replacement code, choose Insert, then choose Close.

4	Choose Replace or Replace All, then choose Close.

See Also

Find and Replace Text Direction

Find and Replace Text Options

About Macros

Specific Codes


Font

Format, Font

Purpose

Use Font to change the basic typeface in which your document is printed.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point at the location where you want to change the font in your document.

2	Choose Font from the Format menu.

3	Select the Font Face, the Font Size, and the Font Style you want.

4	Select other Font options as desired.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

About Formatting

Define Color Printing Palette

Document/Printer Initial Font

Edit Printer/Document Font Mapping

Equation Font

Select Fonts

Select Printer


Footnote or Endnote Number

Insert, Footnote or Endnote, New Number

Purpose

Use Footnote or Endnote Number to restart note numbering at any number.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to start renumbering footnotes or endnotes.

2	Choose Footnote or Endnote from the Insert menu, then choose New Number.

3	Specify a new number.

or

Select Increase or Decrease.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Edit Numbering Style

Line Separator


Footnote Options

Insert, Footnote, Options

Purpose

Use Footnote Options to change footnote formatting options.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point before the footnotes you want to change.

2	Choose Footnote from the Insert menu, then choose Options.

3	Use any of the following options:

Numbering Method

Separator

Edit Numbering Style

Spacing Between Notes

Position

Continued Footnotes

See Also

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Footnote or Endnote Number


Force Page

Format, Page, Force Page

Purpose

Use Force Page to make sure that a certain page in a document always has an odd or an even page number.

Steps

1	Move the insertion point to the page you where you want an odd or even page number.

2	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Force Page.

3	Select Current Page Odd, Current Page Even, or New Page.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

About Formatting

Page Numbering

Suppress


Table Formula Feature Bar

Table, Formula Bar

Purpose

Use the Table Formula feature bar to create and insert formulas into tables and floating cells.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table or floating cell.

2	Choose Formula Bar from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Formula Bar.

3	For more information, choose from the following topics:

Create a Formula

Sum in Table Formula

Table Functions

Table Names in Current Document

View Error

Calculate

Data Fill

Copy Formula (Table)

Row/Column Indicators button

4	Choose Close.

See Also

Cell Formula Entry

Feature Bars


Move Outline Levels

Tools, Outline

Purpose

You can rearrange the order of your outline by moving a single level or multiple levels.

Steps

To move a single level,

1	Place the insertion point in the level you want to move.

2	Click [image] to move the item up one level, or click [image] to move the item down one level.

or

Place the insertion point on a number icon that does not have a negative or positive sign, then drag the double-headed arrow to the new location.

To move multiple levels,

1	Place the insertion point on a number icon with a negative or positive sign.

2	Drag the double-headed arrow up or down to the new location.


Generate

Tools, Generate

Tools, List or Index or Cross-Reference or Table of Contents or Table of Authorities, Generate

Purpose

Use Generate to update tables of contents, tables of authorities, lists, cross-references, indexes, and hypertext links in your document.

Steps

1	Choose Generate from the Tools menu.

Generate will also update any generated items (such as cross-references) that exist in subdocuments.

2	Choose OK.

See Also

Generate Options


Generate Options

Tools, Generate, Options

Purpose

Use Generate Options to save generation time while using subdocuments or to build hypertext links.

Steps

To save generation time,

1	Choose Generate from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Options, then deselect Save Subdocuments.

WordPerfect will not generate and save subdocuments.

To generate and save hypertext links,

1	Choose Generate from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Options, then select Build Hypertext Links.

See Also

Generate

Hypertext Feature Bar

Master Document


QuickSelect

Purpose

Besides dragging the mouse to select text, you can also click to select a word, sentence, or paragraph. In tables, you can select a cell, row or column, or the entire table.

     	To select a word

Double-click the word.

     	To select a sentence

Triple-click anywhere on the sentence or click once in the margin.

     	To select a paragraph

Quadruple-click anywhere on the paragraph or double-click in the left margin.

Steps

To use QuickSelect in a table,

1	Move the cursor into the area of the table you want to select until the cursor changes to an arrow.

         	To select a cell

Click once.

         	To select a column

Double-click.

         	To select a row

Double-click.

         	To select a table

Triple-click.

See Also

Drag and Drop Text

Select


Getting Help (def)
Getting Help

If you'd like instructions on using WPWin, you have several options. We've included in-depth tutorials to acquaint you with the new features. In addition, online Help is just a click away and includes steps, alternatives, and other references. Or, you can enlist the aid of one of our Coaches for step-by-step instructions on our newest and most popular features. If you prefer, a Coach will perform the task for you. All these options make learning convenient because there is no manual to consult or phone call to make.

How to Use It


Go To

Edit, Go To

Purpose

Use Go To to quickly move the insertion point to a specific location on a specific page in your document. This feature is especially useful in large documents.

Steps

1	Choose Go To from the Edit menu.

2	Select one of the following options, then choose OK.

         	Position

Select the position where you want to move the insertion point or choose Reselect Last Selection to block the most recent occurrence of selected text in your document.

If you have selected text, you can choose Beginning of Selection or End of Selection to move the insertion point to the beginning or end of the selected text. If you selected either of these options and you want to restore the previous selection, choose Reselect Text.

         	Page Number

Specify a page number you want to go to.

         	Bookmark

Select a bookmark from the drop-down list.

         	Table

Select a table from the drop-down list.

         	Cell/Range

Specify a cell or range of cells in the table you choose.

See Also

About Tables

Bookmark

Columns


Create or Edit Graphic Line

Graphics, Custom Line, Horizontal or Vertical

Graphics, Edit Line, Horizontal or Vertical

Purpose

Use this feature to separate text or graphics in your document with horizontal or vertical graphics lines.

Steps

To create a graphics line,

1	Place the insertion point on the page where you want to add a graphics line.

2	Choose Custom Line from the Graphics menu, then select Horizontal or Vertical from the Line Type group box.

3	Choose from the list of line topics below:

Change Color

Change Thickness

Custom Line/Graphics Spacing

Line Style

Position/Length

To edit a graphics line,

1	Select a graphics line to edit.

2	Choose Edit Line from the Graphics menu.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics line, then select Edit Horizontal Line or Edit Vertical Line.

3	Choose from the list of line topics below:

Change Color

Change Thickness

Custom Line/Graphics Spacing

Line Style

Position/Length

See Also

Custom Box/Line Styles


Graphics Styles

Graphics, Graphics Styles

Purpose

Use Graphics Styles to format graphics elements such as graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fills.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu.

2	Select a style type from the Style Type group box.

3	Choose Create to create your own style.

or

Select a predefined style from the Styles list box, then choose Edit.

See Also

Edit Fill Style

Edit Graphics Menu


Graphics Style/Table Expert Settings

Graphics, Graphics Styles, Options, Setup

Table, Expert, Options, Setup

Purpose

Use Graphics Style Settings or Table Expert Settings to list graphics styles from the current document, the default template, or the additional objects template or to indicate where you want to save a graphics style or table style you are creating or editing.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu.

or

Choose Expert from the Table menu.

2	Choose Options, then choose Setup.

3	Select an option from the List Styles From group box, then choose OK.

See Also

New Document/Template

Styles

Table Expert Options


Header/Footer Feature Bar

Purpose

Use the Header/Footer feature bar to create and edit headers and footers in a document.

Steps

1	While in Page view, move the insertion point to a page where  you want to create or edit a header or footer.

2	Choose Header/Footer from the Format menu, select the header or footer you want, then choose Create or Edit.

You can also click the right mouse button inside the header or footer, then select feature bar.

3	Choose from the following Header/Footer feature bar options:

         	Number

Automatically add a page, section, chapter, or volume number.

         	Insert Line

Create and add a custom graphics line.

         	Pages

Specify the pages in your document where the header or footer will appear (odd pages, even pages, or every page).

         	Distance

Specify a distance between the document text and the header or footer.

         	Next

Move to the next Header A or B or the next Footer A or B in your document.

         	Previous

Move to the previous Header A or B or the previous Footer A or B in your document.

         	Close

Exit the header or footer, turn off the display of the Header/Footer feature bar, and return to your document text.

See Also

Feature Bars

Header/Footer


Distance Between Text and Header/Footer

Format, Header/Footer, Create or Edit, Distance

Purpose

Use this feature to adjust the distance between a header or footer and the document text.

Steps

1	While in Page view, move the insertion point to a page where the header or footer you want to create or edit is in effect.

2	Choose Header/Footer from the Format menu.

or

Click the right mouse button inside a header or footer.

3	Select the header or footer you want to create or edit, then choose Create or Edit.

4	Choose Distance from the Header/Footer feature bar.

5	Specify a measurement in the Distance Between Text and Header (or Footer) text box, then choose OK.

6	Choose Close from the Header/Footer feature bar to exit the header or footer and return to your document.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the header or footer) to deactivate the Header/Footer feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Header/Footer

Header/Footer Feature Bar

Pages (Header/Footer or Watermark)


Header/Footer

Format, Header/Footer

Format, Page, Delay Codes, OK, Header/Footer

Purpose

Use Header/Footer to print information, such as a chapter heading, a title, a date, a person's name, or a company name, at the top or bottom of each page or on alternating pages in your document.

Headers and footers do not display in Draft mode. To view the header and footer in the document window, choose Page or Two Page from the View menu.

Steps

1	While in Page view, place the insertion point anywhere in the first paragraph on the page on which you want the header or footer to appear.

2	Choose Header/Footer from the Format menu, then select the header or footer you want to create (A or B).

3	Choose Create, then type the header or footer text as you normally would using any of the available WordPerfect editing features.

4	Choose Pages from the Header/Footer feature bar, then select the page(s) where you want the header or footer to appear.

5	Choose Close from the Header/Footer feature bar to exit the header or footer and return to your document.

See Also

About Formatting

Distance Between Text and Header/Footer

Header/Footer Feature Bar

Pages (Header/Footer or Watermark)


Select (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Select

Purpose

Use this feature to move and size a graphics box.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	To move the graphics box, place the pointer anywhere inside the box, then drag it to a new location on the page.

4	To resize the graphics box, drag one of the sizing handles to enlarge or reduce the size of the graphics box.

See Also

Move (Image)

Reset All (Image)

Use a Graphics Program


Import Data or Create or Edit Data Link

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Import

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Create Link or Edit Link

Purpose

Use Import Data or Create or Edit Data Link to copy information from a spreadsheet file or a database file into a WordPerfect document.

To create a link with another Windows application, see DDE Links and OLE Links.

Steps

To import data or create a link,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to import the spreadsheet.

2	Choose Spreadsheet/Database from the Insert menu.

3	Choose Import to import the spreadsheet or database one time only.

or

Choose Create Link to create a link.

4	Select Spreadsheet or any of the database formats you want to use from the Data Type pop-up list.

5	Select Table, Text, or Merge Data File from the Import As or Link As pop-up list.

6	In the Filename text box, type the path and filename of the spreadsheet file you want to import or link, then choose OK.

If you want to import or link a specific part of the spreadsheet, you can indicate a range of cells in the Range text box. You can identify the range either by its cell address or by its name.

If you want to import or link specific fields of a database, you can indicate which field or fields you want to import by deselecting any of the fields you do not want to import.

7	If you are importing or linking an entire spreadsheet, choose OK until you return to the document window.

or

If you are importing or linking a specific range from a spreadsheet, press Enter, select the range from the Named Ranges list box or type the range in, then choose OK.

8	If you are importing or linking an entire database, choose OK until you return to the document window.

or

If you are importing or linking specific fields from a database, press Tab, deselect the fields you do not want to import or link, then choose OK.

If you are using DataPerfect, you will need to select the panel you want, then deselect any of the fields you do not want to use.

To edit a link,

1	Place the insertion point between the link icons.

2	Choose Spreadsheet/Database from the Insert menu, then choose Edit Link.

3	Make editing changes, then choose OK.

See Also

DDE Links

Link Options

OLE Links

Spreadsheet/Database


Zoom (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Zoom

Purpose

Use this feature to enlarge or reduce the image inside a graphics box or to display a specified area of the image.

Steps

To scale the entire image,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image], then select [image].

4	Drag the scroll box to scale the image.

To scale a specified area of an image,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image], then select [image].

4	Place the mouse pointer on the image so that it changes to a magnifying glass.

5	Drag the magnifying glass pointer to define a specific area of the image that you want to enlarge.

To specify the scale height and width for an image,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image], then select Scale Image.

4	Specify a scale width in the Scale X text box and scale height in the Scale Y text box. If you specify a scale height that is not equal to the scale width, the image will be distorted.

or

To specify the height and width at the same time, specify a value in the Both X & Y text box.

5	Choose OK.

To reset the image to the actual size,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image], then select [image].

See Also

Image Settings

Reset All (Image)

Use a Graphics Program


Convert Preferences

Edit, Preferences, Convert

Purpose

Use Convert Preferences to specify how graphics files, ASCII delimited text files, and WP 4.2, DCA, and DisplayWrite documents are imported into WordPerfect.

Steps

To specify delimiters and characters,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Convert icon.

2	Type the delimiters and characters you want to use in the text boxes.

You can also choose options from the pop-up lists on the right of the text boxes to use tabs, line feeds (soft returns), form feeds (hard page breaks), and carriage returns (hard returns).

         	Field

Separate one field from the next.

         	Record

Separate one record from the next.

         	Encapsulated

Enclose each field of data.

         	Strip

Identify unnecessary characters you want stripped from the data file when you convert it.

3	Choose OK.

To use Windows Metafile options,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Convert icon.

2	Select a format option under Windows Metafile Options, then choose OK.

         	.WMF

Retains the original format and attributes. The picture will display the same in WordPerfect as on the Clipboard or in another Windows application.

Use when you will not be transferring the document to WordPerfect for DOS (or another platform). Does not display in WordPerfect on other platforms.

         	.WPG

Converts the graphic to a .WPG file.

Use when you want to retrieve the document into WordPerfect for DOS (or another platform). Some details of the drawing may be lost.

         	Both

Creates one .WPG file that contains both .WMF and .WPG formats.

Use when you want to use the graphic or document in WordPerfect for DOS. Uses more disk space.

To specify other import settings,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Convert icon.

2	Choose an option from the Options drop-down list, make any changes, then choose OK, Save, or Close until you return to your document.

         	Code Pages

Change the code page.

         	Document

Specify settings for converting WordPerfect 4.2, DCA, and DisplayWrite documents when you import them.

         	WP 4.2 Fonts

Specify the fonts you used for WordPerfect 4.2 documents you want to import. You can use Edit to change the font assigned to each number (1-8).

         	DCA/DisplayWrite Fonts

Specify the fonts you used for DCA and DisplayWrite documents you want to import. You can use Edit to change the font assigned to each number (26, 27, and so on).

See Also

About Merge

Conversion Preferences Code Page

Conversion Preferences Fonts

Convert File Format

Convert Preferences

Spreadsheet/Database


Insert Columns/Rows Into Table

Table, Insert

Purpose

Use Insert Columns/Rows to insert the number of columns or rows that you specify.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point inside the table where you want to insert the columns or rows.

2	Choose Insert from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Insert.

3	Select Columns or Rows, then specify the number of columns or rows you want to insert.

4	Select Before or After to place the new column(s) or row(s) before or after the current insertion point position.

5	Choose OK.

New columns or rows will contain the same formatting as the column or row where the insertion point is located.

See Also

Join Cell/Table

Split Cell

Split Table


Insert Merge Codes

Tools, Merge, Merge Codes

Purpose

Use Insert Merge Codes to add merge codes to a merge data file or a merge form file.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then create or retrieve a merge data or merge form file.

2	Place the insertion point in the document where you want to insert the merge code.

3	Choose Merge Codes from the Merge feature bar.

4	Select a merge code, then choose Insert.

5	If prompted, enter parameters, then choose OK.

6	Reposition the insertion point in your document, select another merge code, enter parameters (if needed), then choose Insert.

7	Repeat step 6 as often as you need, then choose Close.

8	Finish creating the form or data file, then save or merge the file.

See Also

Create Data File

Create Form File

Insert Merge Code Parameters


Insert Object Into Document

Insert, Object

Purpose

Use Insert Object to perform OLE functions. With OLE, you can embed objects created in different Windows server applications into one document.

Steps

To embed an object from another application into WordPerfect,

1	Choose Object from the Insert menu.

2	Select the Object Type (server application) you want to use, then choose OK to open that application.

3	Create an object such as a document, image, or sound clip, or insert an existing file. See your server application documentation for more information.

4	Choose Exit & Return to Document from the File menu of the server application (this option may be worded differently in various server applications), then choose whether or not to update the object and insert it into your document.

or

Choose Update from the File menu if you do not want to shut down the server application.

or

If it's an OLE 2.0 application, click in the WordPerfect document window (outside the object window) to return to WordPerfect.

See Also

DDE Links

OLE Links

Paste Special


Change Outline Level

Tools, Outline, Options, Change Level

Purpose

Use Change Outline Level to change the level of the current outline item.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to change the level.

2	Choose Change Level from the Options drop-down list on the Outline feature bar.

3	Specify the number of the Outline Level you want, then choose OK.

If a numbers-only definition is selected, use a 0 for the outline level to insert a paragraph number based on the tab position.

See Also

Create an Outline

Define Outline

Edit Outline Definition


Insert or Edit Sound Clip

Insert, Sound, Insert or Edit Desc

Purpose

Use Insert or Edit Sound Clip to insert a sound clip into your document or to edit the description of a sound clip.

Steps

To insert a sound clip,

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu, then choose Insert.

2	If you want, type a name or brief description of the sound file in the Name text box.

3	Type the filename of the sound file you want to add to your document.

or

Click the list button, then select a file.

4	Select a storage location for the sound file.

When you choose Link to File on Disk, the sound file is not stored as part of the document, which does not increase the document size.

When you choose Store in Document, the sound file is stored as part of the document, which increases the document size.

5	Choose OK.

To edit a sound clip description,

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu.

2	Select the sound clip you want, then choose Edit Desc.

3	Edit the description in the Name text box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Sound Clips

Sound Transcribe Feature Bar


Keep Text Together

Format, Page, Keep Text Together

Purpose

Use Widow/Orphan, Block Protect, and Conditional End of Page to keep text together on one page.

Steps

To use Widow/Orphan,

1	Place the insertion point where you want widow/orphan protection to begin.

2	Choose Page from the Format menu, choose Keep Text Together, then choose the Widow/Orphan option.

3	Choose OK.

Widow/orphan protection will be effective until the end of the document.

To use Block Protect,

1	Select the text you want to protect.

2	Choose Page from the Format menu, choose Keep Text Together, then select the Block Protect option.

3	Choose OK.

To use Conditional End of Page,

1	Move the insertion point to the beginning of the text you want to keep together.

2	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Keep Text Together.

3	Choose the Conditional End of Page option, then specify the number of lines you want to keep together.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Force Page


Label File

Format, Labels, Change

Purpose

Use Change to select or delete label files.

A label file containing preset label definitions comes with WordPerfect.

Steps

1	Choose Labels from the Format menu, then choose Change from the Select Label File group box.

2	Highlight the label file you want, then choose Select.

or

Highlight a label file, choose Delete, choose Yes, then choose Cancel.

See Also

Create or Edit Label File

Create or Edit Labels

Labels


Labels

Format, Labels

Purpose

Use Labels to create mailing labels, file folder labels, and diskette labels. You can type the labels individually or use merge to create labels from a list of addresses or data.

When you create labels, WordPerfect creates several logical pages on one physical page. Format settings placed at the top of the physical page affect each subsequent label. If you want to print several logical pages on one physical page without creating labels, see Subdivide Page.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point on the page where you want labels to begin.

2	Choose Labels from the Format menu.

3	Select the type of labels you want to display: Laser, Tractor-Fed, or Both.

4	In the Labels list, highlight the label definition you want, then choose Select.

5	Use the following keystrokes when typing labels:

         	Ctrl+Enter

Ends the text you are typing on the current label, then moves to the next label.

         	Enter

Ends a line of text within a label.

         	Alt+PgDn or Alt+PgUp

Moves to the next or previous label.

         	Ctrl+g

Moves to a specific label number.

See Also

About Merge

Create or Edit Label File

Create or Edit Labels

Label File

Print Individual Labels

Subdivide Page

View Modes


Language

Tools, Language

Purpose

Use the Language feature when you want to use the formatting conventions of another language with features such as Date, Sort, Footnote, and Tables (no language module is needed).

If you purchase an additional language module, you can also use the Language feature with Spell Checker, Thesaurus, Grammatik, and Hyphenation. If you purchase a WordPerfect package in another language, you can change languages for dialog boxes, menus, file lists, and prompts.

The Language feature also determines the language conventions used for QuickCorrect.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to specify the formatting conventions for another language.

or

Select the text you want to specify conventions for.

2	Choose Language from the Tools menu.

3	Select a language or begin typing the name of the language to search for it.

or

To select a language you may have that is not on the list, type the two-letter language code in the Language text box.

4	If you want to disable the Spell Checker or Grammatik for this section of the document, select Disable Writing Tools.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Document Character Map

QuickCorrect


Find and Replace Text Options

Edit, Find and Replace, Options

Purpose

Use the Options menu in the Find and Replace dialog box to specify how you want WordPerfect to search your document.

Steps

1	Choose Find and Replace from the Edit menu, then choose Options.

2	Choose from the following options:

         	Begin Find at Top of Document

Begin searching for a word, phrase, or code at the beginning of a document.

         	Wrap at Beg./End of Document

Search forward from the insertion point to the end of the document, then search from the beginning of the document to the insertion point; or search backward to the top of the document, then continue from the end of the document to the insertion point.

         	Limit Find Within Selection

Search from the beginning to the end of selected text.

         	Include Headers, Footers, etc. in Find

Search for words, phrases, or codes in the document in Find window and all other substructures.

         	Limit Number of Changes

Limit the number of matches that will be found when you use replace.

See Also

Find and Replace Text


Line Height

Format, Line, Height

Purpose

Use Line Height to adjust the line height in your document regardless of the font.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the new line height setting to begin.

or

Select the text you want to change.

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Height.

3	Choose Fixed, then specify a new line height measurement.

or

Choose Auto to set the line height automatically according to the font being used.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

About Formatting

Line Height (Leading) Adjustment


Hyphenation

Format, Line, Hyphenation

Purpose

Use Hyphenation to divide words that extend beyond the right margin, instead of wrapping them to the next line.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the paragraph where you want to begin hyphenation.

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Hyphenation.

3	Select Hyphenation On.

4	If you want to change the width of the hyphenation zone, specify new percentages in the Percent Left and Percent Right text boxes.

Increase the percentages to hyphenate fewer words in your document; decrease the percentages to hyphenate more words.

5	Choose OK.

If Hyphenation was turned on before you changed the hyphenation zone, WordPerfect may prompt you to re-hyphenate some words in the current document.

See Also

Hyphenation (File Preferences)

Position Hyphen


Line Numbering

Format, Line, Numbering

Purpose

Use Line Numbering to number the lines in a document and print each line number at a specified position on the page.

Steps

To number lines in a document,

1	Place the insertion point where you want line numbering to begin.

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Numbering.

3	Select Turn Line Numbering On.

4	Select and change any of the following options:

         	Numbering Method

Specify whether line numbers will print as numbers, letters, or Roman numerals.

         	Starting Line Number

Specify the number that is assigned to the first line.

         	First Printing Line Number

Specify the first line number to print.

         	Numbering Interval

Specify the interval between printed line numbers.

         	From Left Edge of Page

Specify the distance from the left edge of the page (or from the center of the space between columns) to the line number.

         	Left of Margin

Specify the distance from the left margin to the line number.

         	Restart Numbering on Each Page

Specify whether line numbers will begin again with the starting line number at the top of each page.

         	Count Blank Lines

Specify whether blank lines are counted.

5	Choose OK.

To number lines in newspaper columns,

1	Place the insertion point in the column where you want line numbering to begin.

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Numbering.

3	Select Turn Line Numbering On.

4	Select Number all Newspaper Columns.

5	Make sure Left of Margin is selected, then specify the distance between the line numbers and the left edge of the text in each column.

Specify a distance less than the space between the columns or the line numbers may overlap the text in the columns.

6	Select and change any other options as needed (see preceding list).

7	Choose OK.

See Also

About Formatting

Binding/Duplex Options

Counter Numbering

Page Numbering


Line Separator

Insert, Footnote, Options, Separator

Purpose

Use Line Separator to change the two-inch long separator line that WordPerfect prints to separate text from footnotes.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point on the page where you want your changes to take effect.

2	Choose Footnote from the Insert menu, then choose Options.

3	Choose Separator.

4	Choose from any of the following options:

         	Space Above Line

Specify the amount of space between the line and the text above it.

         	Space Below Line

Specify the amount of space between the line and the footnote text below it.

         	Line Position

Place the line at the left or right margin, between margins, centered between margins, or at a position you specify.

         	Length of Line

Specify the length of the footnote separator line.

         	Line Style

Specify the line style you want.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Footnote Options

Footnote or Endnote Number

Position of Footnotes


Line Spacing (Text)

Format, Line, Spacing

Purpose

Use Line Spacing to change the amount of space between lines of text in your document.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph where you want the spacing change to begin.

or

Select any amount of text in the paragraphs you want to change.

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Spacing.

3	Specify the setting you want in the Spacing text box.

In single-spaced text, the distance from baseline to baseline is one line height. When you specify a new number in the Line Spacing dialog box, the current line height is multiplied by that number.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

About Formatting

Line Height

Typesetting


Line Style

Graphics, Edit Box, Border/Fill, Customize Style, Line Style

Purpose

Use Line Style to change the left, right, top, or bottom border lines of a graphics box or a border surrounding document text.

You can also use Line Style to change a horizontal or vertical graphics line in a document.

Steps

To change the line style of a graphics box border,

1	Select a graphics box with the border line you want to change.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Select a line style for the left, right, top, or bottom lines from either the Line Style pop-up palette or the Line Style drop-down list.

5	Choose OK twice.

6	Choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

To change the line style of a paragraph, page, or column border,

1	Place the pointer anywhere inside a paragraph, page, or column border, then click once.

2	Choose Paragraph, Page, or Columns from the Format menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Select a line style for the left, right, top, or bottom lines from either the Line Style pop-up palette or the Line Style drop-down list.

5	Choose OK twice.

To change the line style of a graphics line,

1	Select a graphics line to edit.

2	Choose Edit Line from the Graphics menu.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics line, then choose Edit Horizontal Line or Edit Vertical Line.

3	Select a line style for the graphics line from either the Line Style pop-up palette or the Line Style drop-down list.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Change Color (Borders)

Corners (Customize Border)

Create or Edit Graphic Line

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)

Space (Customize Border)


Custom Box/Line Styles

Graphics, Custom Line, Line Styles

Graphics, Custom Box, Styles

Purpose

Use this feature to create or edit a custom box or line style.

Steps

To create a custom box style,

1	Choose Custom Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Styles.

2	Highlight a predefined box style, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, then type a name for the box style in the Style Name text box.

3	Select the options you want to use for that graphics box style.

4	Choose OK.

To create a custom line style,

1	Place the insertion point on the page where you want to add a graphics line.

2	Choose Custom Line from the Graphics menu, then choose Line Styles.

3	Highlight a predefined line style, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, then type a name for the new line style in the Style Name text box.

4	Select a line component to edit by clicking the appropriate arrow button below the preview box.

You can also choose Add or Del below the preview box to add or delete line components.

5	Choose the line options you want from the Line Options group box.

6	Choose OK.

7	Highlight the line style, then choose Select.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Custom Line Edit


Link Options

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Options

Purpose

Use Link Options if you want to have WordPerfect automatically update all spreadsheet and database links in the current document each time you open the document. You can also choose to display or hide link icons.

Steps

To use update on retrieve,

1	Choose Spreadsheet/Database from the Insert menu, choose Options, then choose Update on Retrieve.

2	Choose OK.

To display or hide link icons,

1	Choose Spreadsheet/Database from the Insert menu, then choose Options.

2	Select (or deselect) Show Link Icons, then choose OK.

See Also

Update


OLE Links

Edit, Links

Purpose

Use Links to cancel, update, or change a link that has been created using OLE.

Steps

To update a link,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu, then select the object you want to change from the Links list box.

2	Select Automatic to have the links updated automatically.

or

Select Manual if you want to update the links manually.

3	Choose Close.

To break a link,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

2	Select the link you want to break from the Links list box, then choose Break Link.

3	Choose Close.

To change an OLE link,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu, select the object you want to change from the Links list box, then choose Change Source.

2	Select the filename you want to link to, then choose OK.

3	Choose Close.

See Also

DDE Links

Paste Special


Help Prompts

Help prompts (sometimes called long prompts) display at the top of the screen.  They provide short explanations of the menu item or option you have selected.  To find out how to edit the text of the help prompts, click Edit Menu Text or Toolbar Customize. To find out how to turn off the display of help prompts, click Menu (Environment Preferences).

See Also

QuickTips


Invert (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Invert

Purpose

Use this feature to change the colors in an image to their complementary colors.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image] to invert the colors in the image.

or

Click [image], select Color Attributes, select Invert Colors, then choose OK.

See Also

Image Settings

Mirror (Image)

Move (Image)

Reset All (Image)

Rotate (Image)

Use a Graphics Program


Macro Feature Bar

Tools, Macro, Macro Bar

Tools, Template Macro, Template Macro Bar

Purpose

Use the options on the Macro feature bar to create, edit, play, save, and compile macros and to insert macro commands.

Use the options on the Template Macro feature bar to create, edit, play, save, and compile macros associated with a template and to insert macro commands.

Use the following buttons on the Macro feature bar:

Choose a different feature bar, select any of the options on the Macro feature bar, or get Help for the Macro feature bar.

Stop a macro you are playing or recording.

Record a macro to the current document (you will not be prompted to specify a filename to save the macro).

Play the currently displayed macro (this button is dimmed until the currently displayed macro is saved and compiled).

Pause a macro you are recording or playing.

     	Dialog Editor

Display the Macro Dialogs dialog box for creating custom dialog boxes (this button is dimmed until the currently displayed macro is saved and compiled).

     	Commands

Display the WordPerfect Macro Command Inserter to insert programming commands and system variables.

     	Save & Compile

Save and compile the currently displayed macro. Error messages display if the macro cannot be compiled.

     	Codes

Display the Codes dialog box to insert codes.

     	Options

Save the currently displayed macro as a macro or a template macro, close the macro, or remove the Macro feature bar.

For more information on macros, choose Macros from Help Contents or click Macros Help to open the Macros manual.

See Also

About Macros

Codes (Macros and Find)

Record/Play/Edit a Macro

Record/Play/Edit a Template Macro


Presentations from WordPerfect
Presentations

Purpose

If you have installed Presentations, you can access Presentations from inside WordPerfect to create or edit figures, graphs, or charts for your WordPerfect document.

Steps

1	Choose Draw from the Graphics menu.

or

Choose Chart from the Graphics menu.

2	If you want help on a Presentations feature, choose Contents from the Presentations Help menu.

or

Choose Presentations to open the Presentations Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy the WPPRUS.HLP file from Presentations to your WordPerfect directory (for example, c:\office\wpwin).


Manual Kerning

Format, Typesetting, Manual Kerning

Purpose

Use Manual Kerning to adjust the spacing between any two characters. Manual kerning affects only the characters on either side of the insertion point.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point between the two characters you want to kern.

2	Choose Typesetting from the Format menu, then choose Manual Kerning.

3	To specify the units of measure, choose the appropriate unit from the pop-up list.

4	Specify an Amount to add to or subtract from the current space between the characters.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Advance

Automatic Kerning


Margins

Format, Margins

Purpose

Use Margins to change document margins for a page or more. (Use Paragraph Format when you want to change margins for a few paragraphs only.)

To change margins for all new documents, see Styles Editor.

You can also adjust where information prints on the page by changing the text adjustment in your paper definition. See Create or Edit Paper Size.

Steps

To change margins from the Format menu,

1	Place the insertion point in the paragraph or page where you want margin changes to take place.

or

Select the text you want to change margins for.

2	Choose Margins from the Format menu.

3	Specify new settings for Left, Right, Top, or Bottom margins.

4	Choose OK.

To change margins from the Ruler Bar,

1	Place the insertion point in the paragraph or page where you want to change left or right margins.

2	Choose Ruler Bar from the View menu.

3	Drag a margin marker to a new position. (Margin markers are the outside markers at each end of the white space.)

See Also

About Formatting

Document (Format)

Page (Format)

Paragraph (Format)

Ruler Bar


Cross-Reference Feature Bar

Tools, Cross-Reference

Purpose

Use the Cross-Reference feature bar to mark cross-references in your document.

Steps

1	Choose Cross-Reference from the Tools menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

         	Reference

Choose a reference type.

         	Target

Specify a target name.

         	Mark Reference

Mark a reference.

         	Mark Target

Mark a target.

         	Close

Close the feature bar.

         	Generate

Generate the cross-references and other generated items.

See Also

Counters

Feature Bars

Generate


Index Feature Bar

Tools, Index

Purpose

Use the Index feature bar to mark text for an index.

Steps

1	Choose Index from the Tools menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

         	Heading

Specify an index heading.

         	Subheading

Specify an index subheading.

         	Mark

Mark text for an index entry.

         	Define

Define the index.

         	Close

Close the feature bar.

         	Generate

Generate the index and other generated items.

See Also

Define Index

Feature Bars

Generate


List Feature Bar

Tools, List

Purpose

Use the List feature bar to mark text for lists.

Steps

1	Choose List from the Tools menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

         	List

Specify a list name.

         	Mark

Mark text for the list.

         	Define

Define the list.

         	Close

Close the feature bar.

         	Generate

Generate the list and other generated items.

See Also

Define List or Table of Authorities

Feature Bars

Generate


Table of Authorities Feature Bar

Tools, Table of Authorities

Purpose

Use the Table of Authorities feature bar to mark text for a table of authorities.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Authorities from the Tools menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

         	Short Form

Specify a short form name.

         	Mark

Mark text for the citation.

         	Create Full Form

Create the full form of an authority.

         	Edit Full Form

Edit the full form of an authority.

         	Define

Define table of authorities sections.

         	Close

Close the feature bar.

         	Generate

Generate the table of authorities and other generated items.

See Also

Create Full Form

Create or Edit Table of Authorities

Define List or Table of Authorities

Edit Full Form

Feature Bars

Generate


Create (Table of Authorities) Full Form

Tools, Table of Authorities, Create Full Form

Purpose

Use this feature to associate a section name and a short form name with the full form of an authority.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Authorities from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Create Full Form from the Table of Authorities feature bar.

3	Type the name of the section where you want to include the authority in the Section Name text box, or select the appropriate section from the drop-down list.

4	If you want, edit the text in the Short Form text box.

Specify a unique short form name for every full form since the short form name is used to identify other occurrences of the same authority.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Edit Full Form

Table of Authorities Full Form Feature Bar


Table of Contents Feature Bar

Tools, Table of Contents

Purpose

Use the Table of Contents feature bar to mark text for a table of contents.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Contents from the Tools menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

         	Mark X

Mark text for a table of contents entry (where X is the level).

         	Define

Define the table of contents.

         	Close

Close the feature bar.

         	Generate

Generate the table of contents and other generated items.

See Also

Define Table of Contents

Feature Bars

Generate


About Merge

Tools, Merge

Purpose

Use Merge to mass-produce letters, envelopes, mailing labels, contracts, phone lists, memos, or other documents. To create a merge, you create two kinds of files (a data text or table file, and a form file), and then merge them. The merge reproduces copies of the form file with each copy containing specific information from each record in the data file.

For example, to write the same letter to a number of people without typing the original letter more than once, you can create a form file (letter) and a data file (names and addresses of the people you want to send the letters to). You can then merge the two files to create a third file containing all the merged letters. The text of the letter is the same on each copy, but the names and addresses are different.

The result of the merge will be a third document, or you can send the result directly to the printer.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu.

2	Choose from the following Merge options:

         	Data

Create a data text or data table file.

         	Form

Create a form file.

         	Merge

Combine a data file and form file to create many copies of the same document, but with different data; or merge a form file with keyboard input.

See Also

Create Data File

Create Form File

Perform Merge


Add or Delete Field (Merge table)

Tools, Merge, Data (table), Column, Insert or Delete

Purpose

Use this feature to add or delete fields after you have created a merge data table.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, choose Place Records in a Table, then choose Data.

2	If you have text in the active window, choose OK to use the current window for the data file.

or

Select New Document Window, then choose OK.

3	Finish creating the data table.

4	Place the insertion point in the column where you want to add or delete a field.

5	Choose Column from the Merge Data File feature bar.

6	Choose Delete to delete the column at the insertion point, then choose OK.

or

Choose Insert, then type a field name. Select Before Current Field, After Current Field, or After Last Field, then choose OK.

7	Type the appropriate field entries in the new column, then save or merge the file.

See Also

Create Data File

Go to Data

Merge Data File Feature Bar

Quick Data Entry


Add or Delete Record (Merge table)

Tools, Merge, Data (table), Row, Insert or Delete

Purpose

Use this feature to add or delete records after you have created a merge data table.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, choose Place Records in a Table, then choose Data.

2	If you have text in the active window, choose OK to use the current window for the data file.

or

Select New Document Window, then choose OK.

3	Finish creating the data table.

4	Place the insertion point in the row where you want to add or delete a record.

5	Choose Row from the Merge Data Table feature bar.

6	Choose Delete to delete the row at the insertion point, then choose OK.

or

Choose Insert, select Add Row Above Current Row, Add Row Below Current Row, or Add Row to End of Table, then choose OK.

7	Type the appropriate field entries in the new record row, then save or merge the file.

See Also

Create Data File

Go to Data

Merge Data File Feature Bar

Quick Data Entry


Associate (Merge)

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK, Close, Go to Form, Associate

Tools, Merge, Form, OK, None, OK, Go to Data, Associate

Tools, Merge, Form, OK, None, OK, Insert Field, Data File, Specify a data file, OK, Close

Purpose

Use Associate in Merge to link a data file to a form file.

You can associate a data file as you create a form file, or you can create or change the association later. To create the association as you create the form file, see Create Form File.

Steps

To associate files from an existing form file,

1	From a merge file, choose Go to Form or Go to Data from the Merge feature bar.

2	Choose Select, specify the data or form file you want to associate with the current file, then choose OK.

or

If you chose Go to Data, choose Create, type a filename, select Records Stored in a Table (if you want), then choose OK.

or

If you chose Go to Form, choose Create, then insert fields and merge codes from the Merge Form File feature bar.

To change an association,

1	From a form file, choose Insert Field, then choose Data File.

2	Specify a data file.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Create Form File

Go to Data

Go to Form


Merge Form File Feature Bar

Tools, Merge, Form, None, OK

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK, Close, Go to Form

Purpose

When creating a form file, choose from the following options on the Merge Form File feature bar:

     	Insert Field

Insert field names from a data file.

     	Date

Insert a Date code so dates are inserted into merged documents.

     	Merge Codes

Insert merge codes.

     	Keyboard

Insert a Keyboard merge code, then create a prompt.

     	Merge

Perform the merge.

     	Go to Data

Open or create an associated data file.

     	Options

Choose to display or hide codes, display codes as markers, or remove the Merge feature bar.

See Also

Create Form File

Date

Go to Data

Insert Merge Codes

Merge Feature Bar Options

Merge Keyboard Feature Bar

Perform Merge


Merge Keyboard Feature Bar

Purpose

You can create a keyboard merge by creating a form or data file containing the KEYBOARD merge command. This command pauses the merge and lets you enter information from the keyboard.

Use the Merge Keyboard feature bar to direct a keyboard merge.

Steps

1	Create a form or data file containing the KEYBOARD merge command.

2	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Merge.

3	Specify file locations for the merge, then choose OK.

4	When the merge pauses at the KEYBOARD command, choose from the following keyboard merge options:

         	Continue

Type your response, then continue the merge.

         	Skip Record

Skip the next record and remain on the current record.

         	Quit

Quit the merge after the remaining text, but ignore all merge commands.

         	Stop

Stop the merge at the current position.

See Also

About Merge

Create Data File

Create Form File

Perform Merge


Merge Data File Feature Bar

Purpose

When creating a data file, choose from the following options on the Merge Data File feature bar:

     	Row (table only)

Insert or delete a row (record).

     	Column (table only)

Insert or delete a column (field).

     	End Field (text only)

Insert an ENDFIELD code.

     	End Record (text only)

Insert an ENDRECORD code.

     	Merge Codes

Insert merge codes.

     	Quick Entry

Edit data records.

     	Merge

Perform the merge.

     	Go to Form

Open or create associated form file.

     	Options

Choose to display or hide codes, display codes as markers, remove the Merge feature bar, or sort records.

See Also

About Merge

Add or Delete Field (Merge table)

Add or Delete Record (Merge table)

Create Data File

Go to Form

Insert Merge Codes

Merge Feature Bar Options

Quick Data Entry


Multiple Pages

File, Print, Multiple Pages

Purpose

Use Multiple Pages to print specific pages, secondary pages, chapters, or volumes. When printing labels and subdivided pages, you can print individual labels or subdivided pages (WordPerfect counts individual labels and subdivided pages rather than the physical page).

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Multiple Pages, then choose Print.

3	Specify the pages, secondary pages, chapters, and volumes to print.

You can specify the range of pages you want to print in the Pages text box as follows:

Type	To Print
3	Page 3
3,5,8	Pages 3, 5, and 8
3 8	Pages 3 and 8
3-	Page 3 through the end of the document
-3	The beginning of the document through page 3
3-8	Pages 3 through 8
1-3 8	Pages 1 through 3 and page 8
3,5,9-15	Pages 3, 5, and 9 through 15
You can also specify which secondary pages, chapters, and volumes to print using ranges as shown in the table above.

4	Choose Print.

See Also

Document on Disk

Page Numbering

Print Individual Labels

Printer Setup

Select Printer


Table Names in Current Document

Table, Names

Purpose

Use Table Names in Current Document to name tables, floating cells, cells, ranges, columns, and rows and to edit, delete, go to, and insert names.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Names from the Table menu.

You can also click Names from the Table Formula feature bar.

3	To create or edit a name, choose Create or Edit.

4	To delete a name, highlight the name of the table component whose name you want to delete, then choose Delete.

5	To go to a name, highlight the name of the table, floating cell, or table component you want to go to, then choose Go To.

6	To insert a name into the Formula Edit text box (available only when you choose Names from the Formula bar), highlight a name, then choose Insert.

7	Choose Close.

See Also

Create a Formula

Create Name (Table)

Edit Name/Reference

Table Formula Feature Bar


New Document/Template

File, New

Purpose

Use New to open a new document window. You can open a new blank document window or one of the many preformatted templates.

A template determines the formatting and program options of the new document. WordPerfect 6.1 includes more than 75 preformatted templates, including memos, calendars, and term papers. Simply select the one you want and type in the text.

You can also create your own templates and edit existing ones.

Steps

To open a new blank screen,

1	Choose New from the File menu, then choose Select.

or

Click the New Blank Document button on the Toolbar.

or

Press Control-n.

To select another template,

1	Choose New from the File menu.

2	Select a template Group, highlight a template, then choose Select.

or

Highlight a template, then choose View before you choose Select.

3	Enter information as prompted.

or

Type information directly onto the template.

Many templates prompt you for personal information and addresses. If you enter information in Personal Information or the Address Book, you can use this information in any template.

See Also

About Templates

Create or Edit Templates

Opening Files

Templates (File Preferences)

Template Groups


Numbering Value (Pages)

Format, Page, Numbering, Value

Purpose

Use Numbering Value to change page numbers, secondary numbers, chapter numbers, and volume numbers.

Steps

To set a new number,

1	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Numbering.

2	Choose Value.

3	Specify a New Page Number, New Secondary Number, New Chapter Number, or New Volume Number.

4	Choose OK.

To increase or decrease a number,

1	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Numbering.

2	Choose Value.

3	Specify the interval by which to increase or decrease the page number, secondary number, chapter number, or volume number.

The values shown in the Increase/Decrease text boxes are intervals, not numbers. If, for example, an existing chapter number with a value of 5 is increased by an interval of 2, then the chapter number would become 7.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Page Numbering

Page Numbering Options


Number Type (Table)

Table, Number Type

Purpose

Use Number Type to specify how numbers are used (as values or text), displayed, and printed in your table.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell, column, table, or floating cell in which you want to change the number type.

2	Choose Number Type from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Number Type.

3	Choose Cell, Column, or Table.

4	If you want to apply the number type you have already defined for the current column to the current cell, be sure Use Column Type is selected.

5	Choose from the following options:

         	Accounting

Display numbers using the same format as the Currency option, but align the currency symbol with the edge of the column.

         	Commas

Display numbers using the same format as the Fixed option, but use commas for thousands separators and display negative numbers within parentheses.

         	Currency

Display numbers with as many as 15 decimal places, the currency symbol, thousands separator, and decimal align character.

         	Date/Time

Convert numbers into the current date and time format.

         	Fixed

Display numbers with as many as 15 decimals.

         	General

Display numbers without a thousands separator and no trailing zeros to the right of the decimal point.

         	Integer

Display numbers as counting numbers. Numbers are rounded to eliminate decimals.

         	Percent

Display numbers as percent values (multiplied by 100) with the percent symbol and the number of decimal places you set.

         	Scientific

Display numbers in scientific (exponential) notation.

         	Text

Treat the contents of a cell as text, which cannot be used for calculations.

6	If you want to specify that this number type be used for all new tables you create, choose Initial Type, then choose Yes.

See Also

Customize Number Type (Table)

Customize Date Type (Table)


Black and White Threshold (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, B & W Threshold

Purpose

Use this feature to convert a color image to black and white and to select a black and white threshold.

Any grays that are darker than the threshold value are converted to black; any grays that are lighter than the threshold are converted to white.

Steps

To select the threshold for a black and white image,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image], select a Threshold shade, then select Black and White.

To specify a black and white threshold value,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image], then select B & W Attributes.

4	Make sure Black and White is selected, then specify a value in the Threshold text box.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Fill Attributes (Image)

Image Settings

Reset All (Image)

Use a Graphics Program


Open Color Palette

Format, Font, Palette, Open

Purpose

Use Open to access a previously created color palette.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Palette.

2	Choose Open.

3	Highlight the name of the color palette you want in the Palette list.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Model

Color Wheel

Copy or Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Rainbow Colors


Other Codes

Format, Line, Other Codes

Purpose

Use Other Codes when you want to insert hard tabs, hyphenation codes, and hard spaces or to end centering/alignment.

Steps

1	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Other Codes.

2	Choose from the following options:

         	Hard Tab Codes

Insert a tab for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.

         	Hard Tab Codes with Dot Leaders

Insert a tab with dot leaders for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.

         	Hyphenation Codes

Insert hyphens, insert soft hyphens to ensure where a word is divided, or cancel hyphenation when you want to ensure that a word is not hyphenated.

         	Hard Space

Keep dates and names together on one line.

         	End Centering/Alignment

Discontinue centering from the insertion point position to the end of the line.

         	Thousands Separator

Change the character that displays in numbers over 1,000.

3	Choose Insert.

See Also

Hyphenation

Tab Set


Define Outline

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline

Purpose

Use this feature to create, edit, copy, delete, reset, retrieve, or save outline definitions.

Steps

1	Choose Outline from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define Outline from the Options drop-down list on the Outline feature bar.

3	If you want to edit a definition from the supplemental template, choose Setup from the Options drop-down list, select Supplemental, then choose OK.

You must specify your supplemental template in File Preferences before you can access it.

4	If you want to edit, copy, delete, or reset an outline definition, select that definition.

5	If you want to start another outline using the same definition, select Start New Outline.

See Also

Change Outline Level

Create an Outline

Edit Outline Definition

End Outline

File Preferences

New Document/Template

Styles


Create an Outline

Tools, Outline

Purpose

Use Outline to organize text using numbers, bullets, or headings.

Steps

1	Choose Outline from the Tools menu.

2	Type the text for the first outline level.

3	To insert another first-level item, press Enter, then type text.

To change the level of the current item, press Tab to move down one level or press Shift+Tab to move up one level. You can also use the first two arrow buttons on the Outline feature bar.

To type several indented paragraphs within one level (or body text), press Shift+Enter at the end of a paragraph, then indent or tab until the insertion point is aligned with the previous paragraph.

To insert body (non-outline) text within an outline, insert a hard return where you want the text to begin, then choose [image]. Type the body text you want, then choose [image] again to return to your outline.

4	Add and edit items as needed, referring to the list below for various options you can choose.

If you need to select an outline item, family, or body (non-outline) text paragraph, click the number symbol at the beginning of the item, family, or paragraph. Then, to insert another first level item, press Enter. To insert a second level, press Enter, then press Tab. To insert a previous level, press Enter, then press Shift+Tab.

         	,

Change the level of the current outline item, selected items, or selected family (you can also choose Change Level from the Options list).

         	,

Move the current outline item, selected items, or selected family up or down one level.

Insert body text, or change selected items to body (non-outline) text or selected body text to an outline item.

         	,

Show and hide subordinate levels in the current outline family.

         	Show Outline Levels

Specify the levels you want to show as you edit the outline. The None option hides all outline text.

         	Show/Hide Body Text

Show or hide non-outline text.

         	Options

Create or edit an outline definition, change paragraph levels, and set paragraph numbers.

         	Outline Definition drop-down list

Select an outline definition.

         	Close

Close the Outline feature bar.

The [image] and [image] buttons and the Show Outline Levels are useful for temporarily expanding and collapsing an outline so you can edit or print only main outline items.

5	When you are finished with your outline, choose End Outline from the Options drop-down list, then choose Close.

See Also

Outline Options

Styles


Overstrike

Format, Typesetting, Overstrike

Purpose

Use Overstrike to create new characters from your keyboard by combining existing characters.

You can create mathematical symbols, language symbols, and other character combinations not included in the WordPerfect character sets.

Steps

To create an overstrike character,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the overstrike character.

2	Choose Typesetting from the Format menu, then choose Overstrike.

3	To include a text attribute, click and hold the button next to the text box, then select the attribute you want.

4	Type the characters that you want printed as an overstrike, without spaces (the order is not important).

5	Choose OK.

To edit an overstrike character,

1	Choose Typesetting from the Format menu, then choose Overstrike.

or

If you are using Reveal Codes, you can also double-click on an overstrike code to open the Overstrike dialog box.

2	If necessary, choose Previous or Next until the overstrike character you want to edit is displayed.

3	Add or delete any text appearance attributes or characters in the text box, then choose OK or Close.

See Also

WordPerfect Characters


Startup Options

Purpose

Startup options are commands you can use when you start WordPerfect. Often these options are for your convenience, but sometimes they are necessary to run WordPerfect on your particular hardware.

Steps

1	While in Windows Program Manager, choose Run from the File menu.

2	Type wpwin followed by a space, then type the startup option you want. For example, if you were using the /nb option you would type wpwin /nb.

3	Choose OK.

If you want to use the same startup option each time you start WordPerfect, include the startup option on the command line in the Program Item Properties for the WPWin icon. You can also use the DOS SET command to have options automatically included when you start WordPerfect.

Choose from the following startup options:

         	:

Starts WordPerfect for Windows without displaying the startup screen.

         	/csla

Makes the login alias case sensitive.

         	/d-path

Redirects the overflow files and temporary buffer files to the specified directory (for example, /d-C:\TEMP).

         	filename

Opens the specified file from the documents directory that is specified in Preferences (for example, ROBIN.LTR).

         	filename /bk-bookmark name

Opens the specified file and moves to the specified bookmark (for example, ROBIN.LTR /bk-OPENING).

         	/fl

Tells WordPerfect to send text directly to the screen.

         	/l-language code

Tells WordPerfect which entry in the Language Resource File (WP.LRS) and which language .DLL to use (for example, /l-DK).

         	/la-login alias

Overrides the user name returned by Windows (for example, /la-jayd).

         	/li

This switch is no longer valid.  The default startup now displays the screen in logical inches rather than in real inches.

         	/m-macroname

Starts the specified macro when WordPerfect starts (for example, /m-C:\OFFICE\WPWIN\MACROS\HEADING1.WCM).

         	/mt-macroname

Starts the specified macro from the default template when WordPerfect starts (for example, /mt-HEADING2.WCM).

         	/nb

Prevents the use of backup when saving a document.

         	/ni-path

Tells WordPerfect the path to the public binary information file (WPCNET.BIF) (for example, /ni-Y:\NEW).

         	/nt

Tells WordPerfect to be network aware.

         	/pi-path

Tells WordPerfect the path to the personal binary information file (for example, /pi-C:\NEW).

         	/pn-filename

Tells WordPerfect the name of the personal binary information file you want to use (for example, /pn-BETHBAU.BIF).

         	/recover

Rebuilds table information in the prefix of the document upon retrieval.

         	/sa

Instructs WordPerfect to run in stand-alone mode, even if in a network environment.

         	/sn

Tells WordPerfect to use the default personal binary information file (WPCSET.BIF).

         	/sp

Tells WordPerfect to use the personal binary information file rather than the public binary information file (WPCNET.BIF).

         	/u-name

Gives WordPerfect the user initials you specify. This lets multiple users run WordPerfect on the network (although it is not necessary for correct network operation) (for example, /u-BETH).

         	/unr-path

Tells WordPerfect the path to the user name reconciliation (.UNR) files (for example, /unr-C:\NEW).

         	/wpc-path

Tells WordPerfect the path to your shared code files (for example, /wpc-C:\NEW\WPC20).

         	/x

Instructs WordPerfect to use the default values for the Preferences features, such as the menus and keyboard.

See Also

Launch a Program (KickOff)

User's Guide: Appendix F: Startup Options


Page Numbering

Format, Page, Numbering

Purpose

Use Page Numbering to select the type of page numbers you want and place them in specific locations on the printed page.

Steps

1	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Numbering.

2	Select a location for the page numbers from the Position pop-up list.

3	Choose OK.

You can also choose the following options:

Font

Options

Value

See Also

About Formatting

Line Numbering

Page Numbering Options


Paper Size

Format, Page, Paper Size

Purpose

Use Paper Size to select and create paper definitions. WordPerfect uses a paper definition to format and print your document.

To select or create a paper definition for all new documents, see Styles Editor.

To select or create a paper definition that can be used with any WordPerfect printer driver or for the current document only, see ALL OTHERS. WordPerfect uses the [ALL OTHERS] definition when the paper size defined in the document does not match a definition on the list.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point on the page where you want to change the paper definition.

2	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Paper Size.

3	Highlight the paper definition you want, then choose Select.

See Also

ALL OTHERS

Create or Edit Paper Size

Envelope

Labels


Paragraph Format

Format, Paragraph, Format

Purpose

Use Paragraph Format to adjust margins for a few paragraphs only. You can also change first line indent and paragraph spacing.

To change paragraph format options for all new documents, see Styles Editor.

Use Margins when you want to set margins for an entire page or more.

You can also adjust where information prints on the page by changing the text adjustment in your paper definition. See Create or Edit Paper Size or Create Envelope Definition.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want paragraph changes to take place.

or

Select the text you want to adjust.

2	Choose Paragraph from the Format menu, then choose Format.

3	Specify new paragraph format settings according to the following list:

         	First Line Indent

Indent first line of paragraph a specified amount when you press Enter.

         	Spacing Between Paragraphs

Add spacing between paragraphs when you press Enter (line spacing times the specified amount).

         	Left Margin Adjustment

Adjust the left margin in addition to the current page margin.

         	Right Margin Adjustment

Adjust the right margin in addition to the current page margin.

         	Clear All

Remove adjustments and return to previous settings.

4	Choose OK.

You can also use the Ruler Bar to do the following:

         	Adjust First Line Indent

Drag top left triangle (indent marker) on the margin line.

         	Adjust Paragraph Margins

Drag bottom left or right triangle (paragraph markers) on the margin line.

         	Return Setting While Dragging

Drag pointer to the top of the document window.

         	Display Paragraph Format

Double-click on an indent or dialog box paragraph marker.

See Also

About Formatting

Create or Edit Paper Size or Create Envelope Definition

Page (Format)

Ruler Bar


Create Reversed Text

Purpose

You can create reversed text (white on a black background) using several methods.

     	Borders

You can create a black fill pattern inside a page, paragraph, or column border, then create white text.

     	Change Text/Printing Colors

When you create a black fill pattern inside a border or text box, you can change the font to white and print in reversed text.

     	Border/Fill Style

You can create a black fill style inside a text box, then create white text.

     	TextArt

Use the TextArt feature to shape and contour text in different colors and backgrounds.

     	Use the Reverse Macro

Type and format the text (for example, change the font, choose bold and center line). Select the text, then run the REVERSE.WPM macro.

     	Use a Graphics Program

Use an available graphics program to create text with graphics in different colors and backgrounds.


Contrast (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Contrast

Purpose

Use this feature to adjust the appearance of the light and dark areas of a color image.

Steps

To adjust image contrast,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image], then select the contrast you want.

To specify a contrast value,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image], then select Color Attributes.

4	Specify a contrast value from either the Contrast pop-up palette or the Contrast text box.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Black and White Threshold (Image)

Brightness (Image)

Image Settings

Reset All (Image)

Use a Graphics Program


Paste Special

Edit, Paste Special

Purpose

Use this feature to select a specific format for other applications when pasting them into WordPerfect.

Steps

To select the format,

1	Open the application and file you want to link to.

You can only link objects from saved documents.

2	Select the information you want to appear in the WordPerfect document, then copy it to the Clipboard.

For more information, see your server application documentation.

3	Switch to WordPerfect, then choose Paste Special from the Edit menu.

4	To paste the information into your WordPerfect document, select Paste, then choose a format from the list box.

or

To create an OLE or DDE link, select Paste Link, then choose a format from the list box.

5	Choose OK.

For OLE objects, you can also choose from the following options:

         	Display As Icon

Display the new OLE object in your document as an icon rather than as data, text, or graphics.

         	Change Icon

Select a new icon or change the text of the current icon.

See Also

Insert Object Into Document


Printer Setup

File, Print, Select, Options, Setup

Purpose

Use Printer Setup to specify print settings for a WordPerfect-driven printer.

If you want to use a Windows printer driver, WordPerfect provides access to the Windows printer setup options from within WordPerfect. For information about these printer setup options, refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation or online Help system.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Select.

2	Highlight the name of the WordPerfect printer you want to set up, then choose Setup from the Options drop-down list.

WordPerfect-driven printers are distinguished from Windows-driven printers by a WP symbol.

3	Edit the printer setup by selecting options and specifying the changes you want.

         	Filename

View the name of the printer driver (.PRS file) for the selected printer.

         	Name

Type in a description for a printer.

         	Path for Downloadable Fonts and Printer Commands

Specify the directory where downloadable soft fonts and printer commands are stored.

         	Cartridges/Fonts

Add supplemental font types to the list of available fonts for a printer.

         	Sheet Feeder

Select a sheet feeder.

         	Port

Specify where your printer is connected to your computer. If Port is set to File, specify the filename.

         	Prompt for Filename

Rename the output file for each document you print.

         	Printer Configured for Color

Specify whether your printer is configured for color (if the current printer supports color printing).

4	Choose OK.

5	Highlight the name of the printer you just modified, then choose Select to make it your current printer.

See Also

Printer Command

Select Fonts

Select Sheet Feeder


Perform Merge

Tools, Merge, Merge

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK, Close, Merge, Merge

Tools, Merge, Form, OK, None, OK, Merge, Merge

Purpose

Use Perform Merge to perform a merge after you have created a form file and data file.

Creating a data file is optional if you are using another data source such as the keyboard or a database.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Merge.

or

Choose Merge from the Merge feature bar, then choose Merge.

2	Select the Form File location:  Current Document, Clipboard, or Select File (from a directory).

3	Select the Data File location (if needed):  Clipboard, None (for a keyboard merge), or select the file.

4	Select the Output File location:  Current Document, New Document, Printer, or select a file.

5	Choose from the following options:

         	Select Records

Limit the merge to certain data records; you can specify conditions or mark records.

         	Envelope

Create envelopes; specify a return address; specify fields for mailing addresses.

         	Options

Control page breaks, copies, empty fields, and code display.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

About Merge

Associate (Merge)

Envelope

Perform Merge Options

Select Records


Perform Merge Options

Tools, Merge, Merge, Options

Purpose

Use Perform Merge Options to control page breaks, number of copies, empty fields, and code display.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Merge.

or

Choose Merge from the Merge feature bar, then choose Merge.

2	Specify file locations, then choose from the following options:

         	Separate Each Merged Document With a Page Break

Create or omit the page break between merged records.

         	Number of Copies for Each Record

Specify the number of copies for each record in the data file.

         	If Empty Field in Data File

Specify whether to leave a blank line or remove it when a field in the data file is empty.

         	Display Options

Show or hide codes in the output file, or show codes as markers.

3	Choose OK twice to merge.

See Also

Perform Merge


Pages (Header/Footer or Watermark)

Format, Header/Footer, Edit, Pages

Format, Watermark, Edit, Pages

Purpose

Use Pages to specify the pages in your document where the header, footer, or watermark appears.

Steps

1	While in Page view, move the insertion point to a page where the header, footer, or watermark you want to edit is in effect.

2	Choose Header/Footer from the Format menu, select the header or footer you want, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Watermark from the Format menu, select the watermark you want, then choose Edit.

3	Choose Pages from the feature bar, then select the pages where you want the header, footer, or watermark to appear.

4	Choose OK.

5	Choose Close from the feature bar.

See Also

Header/Footer

Header/Footer Feature Bar

Watermark

Watermark Feature Bar


Record/Play/Edit a Macro

Tools, Macro, Record or Play or Edit

Purpose

Use this feature to record, play, or edit a macro.

Steps

To record a macro,

1	Choose Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Record.

2	Type a name in the Name text box.

3	Choose Record.

You are returned to the document window. The message "Macro Record" displays in the status bar.

4	Use WordPerfect as you normally would to accomplish the task you want recorded.

WordPerfect records commands and text you type from the keyboard, as well as menu selections you make using the mouse. However, you must use the keyboard, and not the mouse, to position the insertion point in the document window.

5	To stop recording the macro, choose Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Record.

To play a macro and repeat the actions you have recorded,

1	Choose Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Play.

2	In the Filename text box, type the name of the macro you want to play.

or

Select the macro you want to play.

3	Choose Play.

The last macros played (up to nine) are added to the macro menu under the Macro Bar option. You can replay them by selecting them from that menu.

To edit a macro,

1	Choose Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Edit.

2	Enter the full name of the macro you want to edit, then choose Edit.

3	Add or delete macro commands.

or

Choose Command Inserter on the Macro feature bar, then select macro commands.

You can choose Play from the Macro feature bar to run the macro before saving it.

4	Choose Save & Compile from the Macro feature bar, then choose Close Macro from the Options button on the feature bar.

See Also

About Macros

Macro Feature Bar

Pause

Record/Play/Edit a Template Macro


Position Hyphen

Purpose

When Hyphenation is on in a document, WordPerfect prompts you to hyphenate words that extend beyond the right margin, instead of wrapping them to the next line. Use Position Hyphen to indicate whether and how you want the word hyphenated.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the word divided.

2	Choose one of the following options:

         	Insert Hyphen

Divide the word using a soft hyphen.

         	Insert Space

Divide the word using a space.

         	Hyphenation SRt

Divide the word using a hyphenation soft return instead of a hyphen.

         	Suspend Hyphenation

Turn off Hyphenation during spell-checking or during a scrolling command; turns on Hyphenation again when the command is completed.

         	Ignore Word

Wrap the entire word to the next line.

See Also

Hyphenation

Hyphenation (File Preferences)

Other Codes


POSTNET Bar Code

Format, Envelope, Options, Include USPS POSTNET Bar Code

Insert, Other, Bar Code

Purpose

Use this feature to add a POSTNET bar code to the mailing address on your envelopes, letters, or labels.

The Bar Code feature is POSTNET certified by the United States Postal Service for laser printers only.

Steps

To create a POSTNET bar code on an envelope,

1	Choose Envelope from the Format menu.

2	Select an envelope size from the Envelope Definitions drop-down list.

or

Choose Create New Definition to create a new envelope size.

3	Type the return address and mailing address (including the ZIP Code, or ZIP + 4 Code).  You can also paste address information from the clipboard.

4	Choose Options, select Include and Position Above Address or Include and Position Below Address, then choose OK.

The ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Code in the mailing address text box is automatically inserted into the POSTNET bar code text box.

To create a Delivery Point Bar Code (DPBC), you must type two additional digits at the end of the ZIP + 4 Code in the POSTNET Bar Code text box. Information on how to obtain the correct two digits is available from the USPS.

5	Choose Print Envelope to print the envelope, then return to your document.

or

Choose Append to Doc to insert the address information, along with the bar code, at the end of your document.

To create a POSTNET bar code on a line of text,

1	Place the insertion point where you want the bar code to appear in your document.

2	Choose Other from the Insert menu, then choose Bar Code.

3	Type a ZIP Code, ZIP + 4 Code, or a DPBC in the Bar Code Digits text box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Envelope


polling

The process of sending and picking up publications. You can poll accounts manually or have the Object Exchange poll your accounts automatically at specified intervals.


Preferences

Edit, Preferences

Purpose

Use Preferences to set options that are in effect each time you start WordPerfect.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

Display Preferences

Environment Preferences

File Preferences

Document Summary Preferences

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences

Toolbar/Power Bar Options

Status Bar Preferences

Writing Tools Preferences

Print Preferences

Convert Preferences


Print

File, Print

Purpose

Use Print to print the documents you create with WordPerfect.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Make sure the printer you want to use is listed in the Current Printer group box.

3	Specify the portion of the document you want to print:

         	Full Document

Print the entire document.

         	Current Page

Print the page where the insertion point is located.

         	Multiple Pages

Print specific pages, secondary pages, chapters, or volumes.

         	Selected Text

Print the selected text.

         	Document Summary

Print the document summary only.

         	Document on Disk

Print a document stored on a hard disk, floppy disk, or network drive without opening it in the document window.

4	Specify the number of copies, how copies are generated, print quality, print color, and whether graphics are printed.

5	Choose Print.

See Also

Add Printer

Document on Disk

Multiple Pages

Print Output Filename

Print Output Options

Printer Command

Printer Information

Printer Setup

Select Printer


Binding/Duplex Options

Format, Page, Binding/Duplex

Purpose

Use Binding/Duplex Options to create additional space for binding by shifting text away from the bound edge of the page and also to do duplex printing (printing on both sides of the page).

Steps

1	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Binding/Duplex.

2	Select the edge from which the text will be shifted (Left, Right, Top, or Bottom).

3	Specify the amount of space that you want to shift the text in the Amount text box.

4	Select one of the Duplex options (if the selected printer supports duplexing).

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Paper Size

Paragraph Format

Print


Printer Command

Format, Typesetting, Printer Command

Purpose

Use Printer Command to insert commands that take advantage of the special functions of your printer.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the printer command.

2	Choose Typesetting from the Format menu, then choose Printer Command.

3	In the Command text box, type the printer command you want to insert into your document.

or

In the Printer Command Filename text box, type the name of the file containing the printer commands you want to insert (consult your printer manual for printer commands).

Type printer commands in the syntax they appear in your printer manual. To include a decimal value for a control code or character, enclose that value in angle brackets (such as <27> for ESC).

4	If you want to insert a code that pauses the printer at the current insertion point position, select Pause Printer.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Print

Printer Setup


Brightness (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Brightness

Purpose

Use this feature to adjust the brightness (or saturation) of a color or black and white image in a graphics box.

Steps

To adjust image brightness,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image], then select the brightness you want.

To specify a brightness value,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image], then select Color Attributes.

4	Specify a brightness value from either the Brightness pop-up palette or the Brightness text box.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Contrast (Image)

Image Settings

Reset All (Image)

Use a Graphics Program


Printer Information

File, Print, Select, Options, Info

Purpose

Use Printer Information to display information about the WordPerfect-driven printer that is currently highlighted. You can also view information about the sheet feeder, if your printer supports one.

Steps

To view information about a WordPerfect-driven printer,

1	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Select.

2	Choose Info from the Options drop-down list.

To view information about a Windows-driven printer,

1	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Select.

2	Choose Setup from the Options drop-down list, then choose About.

See Also

Print

Print Preferences

Select Sheet Feeder


Document/Printer Initial Font

File, Print, Select, Options, Initial Font

Format, Document, Initial Font

Purpose

Use Printer Initial Font to specify a font that will be used for all documents you create with the selected printer. Use Document Initial Font to specify a font that will override the Printer Initial Font for a single document only.

Steps

To specify the font for the current printer,

1	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Select.

2	Select the printer you want to use, then choose Initial Font from the Options pop-up list.

3	Select the Font Face, Size, and Style you want.

4	Choose OK.

The font specifications you make in the Printer Initial Font dialog box will be in effect for all documents you create, unless you insert font codes in a document using either the Font dialog box or the Document Initial Font dialog box.

To specify a font for a single document,

1	Choose Document from the Format menu, then choose Initial Font.

2	Select the Font Face, Size, and Style you want.

3	Choose OK.

The font specifications you make in the Document Initial Font dialog box will be in effect for the current document only.

See Also

Edit Printer/Document Font Mapping

Font

Select Printer


Print Output Filename

File, Print, Select, Setup

Purpose

Use Print Output Filename to rename the output file for each document you print.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Select.

2	Make sure you have a WordPerfect printer selected, then choose Setup from the Options drop-down list.

3	Select File from the Port drop-down list.

4	Select Prompt for Filename.

5	Choose OK, then Close.

6	Choose Print.

7	Enter a filename, then choose OK.

You should give the output file a different name than the original document. Otherwise, you will overwrite the original document.


Print Output Options

File, Print, Options

Purpose

Use Print Output Options to specify document formatting options and how you want multiple copies of your document to print.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Choose Options from the Print dialog box.

3	Select any of the following options:

         	Print Document Summary

Print a document summary with your document.

         	Booklet Printing

Automatically arrange and print the pages so that they print both front and back, as a booklet.

         	Print in Reverse Order

Print the pages in descending order (Back to Front) beginning with the last page.

         	Print Odd/Even Pages

Print only the odd-numbered pages, only the even-numbered pages, or both.

         	Output Bin Options

Specify how the copies will come out of the printer.

         	Print Document Graphically

Print without downloading your fonts to the printer. You may want to select this option if you are having trouble printing reversed text (white on black).

4	Choose OK, then choose Print.

See Also

Binding/Duplex Options

Booklet Printing

Document Summary

Subdivide Page


Print Preferences

Edit, Preferences, Print

Purpose

Use Print Preferences to designate default print settings for your documents.

These print settings remain in effect each time you print until you change them.

Steps

To change the Size Attribute Ratio,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Print icon.

2	Specify the percentage of normal-sized text you want for each Size Attribute.

3	Choose OK.

To specify the number of copies to print,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Print icon.

2	Specify the number of copies you want to print.

3	Specify whether you want the multiple copies generated by WordPerfect or the printer.

4	Choose OK.

To change the Document Settings,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Print icon.

2	Specify the print quality for text and graphics within your document.

3	Select Full Color to print in color.

or

Select Black to print in black ink.

4	Select Do Not Print Graphics if you do not want to print graphics.

5	Choose OK.

To reformat the document for the current printer,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Print icon.

2	Select Reformat Documents for the Currently Selected Printer on Open.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Font

Print


Quick Data Entry

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK, Close, Quick Entry

Purpose

Use Quick Data Entry to quickly enter or edit records in a data file or change field names.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, choose Data, create field names, then choose OK.

or

Retrieve a data file, then choose Quick Entry from the Merge Data feature bar.

2	Delete and type information in the available fields.

3	Use the following options as you create or edit fields and records:

         	Next Field

Move to the next field.

         	Previous Field

Move to the previous field.

         	New Record

Create a new record.

         	Delete Record

Delete the current record.

         	Find

Search for a record using Find.

         	Field Names

Edit or create field names.

         	First, Previous, Next, Last

Move between records.

4	Choose Close.

See Also

Create Data File

Edit Field Names

Find and Replace Text

Go to Data

Merge Data File Feature Bar


QuickFormat (Text)

Format, QuickFormat

Purpose

Use QuickFormat to copy fonts, attributes, and paragraph styles from one area of text to another. For example, you can quickly format all your headings to look like a particular heading using QuickFormat. Headings that you format with QuickFormat are linked together so that you can update them automatically.

Steps

To copy formatting from one area to another,

1	Place the insertion point in the paragraph that has the format you want to copy.

2	Choose QuickFormat from the Format menu.

3	Select Characters to copy only the fonts and attributes of the current text, then choose OK. With the special mouse pointer, drag over any text that you want to give the new format.

or

Select Headings to copy fonts and attributes as well as paragraph styles and paragraph borders, then choose OK. Click the heading that you want to give the new format.

4	Choose QuickFormat from the Format menu to turn off the feature.

To update headings automatically,

1	Select a heading that has been previously formatted with the Headings option.

2	Change the format of that heading to the format you want.

WordPerfect automatically updates all headings that use the same style.

To discontinue automatic update,

1	Place the insertion point in the heading that you want to edit.

2	Choose QuickFormat from the Format menu, then choose Discontinue.

3	Select Current Heading to edit the current heading without affecting associated headings.

or

Select All Associated Headings to edit the current heading as well as any associated headings. Choosing this option changes the style from an automatic paragraph style to a normal paragraph style.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Font

Paragraph Format

Power Bar

Styles


Reset All (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Reset All

Purpose

Use this feature to restore an image to the settings specified in the graphics box style you are using.

When you reset the image, you remove any attributes, color adjustments, fills, or positioning options you assigned to it using the Image Tools palette.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image].

See Also

Image Settings

Use a Graphics Program


Fill Attributes (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Fill Attributes

Purpose

Use this feature to make an image transparent so the background shows through the image or to convert the image to an outline with a white fill.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image], then select a fill attribute.

or

Click [image], select Fill Attributes, select the fill attribute you want, then choose OK.

See Also

Black and White Threshold (Image)

Image Settings

Reset All (Image)

Use a Graphics Program


Redline Method

Format, Document, Redline Method

Purpose

Use Redline Method to change the printed appearance of redline text.

Steps

1	Choose Document from the Format menu, then choose Redline Method.

2	Choose any of the following options:

         	Printer Dependent

Use the redlining method specific to your printer (usually a shaded background).

         	Mark Left Margin/Mark Right Margin

Use a character (normally a vertical bar) to mark redlined text in the left margin or right margin.

         	Mark Alternating Margins

Mark redlined text in the left margin for even-numbered pages and in the right margin for odd-numbered pages.

3	If you choose Mark Left Margin, Mark Right Margin, or Mark Alternating Margins and you want to mark redline text with a character other than a vertical bar (|), type a new character in the Redline Character text box.

You can press Ctrl+w to open the WordPerfect Characters dialog box, then insert a special character.

4	If you want to use the selected method as the default redline method every time you use WordPerfect, choose Use as Default.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Compare Document

Font

WordPerfect Characters


Remove Markings (Compare Document)

File, Compare Document, Remove Markings

Purpose

Use Remove Markings to remove redline markings and strikeout text all at once.

Steps

1	Choose Compare Document from the File menu, then choose Remove Markings.

2	If you want to return the document to the way it was before you compared it, select Remove Redline Markings and Strikeout Text.

or

If you want to keep the markings for added text but remove all other text and markings inserted by the comparison, select Remove Strikeout Text Only.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Compare Document


Repeat

Edit, Repeat

Purpose

Use Repeat to save time when you need to type a repetitive keystroke or choose the same command several times.

Steps

To repeat a task,

1	Place the insertion point where you want the repeated action to begin.

2	Choose Repeat from the Edit menu.

The number in the text box specifies how many times the keystroke, command, or macro is repeated.

3	In the Number of Times to Repeat Next Action text box, specify the number of times you want the action to be repeated, then choose OK.

or

Choose OK to use the default number (8).

4	Choose a command or macro, or press the keystroke that you want to repeat.

To change the default repeat number,

1	Choose Repeat from the Edit menu.

2	Specify a new number, then choose Use as Default.

See Also

About Macros

Delete (Text)

Select


Retrieve List Definitions

Tools, List or Table of Authorities, Define, Retrieve

Purpose

Use Retrieve List Definition to retrieve definitions for lists or table of authorities sections from a document on disk into the current document.

Steps

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define, then choose Retrieve.

3	Type the filename of a document that has definitions that you want.

or

Click the list button, select a file, then choose OK.

4	Select the definitions you want, then choose OK.

See Also

Define List or Table of Authorities


Rotate Contents Counterclockwise

Graphics, Edit Box, Content, Rotate Contents Counterclockwise

Purpose

Use Rotate Contents Counterclockwise to turn text 90, 180, or 270 degrees inside a graphics box.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing text.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Content.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Content from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Content.

3	Select an angle of rotation from the Rotate Contents Counterclockwise group box, then choose OK.

4	Choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Create Text Box

Custom Box


Save Color Palette

Format, Font, Palette, Save As

Purpose

Use Save Color Palette to name and save a color palette you create.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Palette.

2	Choose Save As.

3	Type a name for the palette in the Name text box.

4	Specify a filename in the Filename text box, then choose OK.

See Also

Default Color Palette

Open Color Palette


Save (Selected Text)

File, Save or Save As

Purpose

Use Save to save selected text in a new document or replace the current document with the selected text.

Steps

1	Select the text you want to save, then choose Save or Save As from the File menu.

2	If you want to save only the selected text, choose Selected Text.

or

If you want to save the entire document, choose Entire File.

3	Choose OK.

4	Type a filename for the file, then choose OK.

See Also

Managing Files

QuickList


Macro Location

Tools, Template Macro, Play or Edit or Record, Location

Edit, Preferences, Keyboard or Menu Bar or Toolbar, Create or Edit, Play a Macro, Add Template Macro, Location

Purpose

Each template you use has its own set of macros.

You can use the macros either for your current template or for the default template.

Steps

1	Use one of the routes above ( [image]), then choose Location.

2	If you want to use the macros for the current template, select Current Template.

or

If you want to use the macros for the default template (normally, standard.wpt), select Default Template.

3	If you want your current selection to be the default location for your macros, select Use as Default.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

About Macros

About Templates

Macro Feature Bar

Record/Play/Edit a Template Macro


Match and Replace

Edit, Find and Replace, Match, Whole Word or Case or Font or Codes

Purpose

Use Match to match whole words, case, font type and size, and codes.

In addition, use Replace to specify the case and font type and size of replacement text and to specify replacement codes.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the search to begin.

2	Choose Find and Replace from the Edit menu.

3	Type the text you want to find in the Find text box.

4	Select Match, then choose from the following options:

         	Whole Word

Find whole words only. For example, to find the word "low," choose this option. Otherwise, words that have "low" in them, such as "allow" and "lower," will also be found.

         	Case

Specify an exact match for the word you want to find. For example, when this option is selected, "FREE" will find only "FREE," not "free."

         	Font

Find text in a specific font size or type, including attributes. For example, you could find every instance of the word "hello" that is bolded 14 point text in a Courier font.

         	Codes

Find codes such as Bot Mar (Bottom Margin), Bold, Italics, and Calc Col (Calculate Column).

5	Type the replacement text you want in the Replace With text box.

6	Select Replace, then choose Case, Font, or Codes, as described in step 4.

See Also

Find and Replace Text


Select Counter

Graphics, Edit Box, Caption, Change

Purpose

Use Select Counter to change the counter style used for any graphics box style in your document.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box in your document.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Caption.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Caption from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Caption.

3	Choose Change from the Caption Numbering and Styles group box.

4	Select a counter style from the Counters list box, then choose Select.

5	Choose OK.

6	Choose Close on the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Counter Numbering


Select Fonts

File, Print, Select, Options, Setup, Cartridges/Fonts

Purpose

Use Select Fonts to add fonts to your list of available fonts. You can supplement your printer's built-in fonts by purchasing cartridges, soft fonts, or print wheels, depending on the type of printer you are using.

This information explains how to use supplemental fonts with WordPerfect printer drivers. For information about supplementing the fonts of Windows printer drivers, refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation or use the online Help system available on each of the Windows dialog boxes.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Select.

2	Highlight the WordPerfect printer you want to use, then choose Setup from the Options drop-down list.

3	Choose Cartridges/Fonts.

4	Click the Font Source text box, then select the font source you want to use (Cartridge, Soft Font, or Print Wheel).

5	If you choose Soft Font as your font source, select the Font Group that contains the fonts you want.

6	Mark the fonts you want to make available with an asterisk (*) or with a plus sign (+).

If you have pre-loaded a supplemental font, mark it with an asterisk (*). If you need to conserve the amount of space available (such as printer memory in the case of soft fonts), mark a soft font with a plus sign (+).

7	If you select Soft Fonts, confirm the path listed in the Current Soft Font Directory text box, or specify a new directory where you want the soft fonts stored.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Downloading and Installing Soft Fonts

Edit Printer/Document Font Mapping

Font


Select Printer

File, Print, Select

Purpose

Use Select Printer to specify the type of printer driver (supplied by either WordPerfect or Windows) and which specific printer you want to use.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

The Select Printer dialog box lists the printers you selected during the installation process, the printers you selected previously for Windows applications, and any printers you have added using Add Printer.

2	Choose Windows Default Printer, then choose Select.

or

Choose Specific Printer, then highlight the printer you want to use, then choose Select.

 indicates that it is a WordPerfect-driven printer.  indicates that it is a Windows-driven printer.

If you update or customize a printer .ALL file using the Printer Definition Program, you will need to use the Update option to add the new information to the .PRS file.

See Also

Add Printer

Copy or Create Printer

Delete Printer

Document/Printer Initial Font

Fax

Printer Information

Printer Setup


Select Records

Tools, Merge, Merge, Select Records

Purpose

Use Select Records to limit the merge to certain records in the data file.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Merge.

2	Specify file locations, then choose Select Records.

3	Select one of the following options:

Specify Conditions

Mark Records

See Also

About Merge

Example Select Records

Perform Merge


Select Sheet Feeder

File, Print, Select, Options, Setup, Sheet Feeder

Purpose

Use Select Sheet Feeder to manually pick a sheet feeder for the printer you are using.

This feature is available for WordPerfect printer drivers only.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Select.

2	Choose Setup from the Options drop-down list, then choose Sheet Feeder.

3	Highlight the sheet feeder you want, then choose OK.

For information about a particular sheet feeder, highlight the sheet feeder in the Select Sheet Feeder dialog box, then choose Info.

See Also

Printer Information


Set Paragraph Number

Tools, Outline, Options, Set Number

Purpose

Use Set Paragraph Number to start renumbering an outline at any level, with any number.

This is useful if you want to turn Outline on and off throughout the document.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to start renumbering.

2	If the Outline feature bar is not displayed, choose Outline from the Tools menu.

3	Choose Set Number from the Options drop-down list.

4	Type the number you want to start with in the Paragraph Number text box, then choose OK.

You must type Arabic numerals separated by commas, spaces, or periods. For example, if you want to start at V.B.3, type 5.2.3.

See Also

Change Outline Level

Create an Outline

Define Outline

Edit Outline Definition


Set Value/Number Method (Counter)

Insert, Other, Counter, Value

Purpose

Use Set Value/Number Method to change the value or numbering method of a counter.

Steps

1	Choose Other from the Insert menu, then choose Counter.

2	Select a counter or counter level from the Counter list.

3	Select Value, then specify a new value.

4	To change the numbering method (numbers, letters, Roman numerals), select a method from the Numbering Method pop-up list.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Counter Numbering

Create or Edit Counter Definition


Access GroupWise from WordPerfect 6.1
Access Novell GroupWise from WordPerfect 6.1

File, GroupWise

Purpose

Use Novell GroupWise with WordPerfect 6.1 to instantly send mail, appointments, notes, phone messages, and tasks from inside WordPerfect 6.1.  You can also check the GroupWise Address Book, or your own Calendar, In Box, or Out Box.

Steps

1	Choose GroupWise from the File menu.

2	Choose the GroupWise feature you want to use.

See Also

Send


Sort

Tools, Sort

Purpose

Use Sort to arrange text alphabetically or numerically or to extract specific information from a list.

Steps

1	Select the text you want to Sort.

If you do not select text, the entire document will be sorted.

2	Choose Sort from the Tools menu.

3	Specify the Input File and Output File of the sorted text.

If you are sorting a file on disk, type the filename or click the list button to select the input file.

4	To create a new sort definition, choose New, then specify the name of your sort in the Sort Name text box. Define your own sort using key definitions, then choose OK to return to the Sort dialog box.

or

Select one of the predefined sorts in the Defined Sorts list box.

Note that when you create a new sort definition it is saved in the Defined Sorts list box. You can save up to 50 definitions for use later.

5	Make sure Allow Undo is selected (checked) from the Options pop-up list.

6	Choose Sort.

7	If your text did not sort the way you wanted it to, choose Undo from the Edit menu.

See Also

Key Definitions (Sort)

Select Records (Sort)


Sound Clips

Insert, Sound

Purpose

Use Sound Clips to add and play sound clips in your document.

Steps

To add a sound clip to your document

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu.

2	Choose Insert.

3	Specify the sound clip you want, then choose OK.

To record a sound clip,

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu.

2	Choose Record, which launches the Windows Sound Recorder. Refer to Windows Help while using the Sound Recorder.

To display the Sound Clip feature bar,

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu.

2	Choose Transcribe.

To play a sound clip,

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu.

2	Select a sound clip from the Sound Clips in Document list.

3	Choose Play.

You can play, rewind, stop, or fast forward the sound clip. You can also play a sound clip from the controls on the Sound Clip feature bar or by simply clicking the sound clip icon.

See Also

Insert or Edit Sound Clip

Sound Transcribe Feature Bar


Specific Codes

Edit, Find and Replace, Type, Specific Codes

Purpose

Use Specific Codes to find and replace specific codes in your document.

Steps

To find a specific code,

1	Choose Find and Replace from the Edit menu.

2	Choose Specific Codes from the Type menu, select the code, choose OK, then enter a specific value.

To find and replace a specific code,

1	Choose Find and Replace from the Edit menu.

2	Choose Specific Codes from the Type menu, select the specific code, choose OK, then enter a specific value in the Find text box.

3	Click the Replace With text box, then enter a specific value.

4	Select any of the other options you want to use.

5	Choose one of the following options:

         	Find

Finds the search text the first time it appears.

         	Replace

Replaces the search text the first time it appears, then continues to look for the search text if it is selected again.

         	Replace All

Automatically replaces the text every time it appears.

         	Replace with Nothing

Eliminates the code you have specified by replacing it with nothing.

See Also

Codes

Find and Replace Text Options

Find and Replace Text Direction


Split Cell

Table, Split, Cell

Purpose

Use Split Cell to divide the current cell or a selection of cells.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell that you want to divide.

or

If you want to split several cells at the same time, select them.

2	Choose Split from the Table menu, then choose Cell.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Split Cell.

3	Choose Columns or Rows.

4	Specify the number of columns or rows into which you want to divide the cells, then choose OK.

See Also

Join Cell/Table

Split Table


Status Bar Options

Edit, Preferences, Status Bar, Options

Purpose

Use Status Bar Options to specify the options you want to appear on your status bar, the font they appear in, and the font size.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the status bar icon.

2	Select any of the Status Bar Items you want to include on your status bar.

3	Choose Options, then select the font and font size you want to use for status bar text.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Status Bar

Status Bar Preferences


Status Bar Preferences

Edit, Preferences, Status Bar

Purpose

Use Status Bar Preferences to customize the information displayed on the status bar. These options stay in place until you change them again.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the status bar icon.

2	Select any of the Status Bar Items you want to have appear on your status bar.

3	While the Status Bar Preferences dialog box is open, move items on the status bar by dragging them to a new position, then choose OK.

See Also

Display Preferences

Status Bar

Status Bar Options

View Modes


Styles

Format, Styles

Purpose

Use Styles to easily format your documents and templates so they have a consistent, professional look.

Steps

1	If you are applying a paragraph style, place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph you want the style to affect.

or

If you are applying a character style, select the text you want to format using the style.

or

If you are applying an open style, place the insertion point where you want the style to take effect.

2	Choose Styles from the Format menu.

3	Double-click the style you want to use.

You can also use one of the following options to create, edit, copy, delete, reset, retrieve, or save styles.

Create

Edit

Options

If you apply a Paragraph (paired-auto) style in different locations throughout a document, you can change the formatting for text within that style in one location and it will update in all the other locations automatically.

See Also

About Formatting

File Preferences

New Document/Template

QuickStyle

Setup (Styles)

Styles Editor


Retrieve or Save Styles

Format, Styles, Options, Retrieve or Save As

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Options, Retrieve or Save As

Purpose

Use this feature to retrieve or save a styles file.

Styles files saved with the current document can be retrieved into other documents.

Steps

To retrieve a styles file,

1	Use one of the routes above ( [image]) to display the Retrieve Styles From or the Retrieve Outline Definitions From dialog box.

2	Specify the filename of the styles file or outline definition containing the styles you want.

You can also choose it using the list button at the end of the Filename text box.

3	Specify which styles you want to retrieve by selecting an option under Style Type.

4	Choose OK.

To save a styles file,

1	Use one of the routes above ( [image]) to display the Save Styles To or the Save Outline Definitions To dialog box.

2	Specify a path and filename for the list of styles.

It is a good idea to save the file with a descriptive extension, such as .STY.

If you do not specify a directory, styles from your document or default template are saved in the default template directory. And styles from the supplementary template are saved in the supplementary template directory.

If you have not specified a default or supplementary template, WordPerfect saves the styles where your Windows files are stored.

3	Specify which styles you want to save by selecting an option under Style Type.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Graphics Style/Table Expert Settings

New Document/Template

Styles

Styles Editor


Copy Styles

Format, Styles, Options, Copy

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Options, Copy

Purpose

Use Copy Styles to copy a selected style from the current document or template to your default or supplemental template.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Styles Copy or Outline Definition Copy dialog box.

2	Choose a Copy To option to indicate where you want to copy the style or definition, then choose OK.

See Also

File Preferences

Graphics Style/Table Expert Settings

New Document/Template

Styles

Styles Editor


Delete Styles

Format, Styles, Options, Delete

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Options, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete Styles to delete a selected style from the entire document.

Use Outline Definition Delete to delete a selected outline definition from the entire document.

To remove a style from a section of text, drag the style out of Reveal Codes.

Steps

To delete a selected style,

1	Use the first route above ( [image]) to display the Delete Styles dialog box.

2	If you want to delete all occurrences of the style from the document, select Include Codes, then choose OK.

To delete a selected outline definition,

1	Use the second route above ( [image]) to display the Outline Definitions Delete dialog box.

2	If you want to delete all occurrences of the outline definition from the document, select Yes.

You cannot delete a system style or a system outline definition.

See Also

File Preferences

New Document/Template

Reveal Codes

Styles

Styles Editor


Styles Editor

Format, Styles, Create or Edit

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Create or Edit, Create Style

Format, Document, Initial Codes Style

Purpose

Use the Styles Editor to create or edit a style or to create a default initial style for all new documents.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), open the Styles Editor dialog box.

2	If necessary, type a name for the style in the Style Name text box.

You may want to avoid using names that are already used for other styles in other templates and documents.

3	If necessary, choose an option from the Type pop-up list:

         	Character (paired)

Affects selected text or text you are about to type.

         	Paragraph (paired)

Affects paragraph containing the insertion point or selected text.

         	Paragraph (paired-auto)

Affects paragraph containing the insertion point or selected text. The contents of an automatic paragraph style are updated automatically whenever you change the formatting of an entire paragraph to which the style is applied.

         	Document (open)

Affects all text from the insertion point to the end of the document.

If you want to specify what the Enter key does in a paragraph or character style you are creating, choose one of the following options:

         	Enter Key Will Chain To

Deselect if you want the Enter key to insert a hard return without turning off the style (normal function). Available only for character styles.

         	<Same Style> from the drop-down list

Moves the insertion point past the style and turns on the style again; useful for bulleted lists and paragraphs with the first line indented.

         	<None> from the drop-down list

Moves the insertion point past the style; useful for headings and titles.

         	Any style from the drop-down list

Moves the insertion point past the style, then turns on another style.

4	Insert codes and text in the Contents box. You can choose items from the Styles Editor menu, press keystrokes, and even type text.

If you want the Contents box to display the codes you are inserting, make sure the Reveal Codes option is selected.

5	If you are creating a paragraph or character style and you want certain codes to take effect when the style ends, select Show Off Codes, then insert those codes below the Comment code.

6	If you are creating an initial codes style, select Use as Default.

7	Choose OK. (For an initial codes style, this is the final step.)

8	If you want to apply your new style to selected text or text you are about to type, double-click the style. If not, choose Close.

See Also

Copy Styles

Delete Styles

File Preferences

Graphics Style/Table Expert Settings

New Document/Template

QuickStyle

QuickFormat (Text)

Retrieve or Save Styles

Setup (Styles)

Styles


Setup (Styles)

Format, Styles, Options, Setup

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Options, Setup

Purpose

Use Setup to list a different set of styles or indicate where you want to save a style you are creating or editing.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Style Setup dialog box.

2	If you want to list the system styles or the styles in your default or supplemental template, select an option under Display Styles From.

or

If you want to save a style you are creating or editing in your default or supplemental template, select an option under Default Location.

You must specify your default and supplemental templates in File Preferences before you can access them.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

File Preferences

New Document/Template

Styles

Styles Editor


Subdivide Page

Format, Page, Subdivide Page

Purpose

Use Subdivide Page (instead of the Labels feature) to create items such as programs, booklets, cards, and tickets.

Subdivide Page lets you create several logical pages on one physical page.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point on the first page that you want to subdivide.

2	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Subdivide Page.

3	Specify the number of columns and rows of logical pages.

4	Choose OK.

5	Use the following keystrokes as you type in logical pages:

         	Ctrl+Enter

End the text you are typing on the current logical page and move to the next.

         	Enter

End a line of text within a logical page.

         	Alt+PgDn or Alt+PgUp

Move to the next or previous logical page.

         	Ctrl+G

Move to a specific logical page.

See Also

About Formatting

Binding/Duplex Options

Booklet Printing

Labels

Paper Size


Suppress

Format, Page, Suppress

Purpose

Use Suppress to prevent a page number, header, footer, or watermark from appearing on the current page. If you want to move codes down a specified number of pages before they take effect, use Delay Codes.

Steps

1	Move the insertion point to the page where you want to suppress a page number, header, footer, or watermark.

2	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Suppress.

3	Select the items you want to suppress.

or

Choose All to select all the items.

4	Instead of suppressing a page number, you can select Print Page Number at Bottom Center on Current Page.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Delay Codes

Header/Footer

Page Numbering

Watermark


Table Cut or Copy

Edit, Cut or Copy

Purpose

Use Table Cut or Copy to move or copy rows, columns, cells, or selections from one location in a table to another location in the same table or to a different table or to transfer text between tables and your document.

If you are cutting and pasting or copying between tables, table formatting (such as line and fill styles, number types, and text appearance) is also pasted or copied.

Steps

1	Select the cells, rows, columns, or table contents you want to cut and paste or copy.

2	Choose Cut from the Edit menu to move the selection.

or

Choose Copy from the Edit menu to copy the selection.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Cut or Copy.

3	Choose Selection to cut or copy a selection.

or

Select Row or Column to cut or copy the row(s) or column(s).

or

If you are copying one cell, select Cell, then select To Clipboard, or select Down or Right and specify how many cells down or to the right you want to copy the cell.

4	Choose OK.

5	Move the insertion point to the place where you want to paste or copy the selection, row, column, or cell.

6	If you are moving or copying, choose Paste from the Edit menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Paste.

See Also

Copy Formula (Table)


Table Functions

Table, Formula Bar, Functions

Purpose

Use Table Functions on the Table Formula feature bar to select and insert functions into the Formula Edit text box.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell where you want to insert a formula.

or

Place the insertion point in a floating cell.

2	If the feature bar is not already displayed, choose Formula Bar from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Formula Bar.

3	Choose Functions from the feature bar.

4	Select the function you want.

You can begin typing the first few letters of a function to quickly select it.

5	Double-click the function or choose Insert.

6	Replace the argument keywords with data, names, or cell or range addresses, or nest other functions within the function. You can also include other formula functions outside of the function.

7	Click [image] to cancel the changes you have made to the function and turn off Formula Edit mode.

or

Click [image] to accept and insert the function into the table or floating cell and turn off Formula Edit mode.

See Also

Create a Formula

Cell Formula Entry


Table Lines/Fill

Table, Lines/Fill

Purpose

Use Table Lines/Fill to select, create, and edit a table's lines, border, and fill styles.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point inside a table in which you want to change lines, fill, or border styles.

or

Select the cells that contain the lines you want to change.

2	Choose Lines/Fill from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Lines/Fill.

3	If you selected one or no cells, you have two options across the top of the Table Lines/Fill dialog box.

         	Cell

Change the lines/fill for a single cell.

         	Table

Change the lines/fill and border for an entire table.

If you selected more than one cell, you have three options across the top of the Table Lines/Fill dialog box.

         	Selection

Change the lines/fill for an entire selection.

         	Each Selected Cell

Change the lines/fill for a selection as individual cells.

         	Table

Change the lines/fill and border for an entire table.

Choose one of the following topics for information about using each option:

Cell (Lines/Fill)

Each Selected Cell (Lines/Fill)

Selection (Lines/Fill)

Table (Lines/Fill)

See Also

Select Cell

Table Expert (Styles)


Edit (Table of Authorities) Full Form

Tools, Table of Authorities, Edit Full Form

Purpose

Use Edit (Table of Authorities) Full Form to edit the full form of an authority.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Authorities from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Edit Full Form from the Table of Authorities feature bar.

3	Select the section you want to edit, then choose OK.

See Also

Table of Authorities Full Form Feature Bar


List or Table of Authorities Style

Tools, List or Table of Authorities, Define, Create or Edit, Change

Purpose

Use List or Table of Authorities Style to change the style used for list and table of authorities entries.

Steps

To replace the style with an existing style,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Choose Create or Edit, then choose Change.

3	Highlight a style from the Styles list, then choose Select.

To create a style,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Choose Create, then choose Change.

3	Choose Create, create the style, then choose OK.

To edit a style,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Choose Edit, then choose Change.

3	Choose Edit, edit the style, then choose OK.

See Also

Define List or Table of Authorities

Styles Editor


Initial Table Settings

Table, Lines/Fill, Table, Initial Table Settings

Purpose

Use Initial Table Settings to save the table line and border settings you have created for use as the default in other tables in the current document or for tables you create during subsequent WordPerfect sessions.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Lines/Fill from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Lines/Fill.

3	Select Table.

4	Choose Initial Table Settings, then choose Yes.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Selection (Lines/Fill)

Table (Lines/Fill)

Table Lines/Fill


Tab Set

Format, Line, Tab Set

Purpose

Use Tab Set to change tab settings in your document. Tab settings determine where the insertion point stops when you press Tab or Back Tab.

To use the Ruler Bar to set tabs, see Set Tabs on the Ruler Bar. To set hard tabs, see Other Codes.

Steps

1	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Tab Set.

2	To clear a tab setting, specify the setting in the Position text box, then choose Clear.

or

To delete all tab settings, choose Clear All.

3	Choose how you want to measure tabs, from the Left Margin (Relative) or from the Left Edge of Paper (Absolute).

4	Select a tab type from the Type drop-down list:

         	Left, Dot Left

Tab remains left; text moves right.

         	Center, Dot Center

Text you type centers around the tab.

         	Right, Dot Right

Tab remains right; text moves left.

         	Decimal, Dot Decimal

Text inserts before and after a decimal tab character.

Dot tabs include dot leaders (a row of dots between the insertion point and the next tab setting).

5	Specify a tab setting in the Position text box, then choose Set.

or

Specify the beginning tab in the Position text box, select Repeat Every, then specify the distance you want between tabs.

6	If you want to return to default tab settings, choose Default.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

About Formatting

Decimal Tabs

Decimal/Align Character

Dot Leader Character


Delete Table

Purpose

Use Delete Table to delete the entire table (structure and contents), the contents only, the formulas only, or the structure only.

You can also use Delete Table to convert a table into a data text file, where the first row is converted to the first record or to a group of field names.

Steps

1	Select the entire table.

2	Press Delete or Backspace.

3	Select Entire Table, Table Contents, Formulas Only or Table Structure.

or

If you want the first row to be converted to a record, select Convert to Merge Data File.

or

If you want the first row to be converted to field names, select Convert to Merge Data File (first row becomes field names).

4	Choose OK.

If you delete table structure, you may need to insert new tab stops to align columns if you want to keep the text in tabular columns.

See Also

Delete (Table)


Format

Table, Format

Purpose

Use Format to customize the text in your table.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell, column, or row you want to format.

or

Select the cells, columns, or rows you want to format.

2	Choose Format from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Format.

3	Select Cell, Column, Row, or Table, then choose from the following options:

Format Cell

Format Column (Table)

Format Row

Format Table


Create or Edit Templates

File, New, Options, New Template or Edit Template

Purpose

You can create a new template based on a previously created document or template, or you can begin a new template. Your templates can be as simple as a memo form you fill in or as complex as a newsletter containing styles and macro triggers.

Templates can include text, format, styles, graphics, abbreviations, macros, Toolbars, menu bars, and keyboards.

Steps

1	Choose New from the File menu.

2	Choose Options, then choose New Template.

or

Highlight a template, choose Options, then choose Edit.

3	Set margins and other formatting options as you normally would, type text, and retrieve graphics.

or

Choose from the following options on the Templates feature bar:

         	Insert File

Retrieve a WordPerfect document and its format into the current one. You will also retrieve template objects (keyboards, menus, template macros, toolbars, and styles) from the other template, if the current template is blank.

         	Build Prompts

Create the prompts you want your template to display when you open the template.

         	Copy/Remove Object

Copy and remove styles, abbreviations, Toolbars, keyboards, template macros, and menu bars from other templates; copy and embed macros from disk.

         	Associate

Associate Toolbars, menu bars, or keyboards with various editing windows in the template (Equation Editor, Headers, and so on); specify macro triggers, which play a specified macro at a particular point in time as you use the template.

         	Description

Read, edit, or create the description of the current template.

         	Exit Template

Save your changes to the template and return to the document window.

4	To save the template, choose Save As from the File menu.

or

To save the new template and exit it, choose Exit Template, then choose Yes.

5	Type the Description you want to display in the template list.

6	Type a Template Name (8 characters or less) for the file being saved.

7	Select the Template Group where you want to place the template.

8	Choose OK, then choose Exit Template from the Templates feature bar.

See Also

Abbreviations

Address Book

Associate (Templates)

Build Prompts

Copy/Remove Objects

New Document/Template


Mirror (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Flip Vertical or Flip Horizontal

Purpose

Use this feature to flip an image on its vertical axis or horizontal axis.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

3	Click [image] to flip the image on its vertical axis.

or

Click [image] to flip the image on its horizontal axis.

See Also

Image Settings

Invert (Image)

Move (Image)

Reset All (Image)

Rotate (Image)

Use a Graphics Program


Insert Merge Code Parameters

Merge Feature Bar, Merge Codes, Insert

Purpose

Use Insert Merge Code Parameters to enter the correct parameters and arguments as requested by the merge code.

     	(expr)(subexpr)

Enter a number, string, variable, commands, expression, or combination of these

     	(label)

Enter a unique name

     	(var)

Enter a unique variable name

     	(field)

Enter a unique name or field number

     	(filename)

Enter a filename; should include full path

     	(macroname)

Enter a unique macro name; may include full path; no .WCM extension is needed

     	(title)

Enter the title of the dialog box

     	(prompt)(message)

Enter information you want to display on the screen

     	(comment)

Enter a description of what the merge does; does not display on screen

See Also

Insert Merge Codes


Log on to Database Server

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Import or Create Link, select an SQL database, Log On

Purpose

To access any of the SQL databases, you must log on to the database.

Steps

1	Select an SQL database in the Import Data or Create Data Link dialog box.

2	Choose Log On.

3	Type the Server Name, Database, or File Path and Dictionary Path.

4	Type the User ID and Password if required, then choose Log On.

See Also

Spreadsheet/Database


Text Box Initial Style

Graphics, Custom Box, Styles, Edit, Settings

Purpose

Use Text Box Initial Style to work with and use styles in a document, personal template, or shared template.

Steps

1	Choose Custom Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Styles.

2	Highlight the Text Box or Table or User or Button box style, then choose Edit.

3	Choose Settings, then choose Change.

4	Choose from the following options:

New Document/Template

Styles List

Styles Editor


Image Tools Palette

Steps

1	Click the icon you want information about.

or

Press Tab until the icon you want is selected, then press Enter.


Sound Transcribe Feature Bar

Insert, Sound, Transcribe

Purpose

Use the Sound Transcribe feature bar to control sound clip playback.

Steps

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu.

2	Select the sound clip you want, then choose Transcribe.

You can play, replay, rewind, stop, or fast forward the sound clip.

See Also

Insert or Edit Sound Clip

Sound Clips


Undelete

Edit, Undelete

Purpose

Use Undelete to restore any or all of your last three deletions.

You should turn on Reveal Codes if you want to undelete codes.

Steps

1	Choose Undelete from the Edit menu.

2	Choose Restore to restore your last deletion.

or

Choose Previous or Next to cycle through your last three deletions, then choose Restore when you see the one you want to undelete.

You can use Undelete to move text. Simply delete the text you want to move, place the insertion point where you want the text, then undelete it.

See Also

Delete (Text)

Reveal Codes

Undo or Redo


Update

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Update

Purpose

Use Update to update a linked spreadsheet or database manually.

Steps

1	Choose Spreadsheet/Database from the Insert menu, then choose Update.

2	Choose Yes.

See Also

Link Options


View File Location Preferences (File Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, File, View All

Purpose

Use View All to view the directories you have specified for all File Preferences categories.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Choose View All.

3	Choose Close to return to the File Preferences dialog box.

See Also

File Preferences


Watermark Feature Bar

Format, Watermark, Edit

Purpose

Use the Watermark feature bar to access options used to create and edit watermarks. You can also access many functions on the menu bar.

Steps

1	While in Page view, move the insertion point to a page where the watermark you want to edit is in effect.

2	Choose Watermark from the Format menu, select the watermark you want, then choose Edit.

3	Choose from the following Watermark feature bar options:

         	Image

Insert an image to use as a watermark.

         	File

Insert an existing file.

         	Pages

Specify the pages in your document where the watermark will appear (odd pages, even pages, or every page).

         	Shading

Adjust the shading (or brightness) of watermark image or watermark text.

         	Next

Move quickly to the next Watermark A or Watermark B used in your document.

         	Previous

Move quickly to the previous Watermark A or Watermark B used in your document.

         	Close

Exit the watermark, turn off the display of the Watermark feature bar, then return to your document text.

See Also

Watermark


Watermark

Format, Watermark

Purpose

Use Watermark to add a drawing, chart, logo, clip art image, table, or typed text behind the printed document text.

Steps

1	In Page view, place the insertion point on the page where you want the watermark to begin.

2	Choose Watermark from the Format menu, then choose Watermark A or Watermark B.

3	Choose Create.

4	Choose Pages from the Watermark feature bar, then select the pages where you want the watermark to appear.

5	Choose Image from the Watermark feature bar, specify the path and filename of the image, then choose OK.

or

Choose File from the Watermark feature bar, specify the path and filename of the file, then choose OK.

6	Choose Close from the feature bar until you return to your document.

See Also

Watermark Feature Bar


Word Spacing and Letterspacing

Format, Typesetting, Word/Letter Spacing

Purpose

Use Word Spacing and Letterspacing to increase or decrease the space between words and letters in your document.

Steps

1	Choose Typesetting from the Format menu, then choose Word/Letter Spacing.

2	Select one of the following options:

         	Normal

Use settings chosen by the font manufacturer.

         	WordPerfect Optimal

Use settings chosen by Corel Corporation.

         	Percent of Optimal

Set your own spacing and specify a spacing value and pitch setting.

You can set a spacing value of your own that is a percent of the optimal setting. Numbers less than 100% reduce the amount of space between words and letters, while numbers greater than 100% increase the amount of space.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Automatic Kerning

Baseline Placement for Typesetting

Line Height (Leading) Adjustment

Manual Kerning

Word Spacing Justification Limits


Wrap Text

Graphics, Edit Box, Wrap

Purpose

Use Wrap Text to specify how the document text will flow around a graphics box or follow the contour of an image within the box.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Wrap.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Wrap from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Wrap.

3	Select a Wrapping Type option.

You can use the Contour option to change the amount of white space around an image.

4	Select a Wrap Text Around option.

You can use the Largest Side option to make the document text flow on the side of the image that has the most white space.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box feature bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Position

Space (Customize Border)


Writing Tools Preferences

Edit, Preferences, Writing Tools

Purpose

Use Writing Tools Preferences to specify the tools (such as Spell Checker, Thesaurus, and Grammatik) that you want to appear on the Tools menu.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Writing Tools.

2	Select those tools from the Available Tool Items list box you want to display on the Tools menu.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Grammatik

Spell Check

Thesaurus

Tools Menu


Zoom

View, Zoom

Purpose

Use Zoom to specify the size of on-screen text and graphics. You cannot use Zoom in Two Page view.

Steps

1	Choose Zoom from the View menu.

2	Specify the zoom percentage you want.

or

Select Margin Width, Page Width, Full Page, or Other.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

 	Zoom Equation Display


Zoom Equation Display

Graphics, Equation, View, Zoom Display

Purpose

Use the Zoom Equation Display option to enlarge or reduce the display size of an equation in the display pane.

Steps

1	Choose Equation from the Graphics menu, then create an equation or use an existing equation.

2	Choose View, then choose Zoom Display.

3	Specify the zoom percentage you want.

or

Select Equation Height, Equation Width, Full Equation, or Other.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Zoom


key (def)
key

Defines the order of priority for the items to be sorted. You can sort using multiple keys, such as last name, first name, ZIP Code.


Automatic Font Change

Format, Font, Font Map, Automatic Font Change (AFC)

Purpose

An automatic font change (AFC) occurs when WordPerfect automatically chooses a font for an attribute or character map you select.

Use the default settings for AFCs or specify the font you want to use when you choose an attribute or a character map.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Font Map.

2	Select Automatic Font Change, then select the font you want from the Printer Font box.

3	Select the attribute or character map you want to edit from the Automatic Font Change list box.

4	If you want, select Map Individual Styles, then select the font face and the font style you want to use for the new automatic font change.

5	Choose OK.

If you want to use the Automatic Font Changes WordPerfect originally used, select Automatic Selection.

See Also

Code Page (Font Mapping)

Display (Font Mapping)

Document (Font Mapping)

Edit Printer/Document Font Mapping


Display (Font Mapping)

Format, Font, Font Map, Display

Purpose

Use Display (Font Mapping) to display a higher resolution font on screen, yet still print your documents in the font you originally selected.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Font Map.

2	Select Display in the Item to Map group box.

3	In the Display Font group box, select the font face and the font style you want to display on screen.

If your current font is a printer font, you can replace it with a graphics font (ATM, TrueType, etc.), which may result in a sharper display resolution.

4	Choose OK.

If you want to use the Display font selections WordPerfect originally used, select Automatic Selection.

See Also

Automatic Font Change

Code Page (Font Mapping)

Document (Font Mapping)

Edit Printer/Document Font Mapping


Document (Font Mapping)

Format, Font, Font Map, Document

Purpose

Use Document (Font Mapping) to change which font WordPerfect uses when the originally specified printer font is not available with the currently selected printer.

Steps

1	Open the document you plan to print with a different printer.

2	Choose Font from the Format menu, then choose Font Map.

3	Select Document in the Item to Map group box.

4	In the Printer Font group box, select the font face and the font style you want to use when the originally selected Document Font is not available.

5	Choose OK.

If you want to use the Document font selections WordPerfect originally used, select Automatic Selection.

See Also

Automatic Font Change

Code Page (Font Mapping)

Display (Font Mapping)

Edit Printer/Document Font Mapping


Find Text Action Options

Edit, Find and Replace, Action, Select Match or Position Before or Position After or Extend Selection

Purpose

Use Find Text Action options to find and highlight a specified word or phrase or to specify the position of the insertion point when you use Find.

Steps

1	Choose Find and Replace from the Edit menu, then choose Action.

2	Choose from the following options:

         	Select Match

Find and select a specified word or phrase.

         	Position Before

Place the insertion point before the text you want to find.

         	Position After

Place the insertion point after the text you want to find.

         	Extend Selection

Select text from the insertion point to a word in the text you have specified.

See Also

Find and Replace Text


Find and Replace Text Direction

Edit, Find and Replace, Direction

Purpose

Use the Direction options to specify which direction you want WordPerfect to search.

Steps

1	Choose Find and Replace from the Edit menu, then choose Direction.

2	Choose one of the following options:

         	Forward

Search from the insertion point to the end of the document.

         	Backward

Search from the insertion point backward to the beginning of the document.

If you have first chosen Wrap at Beg./End of Document from the Options menu, the search will "wrap" from the insertion point to the end of the document, then from the beginning of the document back to the insertion point.

See Also

Find and Replace Text


Converting and Hiding Comments

Insert, Comment, Convert to Text

Purpose

Use Converting and Hiding Comments to convert an existing comment to text, to convert text to a comment, and to hide comments you create.

Steps

To convert a comment to text,

1	Place the insertion point after the comment you want to convert to text.

2	Choose Comment from the Insert menu, then choose Convert to Text.

To convert text to a comment,

1	Select the text you want to convert.

2	Choose Comment from the Insert menu, then choose Create.

To hide a comment,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Document, then deselect Comments.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

If you want comments to display, repeat step 1, then select Comments.

See Also

Comment

Display Preferences


TextArt

Graphics, TextArt

Purpose

Use TextArt to add an outline, a fill pattern, a shadow, or a shape to a text image.

Steps

1	Choose TextArt from the Graphics menu.

2	If you want help on a TextArt feature, choose Index from the TextArt Help menu.

or

Choose TextArt to open TextArt Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy the WPTAUS.HLP file to your WordPerfect directory (for example, c:\office\wpwin).


Document Information

File, Document Info

Purpose

Use this feature to count the characters, words, lines, sentences, paragraphs, and pages in a document.

Steps

1	Choose Document Info from the File menu.

See Also

Document Summary


What's New

Whether you're a new or an advanced WordPerfect user, you'll find WordPerfect 6.1 for Windows is quick and easy to use.

The following are enhancements made since the initial release of WordPerfect 6.0 for Windows. You may suggest enhancements by calling our Make-It-Perfect hotline at (800) 861-3367.

Write Better

     	Grammatik 6 identifies grammar errors in your document and then rewrites sentences for you when you click Replace.

     	Find and Replace finds and replaces word forms, as well as words, phrases, and codes.

     	Thesaurus lets you look up words using any form. Once you select a new word, Thesaurus inserts the new word in the same form as the original word.

     	QuickCorrect automatically corrects spelling, capitalization, and more, as you type.

Work Smarter and Faster

     	Document Experts, included in over 50 document templates, simplify the process of creating many common documents, such as letters, calendars, and fax cover sheets.

     	Table Expert offers predefined table formats that you can quickly apply to your tables.

     	Make It Fit Expert reformats your document to fit on the number of pages you want it to.

     	QuickFormat lets you copy formatting styles throughout a document. When you change the style in one place, the same style is updated automatically in the rest of the document.

     	Create a chart from a table in your document, then have the chart automatically update when you make changes to the table.

     	Drop Cap offers 12 predefined styles of drop caps for paragraph beginnings and also lets you customize your own.

     	Undo and Redo catalog up to 300 of your last editing and formatting actions, so you can go back and undo or redo anything you decide to change.

     	Template Macros let you play, record, and edit macros assigned to specific templates.

     	QuickSelect gives you shortcuts for selecting a sentence, paragraph, page, table elements, or the entire document.

     	Cut and Paste cleans up after itself by adding or deleting spaces where needed when you cut, paste, or drag and drop words and phrases.

     	Paste Simple lets you make cut or copied text look the same as existing text at the insertion point.

     	With Drag to Create, you can insert images and size any type of graphics box by clicking and dragging anywhere in your document.

     	Open As Copy lets you open a read-only copy of a document. You can then use the document as a model for a new document without worrying that you will overwrite and lose the original document.

Make the Transition Easier

     	Compatibility allows for quick document conversion for WordPerfect 5.x and other file formats.

     	Upgrade Expert helps you learn new commands so you can quickly become comfortable using WPWin 6.1.

     	Getting Help includes an expanded How Do I section, an examples index, and Coaches you can select while you are in Help.

     	Coaches, including the QuickStart Coach, help you learn or review features.

Integrate Perfectly

     	WordPerfect 6.1 for Windows shares a common interface with other suite applications.

     	PerfectFit Technology lets suite applications running under Windows share a number of features and capabilities, including a common macro language.

     	PerfectScript, a cross-product macro language, lets users create automated processes for multiple applications. For example, you can create a letter in WordPerfect and merge it with data from Quattro Pro.

     	OLE 2 improves in-place editing, drag-and-drop across programs and document windows, and linking or embedding of any OLE object.

     	Uninstall lets you uninstall just as easily as you installed.

     	Supports Universal Naming Convention (UNC).

     	OBEX lets you share data with other users across a network, phone line, or other method of communication. You can easily exchange data with other OBEX-enabled applications such as Quattro Pro and Paradox.

     	With ODBC support, WPWin 6.1 supports the latest database technology, including Microsoft Access and Lotus Notes.

     	TWAIN Support lets you include images from your scanner directly into your document.

     	ODMA Support provides tight integration with Document Management software, most notably SoftSolutions.

See Also

Enhancements Since WPWin 5.2


ALL OTHERS

Format, Page, Paper Size, [ALL OTHERS], Select

Purpose

Use the [ALL OTHERS] paper definition only when you want to create a definition that can be used with any printer or when you want to use a paper definition in the current document only.

WordPerfect printer drivers use the [ALL OTHERS] definition when the paper size defined in the document does not match a definition on the list.

Steps

1	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Paper Size.

2	Highlight the [ALL OTHERS] paper definition at the bottom of the list, then choose Select.

The [ALL OTHERS] option is available only if you are using a WordPerfect printer driver.

3	Choose a paper type from the Paper Type drop-down list.

4	Specify a Paper Size.

You can also choose a paper orientation.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

 	Edit Paper Size [ALL OTHERS]


Delete a Paper Definition

Format, Page, Paper Size, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete a Paper Definition to delete a paper definition from the Paper Size dialog box.

Steps

1	Choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Paper Size.

2	Select the paper definition that you want to delete, choose Delete, then choose Yes.

3	Choose Close.

See Also

Create or Edit Paper Size or Create Envelope Definition


logical page (def)
logical page

A defined area inside the physical page (the entire page). You can have several logical pages on one physical page.


physical page (def)
physical page

The area on a piece of paper that is printable. The physical page can be divided into several logical pages.


OLE (def)
OLE

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) lets you link or embed an object from one application into a document in a different application.


link (def)
link

A link forms a connection between a server application and your document so that when you change information in the server application, it is automatically changed in your document.


Record/Play/Edit a Template Macro

Tools, Template Macro, Record or Play or Edit

Purpose

You can record, play, or edit a template macro. You can also assign a template macro to a keyboard, Toolbar, or menu bar.

A template macro is a macro attached to a template. It can only be played from that template and is not listed with your standard macros.

Steps

To record a template macro,

1	Open the template you want to attach the macro to.

2	Choose Template Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Record.

3	Specify the name and location of the macro, then choose Record.

4	Use WordPerfect as you normally would to accomplish the task you want recorded.

WordPerfect records commands and text you type from the keyboard, as well as menu selections with the mouse. However, you must use the keyboard, and not the mouse, to position the insertion point.

5	To stop recording the macro, choose Template Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Record.

To play a template macro,

1	Open the template that the macro is attached to.

2	Choose Template Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Play.

3	Specify the name and location of the macro, then choose Play.

To edit a template macro,

1	Open the template that the macro is attached to.

2	Choose Template Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Edit.

3	Specify the name and location of the macro, then choose Edit.

4	Type in new commands or edit existing ones.

or

Choose Command Inserter on the Macro feature bar, then select macro commands.

You can choose the Play button from the Template Macro feature bar to run the macro before saving it.

5	Choose Save & Compile from the Template Macro feature bar, then choose Close Macro from the Options button on the feature bar.

To assign a template macro,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click on Toolbar, Menu Bar, or Keyboard.

2	Choose Edit.

3	Select Play a Macro, then choose Add Template Macro.

4	Specify the name and location of the macro, then choose Select.

5	Choose Close twice.

See Also

About Macros

About Templates

Macro Feature Bar

Macro Location

Pause

Record/Play/Edit a Macro


range (def)
range

A range is a selection of cells. In a spreadsheet, a range is defined by an upper left cell and a lower right cell. A colon or period is used to separate the two cell addresses. For example, a range could be defined as A1:C5 or A1.C5.


field (def)
field

A field is a space set aside for a specific piece of information. In a database each field usually has a name or heading.


link icons (def)
link icons

Link icons are inserted when a spreadsheet or database is imported. An icon is placed where the link begins and ends. The icons are never printed.


Tab Key

Purpose

Use the Tab key to indent a single line of text and to align columns of text.

Instead of a tab, you may want to use Indent to indent all lines of a paragraph. Use Tables to enter information in columns and rows. Use Columns to vertically or horizontally divide text on a page.

Steps

1	Press Tab to move the insertion point to the next tab setting.

2	To move back a tab, press Shift+Tab.

In a table, pressing the tab key moves the cursor to the next cell. For more on tab key movement in tables, see Keystrokes.

See Also

Back Tab

Columns

Indent

Tab Set


Font Size

Format, Font, Size

Purpose

Use this feature to change the size of fonts in your document.

Steps

To change font size,

1	Choose Font from the Format menu.

2	Click the font size you want to use in the Font Size list box, then choose OK.

3	Type the text you want.

To change the font size of existing text,

1	Select the text you want to change.

2	Choose Font from the Format menu.

3	Click the font size you want to use in the Font Size list box, then choose OK.

See Also

Bold

Font

Italic

QuickSelect

Select

Underline


Decimal Tabs

Purpose

Use a Decimal Tab to align text on a specific character. To set a decimal tab, see Tab Set.

Steps

1	Press the tab key to move to a previously assigned decimal tab setting.

2	Type the text you want on the left of the decimal tab.

3	Type the decimal tab character (usually a decimal).

4	Type the text you want on the right of the decimal tab.

See Also

Decimal/Align Character

Tab Key

Tab Set


Set Tabs on the Ruler Bar

View, Ruler Bar

Purpose

Use the Ruler Bar to quickly move, set, and delete tabs.

Steps

1	Choose Ruler Bar from the View menu.

2	To delete a tab setting, drag it off the Ruler Bar.

3	To move an existing tab, drag it to a new position.

or

To move multiple tabs, press Shift, drag across the tabs to select them, release the Shift key, then drag the tabs to a new position.

4	To set a new tab, click on the Ruler Bar where you want a new tab.

5	To select a different type of tab or clear all tabs, click the right mouse button on a tab marker on the Ruler Bar, then choose a tab type or choose Clear All Tabs.

6	Choose Ruler Bar from the View menu to hide the Ruler Bar.

See Also

About Formatting

Ruler Bar

Ruler Bar (Display Preferences)

Tab Key

Tab Set


Dot Leader Character

Format, Line, Tab Set, Dot Leader Character

Purpose

Use this feature to change the dot leader character from a dot to any character.

Steps

1	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Tab Set.

2	Delete the dot (.) in the Dot Leader Character text box.

3	Type a new keyboard character.

or

Press Ctrl+w, specify a WordPerfect character, then choose Insert and Close.

4	Specify the number of spaces you want between characters, then choose OK.

See Also

Tab Key

Tab Set


Decimal/Align Character

Format, Line, Tab Set, Align Character

Purpose

Use Decimal/Align Character to change the alignment character used for a decimal tab setting. The default align character is a decimal point (.).

Steps

1	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Tab Set.

2	Delete the decimal point (.) in the Character text box.

3	Type a new keyboard character in the Character text box.

or

Press Ctrl+w, specify a WordPerfect character, then choose Insert and Close.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Tab Set

WordPerfect Characters


Draft view (def)
draft view

Draft view imitates a partial WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) environment. WordPerfect displays your document close to the way it will look when it is printed. You can usually work faster in Draft view because features such as headers, footers, watermarks, and certain formatting features do not appear.


Page view (def)
page view

Page view is a full WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) environment. In addition to matching fonts and appearance features, information is formatted in the document window as it will look when it is printed (for example, document headers, footers, footnotes, watermarks, rotated text, and label arrangements are displayed). Because information in Page view appears as it will when it is printed, information which does not print (such as a comment) is displayed as an icon.


Two Page view (def)
two page view

Two Page view is similar to Page view, except that two consecutive pages are displayed side by side in the document window.


Additional Objects Template

Edit, Preferences, File, Templates, Additional Objects Template, Update Default Template from Additional Objects Template

Purpose

The additional objects template acts as an alternative template to provide objects (keyboards, menus, template macros, Toolbars, and styles) in addition to or in place of those on your default template.

The additional objects are made available, but they do not overwrite the default template unless you select Update Default Template from Additional Objects Template in File Preferences. Selecting this option enables system administrators to use a network template as an additional objects template and have it overwrite every user's default template.

If your default template is unavailable and no additional template is specified, WordPerfect automatically creates the standard system template upon startup.

Steps

To choose an Additional Objects Template,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose File.

2	Choose Templates.

3	Specify the path and filename of an Additional Directory.

4	Specify the name of the Additional Objects Template.

5	If you want your additional template to replace the default template, select Update Default Template from Additional Objects Template.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Template (File Preferences)


Bold

Format, Font, Bold

Purpose

Use Bold to make text darker.

Steps

To bold text,

1	Choose Font from the Format menu, choose Bold from the Appearance group box, then choose OK.

2	Type the text you want bolded.

3	Choose Font from the Format menu, choose Bold from the Appearance group box again, then choose OK to turn off Bold.

To bold existing text,

1	Select the text you want bolded.

2	Choose Font from the Format menu, choose Bold from the Appearance group box, then choose OK.

See Also

About Formatting

Font

Select

QuickSelect


Hard/Soft Return

Purpose

Text you type fills the current line then automatically wraps to the next line. A soft return (SRt) is entered for you.

You can use a hard return (HRt) to end the current line anywhere and begin a new line.

Steps

1	Press Enter to enter a hard return and begin a new line.

See Also

Hyphenation

Page Break

Reveal Codes


Send

File, Send

Purpose

Use Send to mail your current document, or selected text from your current document, while in WordPerfect for Windows. This option appears only when you have a Windows mail system installed.

Steps

To mail the current document,

1	If you have one mail system, choose Send from the File menu.

or

If you have more than one mail system available, choose Send, then choose the system you want.

2	Set mail options according to your mail system.

3	Send the mail, then exit to the WordPerfect document window.

To mail selected text from your current document,

1	Select the text you want to send.

2	Choose Send (where Send is the name of your mail system) from the File menu.

The selected text is inserted into your mail systems Message Box.

3	Set mail options according to your mail system.

4	Send the mail, then exit to the WordPerfect document window.

See Also

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences


record (def)
record

A series of related fields of information in a data file. Each record is separated by an ENDRECORD marker.


field (merge) (def)
field (merge)

The smallest unit of information in a data file record that can be referenced in a merge. A field can be one character or many.


data text file (def)
data text file

A data file for a merge. It is arranged in text format containing fields and records separated by merge codes.


data table file (def)
data table file

A data file for a merge. It is arranged in table format. Each column of the table contains a field. Each row contains a record.


form file (def)
form file

A form file (known in previous versions of WordPerfect as a primary merge file) controls the merge output when merging with a data file, the keyboard, or ASCII delimited text files.


associated merge files (def)
associated merge files

An association between a form file and a data file. An association means that the two files go together. WordPerfect keeps track of associations so you do not have to.


Arranging Windows

Purpose

Use the document Control menu to arrange windows.

Steps

To move a document window with the mouse,

1	Drag the title bar to move the document window to a new location.

To move a document window with the keyboard,

1	Choose Move from the Control menu.

2	Use arrow keys to move the window, then press Enter to anchor it.

See Also

Cascade

Sizing Windows

Tile Windows

Windowing


Sizing Windows

Purpose

Use the document Control menu to minimize, maximize, and size windows.

Steps

To minimize a document window,

1	Click the minimize arrow (down arrow) in the upper right corner of a restored document window.

or

Choose Minimize from the document Control menu.

To maximize a document window,

1	To maximize a restored document, click the maximize arrow (up arrow) in the upper right corner of the document window.

or

Double-click a document title bar.

2	To maximize a minimized document, click on a document icon to open the Control menu, then choose Maximize.

To size a document window with the mouse,

1	Drag the left, right, or bottom side of a restored document window to stretch or shrink the size.

or

Drag the corner of the window to change the size in two directions at once.

To size a document window with the keyboard,

1	Choose Size from the document Control menu.

2	Use arrow keys to size the window, then press Enter to anchor it.

To restore a document window,

1	To restore a maximized document window, click the bottom Restore button in the upper right corner of a maximized document window.

or

Choose Restore from the document Control menu to restore a document window to medium size.

2	To restore a minimized document, click on a document icon to open the Control menu, then choose Restore.

or

Double-click the document icon to restore the document.

See Also

Arranging Windows

Windowing


Outline Options

Tools, Outline, Options

Purpose

Choose from the following topics for information on creating or editing an outline definition:

Define Outline

End Outline

Change Outline Level

Set Paragraph Number

Show Level Icons

See Also

Edit Outline Definition

Styles


Counters

Tools, Cross-Reference, Reference, Counter

Purpose

Use this feature to select a counter to tie a cross-reference to.

Steps

1	Choose Cross-Reference from the Tools menu, then choose Counter from the Reference pop-up list.

2	Select the counter you want, then choose OK.

See Also

Counter Numbering

Create or Edit Counter Definition

Cross-Reference Feature Bar


floating cell (def)
floating cell

Unlike a table cell, which is surrounded by table lines, a floating cell is a pair of codes you can insert in your document. You can use floating cells to reference data in tables, columns, rows, cells, ranges, or other floating cells. Floating cells are always used outside of tables.


Fax

File, Print

Purpose

After you install a fax program, you can fax from within WordPerfect, either on your machine or on a network server. The name of the installed fax driver appears in the list of available printers in the Select Printer dialog box.

Steps

To set up and select a fax driver,

1	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Select.

2	Highlight the fax driver you want to use, then choose Setup from the Options pop-up list.

The setup dialog box for your fax driver will appear, allowing you to specify how and where your fax will be sent.

3	When you finish setting up your fax driver, return to the Select Printer dialog box, then choose Select.

To send a fax,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Confirm that the current printer is a fax driver.

3	Specify the portion of the current document you want to fax and any print options you want.

4	Choose Print to begin faxing.

See Also

Select Printer


Address Book (Templates)

File, New, highlight a template, Select, Address Book

Purpose

Use the Address Book to keep a list of addresses of people and organizations. When you use a template that requires address information, you can select it from the Address Book instead of typing it in each time.

Steps

To use the Address Book,

1	Choose New from the File menu.

2	Highlight a template that requires address information (such as a  fax), then choose Select.

3	Choose Address Book, highlight a name, then choose Select.

To add or edit names and addresses,

1	Choose New from the File menu, highlight a template, then choose Select.

2	Choose Address Book.

3	Highlight a name, then choose Delete.

or

Choose Edit or Add, type information in the available fields, then choose OK.

See Also

Create or Edit Templates

New Document/Template

Personal Information

Template Information


Show Level Icons

Tools, Outline, Options, Show Level Icons

Purpose

Use Show Level Icons to hide or display indicators of outline levels.

Steps

1	Choose Outline from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Show Level Icons from the Options drop-down list on the Outline feature bar.

See Also

Change Outline Level

Create an Outline

Edit Outline Definition

End Outline

File Preferences


OS/2 Integration

Help, OS/2 Tools Integration

Purpose

Use this feature to learn more about OS/2 Tools Integration features.

Steps

1	Choose OS/2 Information from the Help menu.


Downloading and Installing Soft Fonts

File, Print, Initialize

Purpose

In order to use the soft fonts you installed you must download them from your computer to your printer.

To download soft fonts that you have marked with an asterisk (*) from your computer to your printer, you need to initialize the printer each time you turn it on.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Choose Initialize.

If you have selected a network printer, the Initialize option may be unavailable or you might be prompted for a password. See your system administrator.

See Also

Select Fonts


Rename Abbreviations/Toolbar/ Keyboard/Menu Bar

Edit, Preferences, Toolbar or Keyboard or Menu Bar, Rename

Insert, Abbreviations, Rename

Purpose

Use this feature to rename an existing abbreviation, Toolbar, keyboard, or menu bar.

Steps

1	Use one of the routes above ( [image]) to display the Rename dialog box.

2	Type a new name in the Rename text box, then choose OK.

See Also

Toolbar/Power Bar Editor

Copy Abbreviations/Toolbar/ Keyboard/Menu Bar

Keyboard Editor

Menu Bar Editor


Macros Included with WordPerfect

The following list contains a brief description of the macros that are included with WordPerfect 6.1 for Windows. Most of the macros are represented by buttons on Toolbars. You can also play them separately.

Macro Name and Description

     	_AUTOFIL.WCM

Used by templates created in WPWIN 6.0 to automate the template fill—in process. Templates created in 6.0a do not use this macro.

     	ABBREV.WCM

Lets you create and expand multiple abbreviations.

     	ADRS2MRG.WCM

Copies the address book (for automated templates) into a merge data file.

     	ADRSBOOK.WCM

Opens the address book.

     	ALLFONTS.WCM

Creates a document listing every font available to the current printer and some sample text in each font.

     	CAPITAL.WCM

Capitalizes the first letter of the current word.

     	CLIPBRD.WCM

Opens the Windows Clipboard.

     	CLOSEALL.WCM

Closes all open documents and prompts you to save the modified ones.

     	CLOSING.WCM

Closes a letter.

     	COPYQPW.WCM

Copies a Quattro Pro Notebook selection to WordPerfect.

     	CTRLM.WCM

Activates the Macro Command Inserter.

     	CTRLSFTF.WCM

For Equation Editor, prompts for FROM and TO values.

     	ENDFOOT.WCM

Converts endnotes to footnotes in the document or in selected text.

     	EPUB.WCM

Publishes current document electronically.

     	EXPNDALL.WCM

Expands all abbreviations in the document in one step.

     	FILESTMP.WCM

Places the filename and path of the current document in a header or footer.

     	FONTDN.WCM

Decreases the font size of the selected text by 2 points.

     	FONTUP.WCM

Increases the font size of the selected text by 2 points.

     	FOOTEND.WCM

Converts footnotes to endnotes in the document or selected text.

     	GOTODOS.WCM

Opens a DOS window.

     	INSERT.WCM

Inserts a letter file into the current document.

     	LETTER.WCM

Addresses and formats a letter.

     	LINENUM.WCM

Places the insertion point at a specified line and character for troubleshooting macros.

     	MCVTWIN.WCM

Converts WordPerfect 5.1 and 5.2 for Windows macros to 6.1 format.

     	PAGEXOFY.WCM

Places "Page x of y pages" (or other pagination formats) in a specified position on the page.

     	PARABRK.WCM

Inserts graphical paragraph breaks between paragraphs.

     	PGBORDER.WCM

Uses graphics (.WPG files) to create decorative page borders.

     	PLEADING.WCM

Creates pleading lines and numbers.

     	PROMPTS.WCM

Helps you create prompts for automated templates.

     	QUICKCPY.WCM

Copies currently selected item from Quattro Pro to WordPerfect.

     	READCLP.WCM

Reads text in the clipboard. Requires ProVoice or Monologue text to speech software.

     	READFILE.WCM

Reads a text file or plays a .WAV, .AVI, or .MID file. Requires ProVoice or Monologue text to speech software.

     	READSEL.WCM

Reads text selected in the document. Requires ProVoice or Monologue text to speech software.

     	REVERSE.WCM

Creates white text on black background (or other color options as set by the user) in selected text or table cells.

     	SAVEALL.WCM

Prompts you to save open documents.

     	TCONVERT.WCM

Converts WPWIN 6.0 templates that used the _AUTOFIL.WCM macro.

     	TRANSPOS.WCM

Transposes the two characters preceding the insertion point.

     	WATERMRK.WCM

Prompts for text or watermark graphic that will be placed in a watermark (centered vertically and horizontally).

To open the Macros manual, choose Macros from Help Contents, or click Macros Help Manual. If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy the WPMH61US.HLP file to the main WordPerfect directory (for example, c:\office\wpwin).


About Templates

Every document you create in WordPerfect is based on a template. A blank document is based on the standard template, which defines the margins, tab settings, and even the Toolbar you see when you start WordPerfect.

Besides the standard template, WordPerfect provides many different templates for you to use. By simply selecting a template and typing your own text, you can quickly create such things as newsletters, memos, faxes, and resumes, without having to do the formatting yourself.

You can also create your own templates and use them again and again. When you create a template, you can include text and formatting, and you can associate other program options with your template. These options (called "objects") can include Toolbars, keyboards, menu bars, macros, styles, abbreviations, and WordPerfect documents.

For example, you could retrieve a newsletter you have already created and make it a template. You could then associate a Toolbar with the template that contains all the features that you use when you create newsletters. Perhaps you might put the REVERSE.WCM macro (included with WordPerfect) on this Toolbar so that you could create reversed text (white on black) simply by pressing a button. All these objects would be there every time you retrieve the newsletter template.

Templates you create can also perform automatic functions, such as playing a macro or prompting you for information. For example, you could create a macro "trigger" that lets you spell-check your document before you print. Or, if you create letters and envelopes for mass mailings, the template you are using could trigger the ADRS2MRG.WCM macro (included with WordPerfect) that copies the Address Book into a merge data file.

For more information about templates, see the following:

     	Selecting a Template

New Document/Template

     	Creating a Template

Address Book

Associate (Templates)

Build Prompts

Create or Edit Templates

Delete or Copy Template

Macro Triggers


QuickCorrect

Tools, QuickCorrect

Purpose

Use QuickCorrect to automatically replace your common spelling errors and mistyped words or to expand abbreviations. You can also use QuickCorrect to match open and close quotes (called SmartQuotes) and to automatically correct sentence problems, such as initial double uppercase and double spacing between words.

Steps

1	Choose QuickCorrect from the Tools menu.

2	In the Replace field, type the incorrect spelling of a word you commonly misspell or mistype, or type an abbreviation that you want expanded in your document.

3	In the With field, type the correct spelling of the misspelled or mistyped word, or type the expanded word(s) of the abbreviation.

4	Choose Add Entry.

5	Continue adding words to the Replace and With fields.

6	To delete an entry, select it in the list box, then choose Delete Entry.

7	Choose Options, then choose from any of the following options:

         	Capitalize First Letter

Automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence. The first letter of a word will also be capitalized if it is preceded by four or more spaces.

         	Correct Two Irregular Capitals

Automatically converts two initial capital letters of a word to an initial capital letter and a lowercase second letter (for example, from THe to The).

         	Double Space to Single Space

Automatically eliminates double spaces between words in a sentence.

         	Single Space to Two Spaces

Automatically converts a single space at the end of a sentence to two spaces.

         	Two Spaces to Single Space

Automatically converts two spaces at the end of a sentence to a single space.

         	Turn On Single Quotes/Turn On Double Quotes

Lets you use the quotation characters you have selected from the drop-down list.

         	Use Regular Quotes with Numbers

Lets you use a straight line quote following typed numbers instead of the single or double close quote.

8	Choose OK.

9	Make sure Replace Words as You Type is selected, then choose Close to return to your document.

Now, when you type text that is identical to the complete misspelled or abbreviated word, it is automatically replaced with the correct text the moment you press the space bar.

See Also

Configure SmartQuotes

Spell Check


Dither Method

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Image Settings, Print Parameters

Purpose

Use Dither Method to generate printed images. Dithering is a method of combining several different colored pixels (or screen dots) to create a new color.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Image Tools.

3	Click [image] to enter the Image Settings dialog box.

4	Choose Print Parameters.

5	Choose one of the following options (some options may be unavailable depending on your printer driver):

         	Error Diffusion

Creates a random pattern of dots to create smoother gradient transitions in color and gray-scale images. Use with bitmap images.

         	Ordered Dither

Creates sort ordered patterns of pixels to simulate colors or shades of gray. Use with bitmap or vector images.

         	Halftoning

Creates evenly spaced dots of variable diameter to simulate colors or shades of gray. Use with bitmap or vector images.

Note that your printer's resolution determines the accuracy of a printed halftone image. An increase in printer resolution will improve the appearance of an image.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Dither Source

Halftone Options

Image Tools


Dither Source

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Image Settings, Print Parameters

Purpose

Use Dither Source to specify where the bitmap or vector image is converted into the final format for printing.

A bitmap image is composed of tiny dots called pixels. Each pixel in the image is treated as an individual object. When a bitmap is printed or enlarged, the edges may look jagged.

A vector image is one complete object and is treated that way. When printed or enlarged, it maintains a high resolution.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Image Tools.

3	Click [image] to enter the Image Settings dialog box.

4	Choose Print Parameters.

5	Choose an option from the Dither Source group box:

Either option may be dimmed (unavailable), depending on the printer driver you have selected.

         	WordPerfect

Select this option when you want WordPerfect to enhance the colors of an image.

         	Printer

Select this option when you want the Windows printer driver or the printer itself to enhance the colors of an image.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Dither Method

Halftone Options

Image Tools


Halftone Options

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Image Settings, Print Parameters

Purpose

Depending on the resolution (or dots per inch) of your printer, you can adjust the lines per inch (lpi) using Halftone Options to increase or decrease the sharpness of your halftone image. You can also specify the line angle if you are using a PostScript printer.

The following summarizes the quality of a halftone image:

     	Increase the LPI

Image sharpness is higher. Gray shading is less.

     	Decrease the LPI

Image sharpness is lower. Gray shading is more.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Image Tools.

3	Click [image] to enter the Image Settings dialog box.

4	Choose Print Parameters.

5	Choose from the following options:

Either option may be dimmed (unavailable), depending on the printer driver you have selected.

         	Angle

Specify the pattern orientation of a printed halftone image.

         	Lines Per Inch

Specify the lines per inch of a halftone image.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Dither Method

Dither Source

Image Tools


Configure SmartQuotes

Tools, QuickCorrect, Options

Purpose

This feature allows you to type in straight single and double quotes and have WordPerfect automatically convert them to paired (open and close) quotes.

Steps

1	Choose QuickCorrect from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Options.

3	Select the character you want for single open and close quotes and double open and close quotes from the drop-down list.

or

Delete the character displayed in the Open or Close text box, press Ctrl+w, specify a WordPerfect character, then choose Insert and Close for each quote you want to change.

4	Make sure Turn On Single Quotes and Turn On Double Quotes are selected.

5	Select Use Regular Quotes with Numbers if you want to use a straight line quote following typed numbers, instead of the single or double close quote.

6	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

WordPerfect Characters


description

An explanatory title that you give to documents when you mail or publish them. Recipients see available Publications listed by their descriptions.


Image Print Parameters

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Image Settings, Print Parameters

Purpose

Use Image Print Parameters to specify one of three color or gray-scale blending methods for an image or to use lines per inch (lpi) to give you more control over the sharpness of a printed image.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box feature bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or

Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box feature bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Image Tools.

3	Click [image] to enter the Image Settings dialog box.

4	Choose Print Parameters.

5	Choose from the following options:

Dither Method

Dither Source

Halftone Options

See Also

Image Tools


Template Information

File, New, highlight a template, Select

Purpose

Use Template Information when you select a template that requests information. When you enter information in the Template Information dialog, it is automatically entered in the selected template.

Steps

1	Choose New from the File menu, highlight a template, then choose Select.

2	Type information in the available fields.

or

Choose the Address Book, select from the people and organizations you have previously entered, then choose Select.

or

Choose Personal Information and specify information about you or your organization, then choose OK.

For example, if you are creating a purchase order, you would specify Personal Information, so that information about your organization is copied to the order.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Address Book

Build Prompts

Create or Edit Templates

New Document/Template

Personal Information


Enhancements Since WPWin 5.2

The following are enhancements made since the initial release of WordPerfect 5.2 for Windows.

     	Customize WordPerfect Bars

Customize the Power Bar, menu bar, status bar, or Toolbar and bring the tools you need onto your work screen.

     	Do More with Tables

Use your mouse to make a table, adjust column widths, change the line and border style, and add a fill pattern. Convert data you've already formatted into a table. Use a table as a spreadsheet.

     	Manage Documents Better

From the Open File dialog box you can retrieve, copy, move, rename, or view a document (including graphics) in one location. You'll also find QuickList an especially helpful feature when you want to access directories with long path names. And when you need to locate information fast, QuickFinder will list the files containing the word or phrase you specified.

     	Use Drawing Tools

Add graphics and charts without a separate drawing program, or enjoy total compatibility with Presentations. Sophisticated, easy-to-use drawing tools (such as Bezier curves, shading, and text on a curve) let you create and edit graphics with just a click of your mouse.

     	Create a Chart

Show off your numbers as a pie, bar, scatter, hi-lo, or area chart. You can make a chart from scratch, from WPWin tables, or from an imported spreadsheet.

     	Create Borders and Fill Patterns

Make your ideas stand out with borders and fill patterns for a table, column, paragraph, or page. Select a border or fill pattern or customize your own.

     	New Clipart and Graphics Features

Retrieve images and edit them in-place using your mouse.

See Also

What's New


Upgrade Expert

Help, Upgrade Expert

Purpose

Upgrade Expert provides an explanation of features, terminology, and keystroke information for users making the change from another word processor or different versions of WordPerfect to WordPerfect 6.1 for Windows.

Steps

1	Choose Upgrade Expert from the Help menu.

See Also

Keystrokes


Personal Information

File, New, highlight a template, Select, Personal Info

Purpose

You can enter personal information and use it with the current template or with all future templates. The Personal Information dialog is accessed from any template which requires personal information.

Steps

1	Choose New from the File menu.

2	Highlight a template that requires personal information (such as an expense report), then choose Select.

3	Choose Personal Information, then type information in the available fields.

4	If you want this information to be used with other templates, choose Save as Default.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Address Book

Build Prompts

Create or Edit Templates

New Document/Template

Template Information


Uninstall

Purpose

Use Uninstall to remove WordPerfect files and directories created during the installation process.

Steps

1	Double-click the Setup icon in the WordPerfect Program group in the Windows Program Manager.

2	Choose Uninstall.

3	Choose Standard or Custom.

4	If you want help on Uninstall, choose Help from an Uninstall dialog box.

or

Choose Uninstall to open the Uninstall Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy the WPGIUS.HLP file to your main WordPerfect directory (for example, c:\office\wpwin).


Object Exchange

Object Exchange (OBEX) options will let you subscribe to and publish data.

These options are available only if you have installed WordPerfect with the suite.

For more information about OBEX options, choose from the following topics:

Address Book

Poll Now

Publish Issue

Publish New

Subscribe


Paste Simple

Edit, Cut or Copy

Purpose

Use Paste Simple to make cut or copied text look exactly like the existing text at the insertion point.

Steps

1	From the document window, select the part of text that you want to cut or copy.

2	Choose Cut or Copy from the Edit menu.

3	Place the insertion point where you want to paste the text.

4	Press Shift+Ctrl+V.

The pasted text will take on the font style and size, text color, and any attributes (such as bold or italics) of the existing text at the insertion point.

If you pasted the text on a blank line in your document, the text will take on the default font style, color, and size.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Paste Special


Insert File

Insert, File

Purpose

 Use Insert File to retrieve a document into the current document.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to insert a file in the open document window, then choose File from the Insert menu.

2	Type the filename.

3	Choose Insert, then choose Yes.

See Also

Opening Files

QuickList


Save As a .WPG

File, Save As

Purpose

When you create drawings or data charts, you can save your drawings or charts as separate graphics (.WPG) files using Save As. This allows you to use the images in other documents without having to recreate them all over again.

You can also save TextArt images as graphics (.WPG) files that can also be modified.

Steps

1	In a document window, select the drawing, chart, or TextArt, then choose Save As from the File menu.

2	Make sure WordPerfect Graphics 2.0 is selected from the Format drop-down list.

3	Type a filename, then choose OK.

See Also

TextArt

Use a Graphics Program


Launch Quattro Pro or Paradox

File, Quattro Pro or Paradox

Purpose

The options on the File menu let you launch Quattro Pro or Paradox from within WordPerfect.

The menu items appear only if you have installed Quattro Pro or Paradox as part of the suite.

Steps

To run Quattro Pro from WordPerfect,

1	Choose Suite from the File menu, then choose Quattro Pro.

To run Paradox from WordPerfect,

1	Choose Suite from the File menu, then choose Paradox.


Subscribe

File, Subscribe

Purpose

Use Subscribe to insert a published document into your document.

This option is available only if you have installed WordPerfect with the suite.

Steps

1	Choose Subscribe from the File menu.

2	Select a publication from the Description list box, then choose Insert.

You can also choose from the following options:

         	Delete

Delete a publication from the Description list box.

         	Show My Publications

See a list of documents you have published as well as those others have sent to you.

         	Notes

View notes made by the publisher for the selected version of the publication.

         	Select

Choose individual files from a multi-file publication.

         	Version

Choose the current version or a previous version (the publisher determines how many back versions you can access at one time).

         	Update Method

Choose to receive updates automatically or manually.

See Also

Poll Now

Publish New


Poll Now

Tools, Object Exchange, Poll Now

Purpose

Use Poll Now to receive publications others have published to you with Object Exchange. You must poll New before you subscribe to publications others sent since your last poll.

This option is available only if you have installed WordPerfect with the suite.

Steps

1	Choose Object Exchange from the Tools menu, then choose Poll Now.

2	Select the accounts/transports you want to poll, then choose Start Poll.

The time needed to poll accounts varies, depending on the type of account. A message at the bottom of the dialog box tells you which account is being polled. When the account name returns to "None," polling has finished.

3	Choose Cancel.

See Also

Address Book

Publish New

Subscribe


Publish New

File, Publish

Purpose

Use Publish New to send an initial version of a document to one or more Workgroup members.

This option is available only if you have installed WordPerfect with the suite.

Steps

1	Save the document, then choose Publish from the File menu.

2	Type in the subscribers.

or

Choose Address, select subscribers from the Names box, then choose OK.

3	Type a description in the Description text box.

Subscribers see available publications listed by description, so be sure to make the description meaningful.

4	Choose Publish.

You can also choose from the following options:

         	Notes

Create notes for this version that subscribers can access.

         	Number of Versions Stored

Set the number of versions of the publication available to a subscriber at any one time.

         	Poll on Publish

Poll the subscribers' accounts when you choose Publish to send the document to them.

See Also

Poll Now

Subscribe


Address Book (OBEX)

Tools, Object Exchange, Address Book

Purpose

Use this command to display the OBEX Address Book. Use the OBEX Address Book to enter addresses of people you want to publish documents to.

This option is available only if you have installed WordPerfect with the suite.

Steps

1	Choose Object Exchange from the Tools menu, then choose Address Book (see the OBEX Address Book's Help for more information on adding, removing, or changing address entries).

See Also

Publish New


Letters

Whether you are creating one letter or letters for mass mailings, you can use a preformatted letter template, or you can format your own.

Format a Letter

     	Use Flush Right

Place a line of text flush with the right margin, such as a date.

     	Use Date Text

Insert the current date or insert the date code that updates to the current date each time you retrieve a letter form.

     	Set Margins for Letterheads

When you have a logo on the first page, set the margin for that page, then use Delay Codes to reset margins for subsequent pages.

     	Number Pages

Automatically number pages; position the number on the page.

     	Create Headers/Footers

Repeat information at the top or bottom of each page (include page numbering).

     	Align Text Left, Right, Center, or Full

Position text at the left or right margin; center between margins; or space evenly between margins (justify).

     	Format Paragraphs

Specify how many spaces to insert between paragraphs and how much to indent the first line.

Create Letterheads and Watermarks

     	Retrieve Clip Art Images

Images retrieve into graphics boxes that you can then move and size with the mouse.

     	Try TextArt

Create text that can be shaped and contoured (for example, the title of a newsletter).

     	Create Watermarks

Use the watermark feature to turn a clip art image into an image behind text.

     	Create Lines

Make horizontal or vertical lines to divide elements on the page (for example, a letterhead or footer).

Highlight Text and Data

     	Indent

Use an indent to offset a paragraph from the margin; use a double indent to offset from both margins.

     	Use Bullets

Create bulleted lists for personal or technical information.

     	Create Tables

Format information in columns and rows; link a spreadsheet and update changes.

Create Letters for Mass Mailings

     	Use Merge

Create a form letter with standard text, then merge addresses and personal information from a data file or database.

See Also

Document Basics

Envelope

New Document/Template


Resumes

You can use a preformatted resume template or format your own.

Create Text Effects

     	Change Fonts

Change text appearance in titles and headings.

     	Create Reversed Text

Emphasize your name or business with white text on a black background.

     	Create Vertical Text

Place text down the side of the page by putting text in a box and rotating the contents.

Align Text

     	Center a Line

Center a line between left or right page/column margins, such as your name at the top of the page.

     	Use Flush Right

Place a line of text flush with the right margin, such as a date.

     	Indent

Use an indent to offset a paragraph from the margin; use a double indent to offset from both margins.

     	Align Text Left, Right, Center, or Full

Position text at the left or right margin; center between margins; or space evenly between margins (justify).

     	Create Columns

Format text in newspaper columns.

     	Create Tables

Format information in columns and rows; link a spreadsheet and update changes.

     	Use Bullets

Create bulleted lists for personal or technical information.

Add Lines and Borders

     	Create Lines

Make horizontal or vertical lines to divide elements on the page (for example, a letterhead or footer).

     	Create Borders

Place borders around a page, paragraph, or column; create your own border.

See Also

Document Basics

Letters

New Document/Template


Newsletters
Newsletters and Flyers

You can use a preformatted newsletter template, or you can format your own newsletters and flyers.

Change Size and Shape of Text

     	Change Fonts

Change text appearance in titles and headings.

     	Try TextArt

Create text that can be shaped and contoured.

     	Create Text as Graphics

Use an available graphics program to create text, then move and size it with the mouse.

     	Create a Text Box

Place text in a box with or without borders and fill colors. Position the box as a character, in columns, across columns, or on the page.

     	Create a Drop Cap

Enlarge the first letter of a paragraph.

     	Create Reversed Text

Emphasize your name or business with white text on a black background.

     	Create Vertical Text

Place text down the side of the page by putting text in a box and rotating the contents.

Format the Page

     	Make Text Fit Current Space

Use the Make It Fit Expert to format your text to fit the amount of space you specify.

     	Create Columns

Format text in newspaper columns.

     	Create Tables

Format information in columns and rows; link a spreadsheet and update it periodically.

     	Shade Columns and Rows in Tables

Make information in a table easier to read by shading columns or rows (or shade titles and headings).

Include Pictures, Charts, Lines, or Borders

     	Retrieve Clip Art Images

Images retrieve into graphics boxes that you can then move and size with the mouse.

     	Create Charts and Graphs

Use an available graphics program to create pie charts, bar graphs, and more.

     	Create Borders

Place borders around a page, paragraph, or column; create your own border.

     	Create Lines

Make horizontal or vertical lines to divide elements on the page (for example, a letterhead or footer).

See Also

Document Basics

New Document/Template

Papers, Books, Reports


Papers, Reports, Books
Papers, Books, Reports

You can use a preformatted report template, or you can format your own papers, books, and reports.

Create a Title Page

     	Center a Line

Center a line between left or right page/column margins, such as your name at the top of the page.

     	Use Date Text

Insert the current date or include a date code that updates to the current date every time you retrieve the document.

     	Create Borders

Place borders around a page, paragraph, or column; create your own border.

Create a Table of Contents or Outline

     	Use Flush Right

Place page numbers flush with the right margin and add dot leaders.

     	Generate a Table of Contents

Mark items you want in the table, then have WordPerfect build the table for you.

     	Create an Outline

Automatically number items using an outline style provided by WordPerfect or create your own numbering style.

Format the Body

     	Number Pages

Automatically number pages and position the page number.

     	Create Headers/Footers

Repeat information, including page numbering, on every page at either the top (header) or bottom (footer).

     	Create Footnotes/Endnotes

Place notes at the bottom of the correct page or place them at the end of the paper.

     	Create Columns

For business reports, place information in newspaper columns.

     	Create Tables

Format information in columns and rows for easy comparisons.

Format the End

     	Create a Bibliography

Use hanging indents.

     	Generate an Index or List

Mark items you want in the index or list, then have WordPerfect build it for you.

Save Time

     	Use Styles

If you have many headings, apply a heading style. This can simplify future editing changes. Instead of changing the size and appearance of each heading, you merely have to edit the style to make changes throughout your document.

     	Use Find and Replace

When changing a name or term that occurs throughout your document, use Find and Replace to make those changes for you.

     	Create a Master Document

Make one document that links to subdocuments; for example, the main book document could link to individual chapters.

See Also

Document Basics

New Document/Template

Newsletters and Flyers


Award Certificates
Awards Certificates

You can use a preformatted certificate template, or you can design your own awards certificates.

Print in Landscape Orientation (Wide Form)

     	Change Paper Size

Select a landscape paper size, or create one using the Wide Form option.

Create the Certificate Graphic

     	Create Borders

Place borders around a page, paragraph, or column; create your own border.

     	Retrieve Clip Art Images

Retrieve images, then size the box to the full page; WordPerfect includes several border images with its graphics.

     	Overlay Images (Wrap Text)

Retrieve more than one image and lay them on top of each other; to do so choose Wrap from the feature bar, then choose the No Wrap option.

To remove a border from around a graphic, select the graphic, choose Border/Fill from the Graphics feature bar, then choose None from the Border Style options.

     	Create Watermarks

Use the watermark feature to turn a clip art image into an image behind text.

Add Text

     	Try TextArt

Create text that can be shaped and contoured.

     	Create a Text Box

Type text in a text box, then move and size it with the mouse.

     	Overlay Text (Wrap Text)

Select a text box, choose Wrap from the feature bar, then choose the No Wrap option.

     	Use a Graphics Program

Use an available graphics program to create text and images.

See Also

Document Basics

New Document/Template


Calendars

You can create calendars using a preformatted calendar template, or you can design your own.

Create Calendar Structure

     	Create Tables

Format information in columns and rows.

     	Shade Columns and Rows in Tables

Make information in a table easier to read by shading every other column or row  (or shade titles and headings).

     	Change Table Lines and Fill Patterns

Alter table lines and borders; add shading and fill patterns.

     	Join Cells

Join cells to create a heading or empty calendar dates.

Add Text and Numbers

     	Format Tables

Change font and size of text and numbers; position and align.

     	Increment Numbers (Data Fill)

Quickly fill in an incrementing pattern of numbers in rows or columns. For calendars, unless the first falls on Sunday, begin with the second week. Type the correct dates in the first two cells of row two, select those cells and the rest of the table, then choose Data Fill from the Table menu.

Add Pictures

     	Retrieve Clip Art Images

Images retrieve into graphics boxes that you can then move and size with the mouse.

See Also

Awards Certificates

Document Basics

New Document/Template

Record Keeping Forms


Folded Documents
Folded and Bound Documents

You can create folded or bound documents, such as pamphlets, brochures, cards, and booklets.

Create a Folded Document

     	Print Several Pages on One Page

Subdivide the page so that you can include several pages on one physical page, then use Booklet Printing to arrange the pages.

     	Booklet Printing

Type the subdivided pages in the correct order, then have WordPerfect arrange the pages in the correct order and orientation for a folded booklet.

Create a Bound Document

     	Adjust Margins for Binding

Create a wider margin for the side you want to bind.

     	Print on Both Sides of the Page

If your printer supports duplexing, you can print on both sides of the page.

Print in Landscape Orientation (Wide Form)

     	Change Paper Size

Select a landscape paper size, or create one using the Wide Form option.

See Also

Document Basics

New Document/Template


Fax Forms and Memos

You can use a preformatted fax or memo template, or you can create your own.

Format Text

     	Change Tab Settings

Because memo headings (To, From, Date, Subject) vary in length, information does not always align at the same place when you press Tab or Indent. Fix this by removing the first tab setting.

     	Use Flush Right

Place a line flush with the right margin, such as a date.

     	Date Text

Insert the current date or include a date code that updates to the current date every time you retrieve the form.

     	Create Tables

Format information in columns and rows; use a table at the top of a fax form to type in routing information.

     	Number Pages

Automatically number pages and position the page number.

     	Create Headers/Footers

Repeat information at the top or bottom of each page (including consecutive page numbering).

Add Pictures and Borders

     	Retrieve Clip Art Images

Images retrieve into graphics boxes that you can then move and size with the mouse.

     	Try TextArt

Create text that can be shaped and contoured, such as a business name.

     	Create Watermarks

Use the watermark feature to turn a clip art image into an image behind text.

     	Create Borders

Place borders around a page, paragraph, or column; create your own border.

     	Create Lines

Make horizontal or vertical lines to divide elements on the page (for example, a letterhead or footer).

See Also

Document Basics

New Document/Template


Record Keeping Forms

You can create record keeping forms using an available template, or you can create your own. Either way, you can create such things as balance sheets, class schedules, or cost analysis forms.

Create Calendar Structure

     	Create Tables

Format information in columns and rows.

     	Shade Columns and Rows in Tables

Make information in a table easier to read by shading every other column or row  (or shade titles and headings).

     	Change Table Lines and Fill Patterns

Alter table lines and borders; add shading and fill patterns.

     	Join Cells

Join cells to create a heading or empty calendar dates.

     	Format Table Styles

Quickly format tables and save formats using Table Expert.

Add Text and Numbers,

     	Format Tables

Change the font and size of text and numbers; position and align information in tables.

     	Increment Numbers (Data Fill)

Select table cells, then choose data fill options to add incrementing numbers for dates in your table.

Add Pictures

     	Retrieve Clip Art Images

Images retrieve into graphics boxes that you can then move and size with the mouse.

See Also

Document Basics

Forms to Fill In at the Computer

New Document/Template


About Formatting

Formatting refers to changing the appearance of a document, such as italicizing words, changing margins, and centering titles.

When you select text and choose a formatting option, the formatting affects only the selected text. If you do not select text, the formatting affects either the word, paragraph, or page at the insertion point, depending on the kind of formatting you choose.

For example, if you choose italics (with no text selected), the word at the insertion point is italicized. If the insertion point is not in a word, text you type will be italicized.

If you choose margins or line spacing (with no text selected), the change affects the entire paragraph at the insertion point and all subsequent text.

See Also

Document Basics

QuickSelect

Select


About Tables

You can use a table instead of tabs to quickly arrange columns of numbers and text. A table consists of rows and columns of cells that you fill in with text or graphics.

Within each cell, text wraps within margins just as it does in a document window. The entire row increases its size to accommodate added text.

You can use tables to create office forms and calendars, to create side-by-side columns, and to align rows of graphics and text. For information on creating tables and editing them, click any of the topics below:

     	Create a Table

Create a table

Delete a table

     	Change the Structure of a Table

Use the Table Expert

Insert columns and rows into a table

Join cells in a table

Split cells in a table or split a table

Remove or edit lines in a table

Change the shading in a table

Move or copy cells, rows, and columns

     	Change the Appearance and Alignment of Text in a Table

Format all cells in a table

Format individuals cells

Format columns

Format rows

     	Calculate Figures in a Table

Insert formulas using the Formula feature bar

Type formulas in table cells manually

Quickly calculate the sum of values

Copy formula to other cells

Calculate figures in a table or document

Use complex formulas in a table

     	Other Things You Can Do with Tables

Create calendars

Convert columns or tabular text to a table

Create names for cells, ranges, and tables

Fill in the rest of a column or row based on a pattern (Data Fill)

Change the way figures are displayed

Display your table with dimmed gridlines

Merge into a table


Merge Into a Table

Purpose

You can use the REPEATROW merge code to merge information into a table from a data file. The table expands one row for each record in the data file.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, choose Form, choose New Document Window, then choose OK.

2	Specify the data file you want to associate, then choose OK.

3	Create a 2-row table with as many columns as you want, then type a heading in each cell of the first row.

4	Choose Format from the Table menu, make sure Automatically Insert Row is selected, then choose OK.

5	If you want, move the dialog box so that you can see the entire table, then place the insertion point in the first cell of the second row.

6	Choose Insert Field from the Merge feature bar, select a field name, then choose Insert.

7	Press Tab to move to the next cell, select a field name, then choose Insert.

8	Repeat steps 6-7 until you insert all the fields you want, then choose Close.

9	Place the insertion point at the end of the last cell in the second row, then choose Merge Codes from the feature bar.

10	Select REPEATROW, then choose Insert.

11	Choose Close, then merge the file as you would any other form file.

See Also

About Merge

Create Table

Perform Merge


About Graphics

You can retrieve graphics such as clip art images and drawings from other applications, or you can create your own drawings in WordPerfect by using a Draw program.

When you retrieve an image, the image appears in a graphics box at the insertion point. You can then use your mouse to move and size the graphics box within your document. You can edit the image itself by double-clicking it, which opens a Draw program. Or you can change the lines and fill of the graphic box.

For information on inserting, creating, and editing graphics, click any of the topics below:

     	Insert Graphics

Insert images

Use graphics boxes

     	Create and Edit Images

Create images using a Draw program

     	Change Lines, Shading, and Colors

Remove or change lines around the box

Create a custom fill style

Change the border line color

Create a drop shadow

Make rounded or square corners

Adjust the spacing between image and box

Use image tools to shade box

     	Move, Size, and Position Graphics Boxes

Move and size graphics boxes

Place the image in a specific place

Change width and height of a graphics box

Use image tools to rotate and crop image

Wrap text around graphics

     	Other Things You Can Do with Graphics

Specify default pathnames for graphics files

Create a custom graphics box style

Add caption text to a graphics box

See Also

About Borders

Create Horizontal or Vertical Line

Create Text Box

Equation Editor

TextArt

Watermark


Use a Graphics Program

Purpose

When you edit graphics, you can use the Image Tools to modify images, or you can use a graphics program, included with WordPerfect, to create and fine tune images.

Use a graphics program, such as WPDraw or Presentations, when you want to create or edit drawings, charts, and graphs. You can also edit existing clip art images and OLE objects.

Steps

1	Choose Draw from the Graphics menu.

or

Choose Chart from the Graphics menu.

If you have the standard WordPerfect for Windows package, WordPerfect will run WPDraw. If you purchased a suite of Corel products or purchased Presentations separately, WordPerfect will run Presentations.

For more information on using the draw and chart features for the product you have, click one of the following:

WPDraw

Presentations

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy either the WPDRUS.HLP file (for WPDraw) or WPPRUS.HLP file  (for Presentations) to your WordPerfect directory (for example, c:\office\wpwin).


Cancel Print Jobs

File, Print, Options

Purpose

Cancel a print job using the Control button on the Print dialog box.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Choose Control.

3	Choose Cancel Print Job.

If you are printing a small document, the print job may already have been sent to the printer before you can cancel.

See Also

Print


Why Can't I Print

You may not be able to print for a number of different reasons. Here are some troubleshooting suggestions:

     	Printer Hardware

Make sure that your printer is turned on and online (the "Online" or "Ready" switch should be on).

Check to see if your printer is displaying a red light. A red light might mean that your printer is out of paper or the tray is jammed.

Make sure the cable connections between your computer and printer are tight.

     	Printer Setup

Make sure the selected printer matches the printer you are using. Choose Print from the File menu and check the active printer.

Make sure you have selected the correct printer port.

If you are printing over a network, make sure your connection to the network is still intact. Check with your network administrator for assistance.

     	Other Troubleshooting Suggestions

Check the status of your print job by choosing Print from the File menu, then choosing Control. If the print job is stalled, you may be able to restart it.

Try printing another document. If that document prints, the problem may be related to your original document. Copy and paste the contents of your original document into another document and try printing again.

If you still cannot print, try to print a file from Write (Windows). If you cannot print with Write, the problem is probably affecting all your Windows-based applications. See your Microsoft Windows documentation for assistance.

See Also

About Printing

Printer Setup


Why Can't I Get More Fonts

In WordPerfect for Windows, the available fonts depend on the printer you have selected. You may not see fonts for several reasons.

     	TrueType Fonts

If the font is a TrueType font, make sure the font is installed in the Fonts dialog box of the Windows Control Panel.

     	Non TrueType Fonts

If the font is not a TrueType font, make sure the correct printer driver is selected. Choose Print from the File menu, choose the Select button, and make sure that you are using a printer with the fonts you need.

     	Your Printer Not Listed

If you do not see your printer listed, you must install printer driver software in Windows. For more information about installing printer drivers, see the Microsoft Windows documentation.

See Also

Downloading and Installing Soft Fonts

Select Fonts

Select Printer


Why Does My Document Look Different
Why Does My Document Look Different When Printed

The fonts you can use in WordPerfect depend on the fonts available on your printer and the fonts installed in your computer system. If the appearance of your printed page does not match what you see on the screen, you may be using a font that is not available on your printer.

You can use three kinds of fonts in WordPerfect: screen fonts, printer fonts, and scalable fonts. If you select a screen font that does not have a corresponding printer font, or if you select a printer font that does not have a corresponding screen font, the printed document will not look like the document on screen.

If you have a printer that prints graphics, use scalable fonts, such as TrueType fonts. Using scalable fonts ensures that what you see on the screen is what appears on the printed page.

To identify a font type, choose Font from the Format menu, then look at the list of fonts. The icon next to the font name indicates the font type:

  indicates a TrueType font

  indicates a printer font

If no icon appears to the left of the font name, the font is a screen font.

See Also

Downloading and Installing Soft Fonts

Select Fonts


Merge (File Preferences)

Edit, Preferences, File

Purpose

Use the Merge options in File Preferences to specify a default extension for all form and data files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Merge.

3	Select Use Default Form File Extension on Open and Save, then type the extension you want. The default is .frm.

4	Select Use Default Data File Extension on Open and Save, then type the extension you want. The default is .dat.

5	Choose OK and Close.

See Also

File Preferences


Launch a Program (KickOff)

Use KickOff to launch a program at a specified time during your daily routine or when you access certain features. For more information, click KickOff to access the Help for KickOff.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy the WPKOUS.HLP file to your WordPerfect directory (for example, c:\office\wpwin).


Merge Envelopes

Purpose

When you merge envelopes, you create a form file that includes the envelope information. Then you merge it with a data file. Because you will insert field names that correspond to name and address fields in the data file, it is easier if you create the data file first. If you have not yet created the data file, see Create Data File.

You can merge envelopes only, or you can create a letter and merge envelopes as you merge the letters.

Steps

To merge envelopes only,

1	From a data file, choose Go to Form, then choose Create.

or

In a new document window, choose Merge from the Tools menu, choose Form, specify a data file or select None, then choose OK.

2	Choose Envelope from the Format menu, then specify a return address.

3	Place the insertion point in the Mailing Addresses box.

4	Choose Field, highlight a field, then press Enter twice for each field you want in the address.

If you want to save the address fields, choose Add.

5	If needed, select a different envelope definition from the Envelope Definitions drop-down list.

or

Choose Create New Definition, specify options, then choose OK.

6	To change address positions or include the USPS POSTNET bar code, choose Options, select the options you want, then choose OK.

7	Choose Append to Doc.

8	To merge the envelope file, choose Merge from the feature bar, then choose Merge.

9	Specify the file locations for the Form File, Data File, and Output File.

10	If you want to limit the merge to certain data records, choose Select Records, specify conditions or mark records, then choose OK.

11	If you want to control page breaks, number of copies, empty fields, or code display, choose Options, make your selections, then choose OK.

12	Choose OK to perform the merge.

To merge envelopes as you merge letters,

1	In a new document window, choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Form.

2	Create the letter you want to merge, typing text and inserting fields.

3	Choose Merge from the feature bar, then choose Merge.

4	Choose Envelopes, then specify a return address.

5	Place the insertion point in the Mailing Addresses box.

6	Choose Field, highlight a field, then press Enter twice for each field you want in the address.

If you want to save the address fields, choose Add.

7	Choose OK, then continue the merge as described in steps 8-12 above.

See Also

Create Form File

Envelope

Perform Merge

Perform Merge Options


Merge Labels

Purpose

When you merge labels, you create a form file that includes the correct label paper size definition. Then you merge it with a data file. Because you will insert field names that correspond to fields in the data file, it is easier if you create the data file first. If you have not yet created the data file, see Create Data File.

Steps

To create the form file,

1	From a data file, choose Go to Form, then choose Create.

or

In a new document window, choose Merge from the Tools menu, choose Form, specify a data file or select None, then choose OK.

If you specify the data file at this time, WordPerfect can use the association to help you enter the proper fields in your form file.

To specify the label paper size,

1	Choose Labels from the Format menu.

2	Select the type of labels you want to display: Laser, Tractor-Fed, or Both.

3	In the Labels list, highlight the label definition you want, then choose Select.

To insert fields,

1	To call a field from a data file, choose Insert Field from the Merge feature bar.

2	Select the field name you want, then choose Insert.

or

If no data file is associated, choose OK, type the field name or number you want, then choose Insert.

You can also choose Data File to associate a data file at this time.

3	If needed, press Enter to move the insertion point to the next line on the label.

4	Select or type another field in the dialog box, then choose Insert.

5	Repeat steps 3-4 as often as you need, then choose Close.

6	Choose other options from the Merge Form File feature bar such as Date (to enter a date code), then save or merge the file.

To merge,

1	Choose Merge from the Merge feature bar, then choose Merge.

or

Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Merge.

2	Specify the file locations for the Form File, Data File, and Output File.

3	If you want to limit the merge to certain data records, choose Select Records, specify conditions or mark records, then choose OK.

4	If you want to control page breaks, number of copies, empty fields, or code display, choose Options, make your selections, then choose OK.

5	Choose OK to perform the merge.

See Also

Create Form File

Labels

Perform Merge

Perform Merge Options

Select Records


Change Windows Screen Colors

Purpose

To change the colors of title bars, dialog boxes, and document windows, you must use the Windows Control Panel.

Steps

1	Press Ctrl+Esc to display the Windows Task List.

2	Double-click Program Manager.

3	Double-click Control Panel in the Main group.

4	Double-click Color.

5	Change your colors.

For more information, see your Microsoft Windows documentation.

See Also

Preferences


Create Lists, Index, Table of Contents/Authorities

Purpose

With WordPerfect, you can include in your documents a list, an index, a table of contents, a cross-reference, and a table of authorities.

     	List

Displays items such as figures, illustrations, and tables in your document.

     	Index

Displays page numbers for items that can be looked up in a printed document.

     	Table of Contents

Lists titles and headings in the order they appear in a document.

     	Cross-Reference

Refers your readers to other pages, figures and notes, such as "see page 12."

     	Table of Authorities

Lists where citations occur in a legal brief.

You create these items in three basic steps: (1) mark the entries, (2) define the location and format, and (3) generate the index or table.

Steps

1	Choose one of the items from the Tools menu.

2	Use the feature bar to mark, define, and generate the index or table.

See Also

Cross-Reference Feature Bar

Index Feature Bar

List Feature Bar

Table of Authorities Feature Bar

Table of Contents Feature Bar


Publish Issue

File, Publish

Purpose

Use Publish Issue to send a new version of the previously published document to one or more Workgroup members.

This option is available only if you have installed WordPerfect with the suite.

Steps

1	Save the document, then choose Publish from the File menu.

2	Choose Issue, then choose from the following options:

         	Notes

Create notes for this version that subscribers can access

         	Address

Display the OBEX Address Book to change the list of subscribers

         	Poll on Publish

Poll the subscribers' accounts when you choose Publish to send the document to them

See Also

Poll Now

Publish New

Subscribe


Move and Size Graphics (Mouse)

Purpose

 Use the mouse to move or size graphics.

Steps

To move a graphic with the mouse,

1	Click the graphic to select it.

2	Drag it to a new location in your document.

Avoid dragging one of the handles on the graphics box, or you will size instead of move.

To size a graphic with the mouse,

1	Click the graphic to select it.

2	Drag one of the sizing handles to increase or decrease the size of the graphic.

See Also

Box Position

Box Size

Select (Image)


Forms to Fill In at the Computer

You can create a fill-in file, so that you or another user can print information onto preprinted forms.

For example, say you have to fill out the same invoice form several times a day. Ahead of time, you could create a fill-in file that will help you enter information in correct positions. To fill out the invoice, you retrieve the fill-in file and complete information as requested. Then you place the invoice form into the printer and print the filled-in file onto the form.

     	Advance Codes

You can create a fill-in file so that when it is retrieved, the insertion point will automatically move to the first place you want the user to type. After entering the requested information, the user can press Tab (same line) or Enter (next line) to move to the next Advance code.

To create the code, first measure the exact location on the form, then enter that information into the Advance code.

     	Comments

Creating a fill-in file is like creating a second document on top of the form but without the text and formatting of the form, such as a line that says "Ship To This Address:". To help the user know what to type in such places, the fill-in file can contain a comment after each Advance code. You can add to the comment any instructions or information. Comments display on the screen but do not print with the document.

See Also

New Document/Template

Record Keeping Forms


Document Basics

When WordPerfect starts, you can begin to type in the first document window. You can open as many as nine document windows at one time and arrange them on your screen.

Change Document Format

     	Use the Toolbar and Power Bar

Quickly access common WordPerfect features. For example, you can turn on bold or underline, change fonts or line spacing, save and open files, and create tables or columns, all at the click of a button.

     	Use the Ruler Bar

Change margins, paragraph format, or tabs.

     	Make Text Fit Current Space

Use the Make It Fit Expert to format your text to fit the amount of space you specify.

Work with Documents

     	Start New Documents

Choose either a blank screen or one of the many preformatted templates (for example, letters, fax forms, reports).

     	Open Existing Documents

Retrieve, find, delete, and manage files, or create QuickList items for the directories you use most.

     	Switch Between Open Documents

Open as many as nine documents; switch to the one where you want to type.

     	Change Window Size

Maximize the window to fill the screen, reduce it to an icon, or drag a border to the size you want.

     	Arrange Documents

Tile or cascade windows, or drag the title bar to position windows where you want.

     	Save Documents

Save your documents before you exit WordPerfect.

     	Print Documents

Print in the fonts and graphics supported by your printer.

Change Text

     	Select Text

Apply text attributes such as bold and italics, or change text appearance and size (font).

     	Move Text with the Mouse

Move text you have selected (blocked) to another location with the mouse.

     	Change Fonts

Change text appearance and size.

See Also

About Formatting

About Templates


Examples

Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Examples

Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Examples

Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Examples

Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Examples

Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Examples

Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Examples

Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


About Styles

Format, Styles

Styles provide an easy way to format similar types of text, such as headings and lists. You can use the same style repeatedly to save time and to ensure that your document has a consistent format. If you change your mind about the format, you can edit the style to update all text to which the style has been applied.

For example, suppose you want the headings in your report to be formatted in a large font. Instead of having to format each heading, you can create a style that contains the formatting you need and then apply it to each of the headings. Then if you want the headings to be italicized, simply edit the style by adding italics, and all your headings are updated at once.

You can create four kinds of styles: character, paragraph, paragraph with automatic update, and document. Character styles are useful for formatting text within a paragraph. Paragraph styles are useful for formatting entire paragraphs, especially headings. Document styles are useful for formatting all text from the insertion point to the end of the document.

Styles you create are available only in the current document. If you want styles to be available for other documents, you can save the styles and retrieve them in another document.  You can also copy a style to a template for use in other documents.

Many WordPerfect features, such as footers, footnotes, and graphics boxes, are based on styles. These "system styles" are available for all WordPerfect documents. You can edit system styles for the current document and for document templates.

For information on working with styles, click any of the topics below:

     	Using Styles

Apply styles

Create styles

Create styles based on current paragraph

Edit styles

     	Style Options

Copy styles

Delete styles

Save and retrieve styles

Change the location of styles file

Display system styles

     	Use Styles with Other Features

Use graphics and table styles

Use styles in a template

Change outline definitions

See Also

QuickFormat (Text)


Column Borders

Format, Columns, Border/Fill

Purpose

Use Border/Fill to add a border around columns. Choose from a variety of patterns or create your own. You can also add shading, fill patterns, and color inside borders.

When you create dark fill patterns, you might want to try changing to a lighter text color. For reversed text, create a black fill inside a border, then change to white text.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point anywhere in a column.

The border will surround all columns until you turn off columns.

2	Choose Columns from the Format menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	From the Border Style drop-down list, choose Column Between if you want a vertical separator line between columns.

or

Select Column All if you want a column border around columns and a vertical separator line between columns.

or

Select <None>.

4	Select a shade, pattern, or gradient fill style from either the fill Style pop-up palette or the drop-down list.

If you select a pattern fill style or a gradient fill style, you can select a foreground color and a background color.

5	Select a Foreground and Background color, then choose OK.

See Also

About Borders

Change Text/Printing Colors

Create Reversed Text

Customize Column Border


Page Borders

Format, Page, Border/Fill

Purpose

Use Border/Fill to add a border around pages or selected text. Choose from a variety of patterns or create your own. You can also add shading, fill patterns, and color inside borders.

When you create dark fill patterns, you might want to try changing to a lighter text color. For reversed text, create a black fill inside a border, then change to white text.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point anywhere on the page where you want the border to first appear. The border will surround the page and all subsequent pages in the document.

or

Select any amount of text on the page(s).

2	choose Page from the Format menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Select a border style from either the Border Style pop-up palette or the drop-down list.

4	Select a shade, pattern, or gradient fill style, from either the Fill Style pop-up palette or the drop-down list.

If you select a pattern fill style or a gradient fill style, you can select a foreground color and a background color.

5	Select a Foreground and Background color, then choose OK.

See Also

About Borders

Change Text/Printing Colors

Create Reversed Text

Customize Page Border


Paragraph Borders

Format, Paragraph, Border/Fill

Purpose

Use Border/Fill to add a border around paragraphs or selected text. Choose from a variety of patterns or create your own. You can also add shading, fill patterns, and color inside borders.

When you create dark fill patterns, you might want to try changing to a lighter text color. For reversed text, create a black fill inside a border, then change to white text.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph where you want the border to first appear. The border will surround the paragraph and all subsequent paragraphs.

2	Choose Paragraph from the Format menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Select a border style from either the Border Style pop-up palette or the drop-down list.

If you want only horizontal separator lines between paragraphs, select Column Between.

4	Select a shade, pattern, or gradient fill style from either the Fill Style pop-up palette or the drop-down list.

If you select a pattern fill style or a gradient fill style, you can select a foreground color and a background color.

5	Select a Foreground and Background color, then choose OK.

See Also

About Borders

Change Text/Printing Colors

Create Reversed Text

Customize Paragraph Borders


Footnotes

Insert, Footnote, Create

Purpose

Use this feature to create footnotes for papers and reports that require note placement at the bottom of the page.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in your text where you want to insert the reference number for a new footnote.

2	Choose Footnote from the Insert menu, then choose Create.

3	Type the text of the note.

You can also paste information you have cut or copied, or you can insert a file into the note.

If you delete a number, you can restore it by using the Note Number button.

4	Choose Close.

The superscript footnote or endnote number appears in the text of your document. The footnote appears at the bottom of the page.

See Also

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Edit Numbering Style (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Endnotes

Footnote Options

Footnote or Endnote Number

Line Separator

Numbering Method (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Position of Footnotes

Spacing Between Notes


Endnotes

Insert, Endnote, Create

Purpose

Use this feature to create endnotes at the end of your paper or report.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in your text where you want to insert the reference number.

2	Choose Endnote from the Insert menu, then choose Create.

3	Type the text of the note.

You can also paste information you have cut or copied, or you can insert a file into the note.

If you delete a number, you can restore it by using the Note Number button.

4	Choose Close.

The superscript footnote or endnote number appears in the text of your document. The footnote appears at the bottom of the page.

See Also

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Edit Numbering Style (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Footnotes

Footnote Options

Footnote or Endnote Number

Numbering Method (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Position of Footnotes

Spacing Between Notes


Change Text/Printing Colors

Format, Font, Color or Shading

Purpose

Use Color or Shading to change the color and shading of text.

For example, if you want to print in reversed text, you could create a dark or black fill pattern inside a border or text box. You could then change to white text using the following steps.

Steps

To change text color,

1	Choose Font from the Format menu.

2	Select a color from the Color pop-up.

or

Choose Palette, create a color, choose OK, then select it.

3	Specify Shading if you want, then choose OK.

To print in color if your printer supports color printing,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select a Print Color, then choose Print.

See Also

Border

Create Reversed Text


Create Drop Cap

Format, Drop Cap

Purpose

Use the Drop Cap feature to enlarge the first character, letters, word, or words of a paragraph.

Steps

1	To create a drop cap as you begin typing a new paragraph, choose Drop Cap from the Format menu, then type the first few words.

or

To create a drop cap in a paragraph that has already been typed, place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph, then choose Drop Cap from the Format menu.

2	If you want, select a different predefined drop cap style from the Drop Cap palette on the feature bar.

If you need to turn off a drop cap, select No Cap from the Drop Cap palette.

3	Choose Close from the feature bar.

See Also

Customize Drop Cap


Find Word Forms

Edit, Find and Replace, Type, Word Forms

Purpose

Use Word Forms to search for variations of a word, such as "talk," "talked," and "talking." You can also replace these words with their equivalent forms, such as "speak," "spoke," and "speaking."

Note that Word Forms does not find contractions such as "shouldn't," "couldn't," and "isn't."

Steps

To find a word form,

1	Choose Find and Replace from the Edit menu.

2	Select Word Forms from the Type menu.

3	Type the word form (such as "talk") in the Find text box.

The Find button that appears is determined by the Find and Replace text direction you have selected.

4	Choose Find Next to search forward from the insertion point in your document.

or

Choose Find Prev to search backward from the insertion point your document.

To find and replace word forms,

1	Choose Find and Replace from the Edit menu.

2	Type the word form (such as "talk") in the Find text box, click the Replace With text box, then type the replacement word form (such as "speak").

3	Select any other options you want to use.

4	Choose one of the following options:

         	Find Next

Finds the search text the first time it appears forward from the insertion point.

         	Find Prev

Finds the search text the first time it appears backward from the insertion point.

         	Replace

Selects the search text the first time it appears in the direction you have selected, then replaces it each time you choose it thereafter.

         	Replace All

Simultaneously replaces all forms of the search text.

See Also

Find and Replace Text

Match and Replace


Make It Fit Expert

Format, Make It Fit Expert

Purpose

Use the Make It Fit Expert to automatically shrink or expand a document to fill a specified number of pages.

Steps

1	In an open document, choose Make It Fit Expert from the Format menu.

2	Specify the number of pages you want the document text to fill in the text box. The number can be greater than, equal to, or less than the current number of pages.

3	Select those items you want automatically adjusted.

4	Choose Make It Fit.


Customize Drop Cap

Format, Drop Cap

Purpose

You can easily customize a drop cap in a variety of ways. For example, you can change a drop cap's font style and color so that it stands out even more from the rest of your text. You can change its height and position or add a border around it.

You can also customize a drop cap to include a specified number of characters, not just the initial capital letter, or you can simply make the entire first word a drop cap.

Steps

To customize a drop cap,

1	Place the insertion point anywhere in a paragraph that already has a drop cap.

2	Choose Drop Cap from the Format menu, then make the changes you want.

To change the size,

1	Choose Size from the Drop Cap feature bar.

2	Select the number of lines high you want the drop cap.

or

Select Other, select Other again, specify a line height, then choose OK.

3	Choose Close from the feature bar.

To change the position,

1	Choose Position from the Drop Cap feature bar, then select In Text or In Margin.

or

Select Other, specify the number of lines you want to move the surrounding text down and the distance you want the drop cap moved into the margin, then choose OK.

2	Choose Close from the feature bar.

To change the font,

1	Choose Font from the Drop Cap feature bar.

2	Select the font face, style, appearance, and color options you want, then choose OK.

      	You need to specify a scalable font for drop caps.

3	Choose Close from the feature bar.

To add a border/fill,

1	Choose Border/Fill from the Drop Cap feature bar.

2	Select a border style from the Border Style palette or drop-down list.

3	If desired, select a shade, pattern, or gradient fill style from the Fill Style palette or drop-down list.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close from the feature bar.

To change the options,

1	Choose Options from the Drop Cap feature bar.

2	Select the drop cap options you want.

The Allow for Descender option allows paragraph text to wrap around drop cap characters that extend below the baseline.

The Allow for Diacritic option automatically moves a drop cap down slightly for those letters using diacritic elements.

3	Choose Close from the feature bar.

See Also

Create Drop Cap

Font


Print Topics

Purpose

You can print one or several Help topics.

Steps

To print a single Help topic,

1	Display the topic.

2	Choose the Print button at the top of the Help window.

or

Choose Print Topic from the File menu.

To print several topics,

1	Choose Print Topics from the File menu.

2	Choose from the following sequences of topics:

Columns

Document Format

Footnotes/Endnotes

Graphics

Graphics Borders,Lines, and Fill

Graphics Box

Headers/Footers

Line Format

Macros

Merge

Page Format

Paragraph Format

Print

Printer

Styles

Tables

Table Format

Table Math

Templates

Writing Tools

Working with Other Programs

3	Select the topics you want to print.

4	Choose Print.

Each topic is printed one at a time.


End Outline

Tools, Outline, Options, End Outline

Purpose

Use this feature to end an outline.

Steps

1	Choose Outline from the Tools menu.

2	Choose End Outline from the Options drop-down list on the Outline feature bar.

See Also

Change Outline Level

Create an Outline

Define Outline

Edit Outline Definition

Set Paragraph Number


About Printing

When you print a document, you can:

     	Print the entire document or only specific pages

     	Change the print quality and omit graphics to allow faster printing

     	Set printing options, such as the number of copies

     	Print envelopes and labels

     	Do booklet printing, print only odd or even pages, and print in reverse order

The printer you use affects the way WordPerfect prints and displays text on the screen. Before you print a document, you should install and select the printer you intend to use to print the document. You can use either a WordPerfect printer driver or a Windows printer driver. For more information about installing Windows printer drivers, see your Microsoft Windows documentation.

For information on printers and print options, click any of the topics below:

     	Printing Documents

Print files

Cancel print jobs

     	Printer Setup

Add a printer definition

Select a printer

Delete a printer definition

Set up your printer

Add fonts to your list of available fonts

Select a sheet feeder

Designate default print settings for your documents

     	Printer Troubleshooting

Why can't I get more fonts?

Why can't I print?

Why does my document look different when printed?

     	Special Printing Tasks

Print multiple pages

Create envelopes

Create labels

Print in booklet format

Use binding and duplex options

Print in reverse order

Print odd pages first, then even pages

Print to document on disk

Insert commands that take advantage of special printer functions


Row/Column Indicators (Table)

Table, Formula Bar, Row/Column Indicators button

Purpose

Use the Row/Column Indicators button ( [image]) on the Table Formula feature bar to turn row and column indicators on and off. Row and column indicators allow you to easily select table rows and columns, as well as select the entire table.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Formula Bar from the Table menu.

3	Click [image].

4	To select a row, click the row indicator next to the row you want to select (for example, 1, 2, and so forth).

or

To select a column, click the column indicator above the column you want to select (for example, A, B, and so forth).

or

To select the entire table, click the square in the top left corner of the row and column indicators (the cursor becomes a double-headed corner arrow).

5	To turn off row and column indicators, click [image].

or

If you want row and column indicators to display each time you display the Formula Bar, don't turn off the indicators before you close the Formula Bar. The indicators will display automatically the next time you display the Formula Bar.

See Also

Select


Cell (Lines/Fill)

Table, Lines/Fill, Cell

Purpose

Use the Cell option on the Table Lines/Fill dialog box to change the line style, color, and fill options of the current cell.

Steps

1	Select or place the insertion point in a cell that contains lines or fill you want to change.

2	Choose Lines/Fill from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Lines/Fill.

3	Select a line style from the Left, Right, Top, Bottom, or Outside palettes or drop-down lists in the Line Styles group box.

4	To turn off a line, select <None> from the appropriate drop-down list.

5	If you want all the lines to have a uniform color, choose Custom Color, then choose a color from the color palette.

6	Select a fill style from the Fill Style palette or drop-down list in the Fill Options group box.

7	Select a color from the Foreground or Background palettes.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Define Color Printing Palette

Each Selected Cell (Lines/Fill)

Selection (Lines/Fill)

Table (Lines/Fill)


Create Table Style

Table, Expert, Create

Purpose

Use Create Table Style to name a table style you have created.

Steps

1	Format your table with the text formatting, lines, borders, and fill you want to you for your table style.

The formatting you select must have a regular pattern to it.

2	Place the insertion point in the table.

3	Choose Expert from the Table menu, choose Options, then choose Setup.

4	If you want the table style you are creating to be associated with the current document only, select Current Document.

or

If you want the table style to be associated with the default template, select Default Template.

or

If you want the table style to be associated with an additional objects template, select Additional Objects Template.

5	Choose OK.

6	Choose Create.

7	Specify a name for the table style you have created, then choose OK.

8	Choose Close.

See Also

Create Table

Format Table

New Document/Template

Table Expert (Styles)

Table Expert Options

Table Lines/Fill


Table Expert (Styles)

Table, Expert

Purpose

Use Table Expert (Styles) to apply a predefined table style to a table.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Expert from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Expert.

3	Choose Options, then choose Setup.

4	Select the location of the table styles you want to see in the Available Styles scroll box on the Table Expert dialog box, then choose OK.

5	Select a table style from the Available Styles scroll box.

6	To apply the table style only to the current cells of the table (and not allow the style to update if the table size changes), select Apply Style on a Cell by Cell Basis.

7	To clear any existing table settings before applying the table style, select Clear Current Table Settings Before Applying.

8	Choose Apply.

See Also

Create Table

Create Table Style

New Document/Template

Table Expert Options


Table Expert Options

Table, Expert, Options

Purpose

Use Table Expert Options to delete, rename, save, or retrieve a table style.

Steps

To delete or rename a table style,

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Expert from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Expert.

3	Select the table style from the Available Styles scroll box.

4	Choose Options.

5	Choose Delete to delete the table style, then choose Yes.

or

Choose Rename to rename a table style, specify a name, then choose OK.

6	Choose Close to return to your document.

To save or retrieve a table style,

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Expert from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Expert.

3	Choose Options.

4	Choose Save to save the table style in a file.

or

Choose Retrieve to retrieve a table style.

5	Specify a filename or click [image] to select a file, then choose OK.

6	Choose Close to return to your document.

See Also

Create Table

Create Table Style

New Document/Template

Table Expert (Styles)


Undo/Redo History

Edit, Undo/Redo History

Purpose

Use Undo/Redo History to reverse up to 300 actions in a document.

Steps

1	Choose Undo/Redo History from the Edit menu.

2	To undo or redo the last editing action, choose Undo or Redo.

or

To undo or redo two or more actions at once, select the item you want to undo or redo, then choose Undo or Redo.

Notice that all actions listed above your select item are also selected and will be undone or redone.

4	Choose Close to return to your document.

See Also

Undo or Redo

Undo/Redo Options


Undo/Redo Options

Edit, Undo/Redo History, Options

Purpose

By default, WordPerfect saves your last ten actions so that you can undo or redo them.

You can have WordPerfect save up to 300 actions. You can also have a history of those actions saved with a document so that you can list them and reuse them.

Steps

1	Choose Undo/Redo History from the Edit menu.

2	Choose Options.

3	Specify the number of Undo/Redo items you want to maintain.

4	If you want to save the Undo/Redo history for that document and all subsequent documents, select Save Undo/Redo Items With Document.

5	Choose Close.

See Also

Undo/Redo History


Insert Images

Graphics, Images

Purpose

You can use the Image box style to retrieve an image created in WordPerfect graphics format (.WPG), or in another supported graphics format, directly into your document.

Steps

1	Select Drag to Create from the Graphics menu. A check mark appears to the left of Drag to Create when it is selected.

Drag to Create remains in effect for all graphics boxes you create until you deselect it. You can use Drag to Create to insert any type of graphics box style you want, at a precise location in your document.

2	Choose Image from the Graphics menu.

3	Position the hand icon where the upper left corner of the box will be.

If you are drawing the graphics box over existing text in your document, the text will shift to automatically flow around the box.

4	Drag diagonally across the document window to define a graphics box area.

or

Click once in the document window to create a default size graphics box.

5	Specify the path (if necessary) and filename of the image file.

6	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box feature bar to return to your document.

      	If you insert an image created in WordPerfect 6.0, the height and width ratios may be different. To set the default to maintain the ratio, see Box Content.

See Also

Image Tools


Scanner Setup

Insert, Select Image Source

Purpose

Use Image Source Setup to select your image scanning device.

      	To use this feature, you must have an image scanner that supports TWAIN connected to your computer. Depending on the scanner you are using, the dialog box will vary. Choose the Help button in the dialog box or consult your scanner manual for more information.

Steps

1	Choose Select Image Source from the Insert menu.

2	Highlight the image scanner you want, then choose Select.

See Also

Scan Images Into WordPerfect


Scan Images Into WordPerfect

Insert, Acquire Image

Purpose

Use Acquire Image to scan an image (photograph, drawing, and so on) directly into WordPerfect.

      	You must have an image scanner with a TWAIN compatible driver. Each scanner has different capabilities that will affect how you can use it. Please refer to your image scanner manual for more information.

Steps

1	Choose Acquire Image from the Insert menu.

2	Consult your scanner software documentation for instructions on manipulating the image and pasting it to WordPerfect.

See Also

Scanner Setup


type (def)
type

There are two sort key types: alphanumeric and numeric. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters and numbers. A numeric key sorts by numbers only. In an alphanumeric sort, 93 is sorted after 837. In a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


sort order (def)
sort order

You can sort in either ascending or descending order. Ascending sorts from lowest to highest. Descending sorts from highest to lowest.


subscribers

A list of addresses to whom you want to send a publication or subsequent version. You build a subscriber list with the Select Names dialog box.


Conversion Preferences Code Pages
Conversion Preferences Code Page

Edit, Preferences, Convert, Options, Code Pages

Purpose

Use Code Page Preferences to choose character sets for importing and exporting files in different languages.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Convert.

2	Choose Options, then choose Code Pages.

3	Choose the language code page you want from the DOS and Windows Code Page options.

4	Choose the language code page you want for the Input File and Output File, then choose OK.

See Also

Conversion Preferences

Conversion Preferences Fonts

Convert File Format

Convert Preferences

Language


Conversion Preferences

Edit, Preferences, Convert, Options, Document

Purpose

Use Conversion Preferences to set default options for converting text and word processing files. You can also bring a Windows graphic (metafile) into WordPerfect or a suite application by pasting it from the Clipboard into a document or by retrieving a .WMF file on disk into a figure area. You can store the graphics image as a Windows .WMF file only, a WordPerfect .WPG file only, or save the image in both formats.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Convert.

2	Choose Options, then choose Document.

3	Choose a Unit of Measure.

4	Select an Underline conversion option.

5	Specify an Alignment Character.

6	Specify the page Width and Height.

7	Specify the margins you want.

8	Choose Languages, select a language code, then choose OK twice.

See Also

Conversion Preferences Code Page

Conversion Preferences Fonts

Convert File Format

Convert Preferences

Language


Conversion Preferences Fonts

Edit, Preferences, Convert, Options, WP 4.2 Fonts or DCA/DisplayWrite Fonts

Purpose

When converting fonts, WordPerfect matches fonts as close as possible and displays the original font for you on the Power Bar.  Both the original font and the WordPerfect printer font are displayed in Reveal Codes.

You can set and edit conversion defaults for WordPerfect 4.2, DCA, and DisplayWrite fonts.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Convert.

2	Choose Options, then choose WP 4.2 Fonts or DCA/DisplayWrite Fonts.

3	Choose Edit, specify the font Number, Typeface, and Pitch you want (specify Points and Pitch for DCA/DisplayWrite fonts).

4	Choose OK, then choose Save.

See Also

Conversion Preferences

Conversion Preferences Code Page

Convert File Format

Convert Preferences


Save Template

File, Save or Save As

Purpose

After you create a template, you can use Save or Save As to save the template.

Steps

1	Create a new template.

2	Choose Exit Template, then choose Yes.

or

Choose Save from the File menu to quickly save a previously named template or specify a description, filename, or group for a new template.

or

Choose Save As to specify the description, filename, or group for any template.

The Save Template dialog box prompts you for the following:

         	Description

Type the descriptive name that you want to display in the Template List of the New Document dialog box.

         	Template Name

Type a filename for the template.

         	Template Group

Select the group where you want to locate the template.

See Also

Create or Edit Templates


Template Groups

File, New, Options, New, Rename, or Delete

Purpose

Templates are arranged in groups so you can more easily find the template you want. You can select a template from one of the existing groups. You can also create and rename groups, or delete groups you have created.

The Main group contains essential Windows utilities and it cannot be deleted or renamed.

Steps

To create a group,

1	Choose New from the File menu, then choose Options.

2	Choose New Group, type a name (no more than 8 characters), then choose OK.

To rename a group,

1	Choose New from the File menu.

2	Select the group you want to rename, choose Options, then choose Rename Group.

3	Type the new name (8 characters), then choose OK.

To delete a group,

1	Choose new from the File menu.

2	Select the group you want to delete, choose Options, then choose Delete Group.

3	Choose Yes.

See Also

About Templates

Create or Edit Templates

New Document/Template


Delete or Copy Templates

File, New, Options, Delete or Copy

Purpose

You can delete templates you have created, or copy any template to another group.

Steps

To delete a template,

1	Choose New from the File menu.

2	Choose a group, then highlight a template.

3	Choose Options, then choose Delete Template.

To copy a template to another group,

1	Choose new from the File menu.

2	Choose a group, then highlight a template.

3	Choose Options, then choose Copy Template.

4	Select the group from the Copy to Group list where you want to copy the template, then choose Copy.

See Also

Create/Edit Templates

Template Groups


Build Prompts

File, New, Options, New Template or Edit Template, Build Prompts

Purpose

Use the Prompt Builder when you are creating or editing templates. The Prompt Builder creates the prompts you want your template to display when you open the template. After you create the prompts, the Prompt Builder also lets you link them to the Address Book and Personal Information dialog boxes, then helps you paste the prompts in the appropriate places in your document.

For example, you could build a prompt for the name of an organization in an invoice. When you open the template to create the invoice document, you would be prompted to type the organization or select it from the Address Book. This information would then be added to the appropriates places in your document.

Steps

To create or edit a prompt,

1	Choose New from the File menu.

2	Choose Options, then choose New Template.

or

Highlight a template, choose Options, then choose Edit.

3	Choose Build Prompts from the Templates feature bar, then choose Add.

or

Choose Build Prompts, select a prompt, then choose Edit.

4	Type what you want the prompt to say.

5	In the Link to Address Book Field drop-down list, select the corresponding field in the Address Book.

or

If you are creating a prompt that has no corresponding field in the Address Book, choose None.

6	Choose OK.

7	Repeat steps 4-6 for each prompt you want to create or edit.

To paste prompt information to your template,

1	Place the insertion point in your template where you want to paste items from Personal Information or the Address Book.

2	With the Prompt Builder displayed, select a template prompt you have created, then choose Paste.

or

Choose Personal, select a personal information field, then choose Paste, then choose Close.

3	Repeat steps 1-2 until you have pasted the prompts you want.

4	Choose OK.

To reposition prompts,

1	Highlight a prompt, then choose Move Up or Move Down.

See Also

Associate (Templates)

Copy/Remove Objects

Create or Edit Templates


Copy/Remove Objects

File, New, Options, New Template or Edit Template, Copy/Remove Objects

Purpose

Use Copy/Remove Objects to copy and remove objects to and from the template you are creating. Objects include menu bars, Toolbars, macros, macros on disk, Abbreviations, styles, and keyboards.

Steps

1	Choose New from the File menu, choose Options, then choose New Template or Edit Template.

2	Choose Copy/Remove Object from the Templates feature bar.

3	Choose a template from the Templates to Copy From drop-down list.

If you have created Toolbars, macros, keyboards, styles, and menu bars, they were associated with the template in use at the time unless you specified a different template.

4	Choose an Object Type, such as a Toolbar, macro, or style.

5	Select from the displayed items, then choose Copy, Copy All, Remove, or Remove All.

6	Choose Close.

You can copy more than one object of each type, then associate them with different WordPerfect features. For example, you could copy more than one Toolbar. The standard template has several Toolbars. When you create a table, the table Toolbar displays. You can create this same kind of association using Associate on the Templates feature bar.

See Also

Associate (Templates)

Build Prompts

Create or Edit Templates


Associate (Templates)

File, New, Options, New Template or Edit Template, Associate

Purpose

Use Associate on the Templates feature bar to associate macros, Toolbars, menus, and keyboards with WordPerfect features. When you associate macros, you can also select a macro trigger that specifies when the macro is to play.

However, if you have not yet copied macros, Toolbars, menus, and keyboards to the current Template, you must do so before you can associate any of these with a WordPerfect feature. See Copy/Remove Object.

Steps

To associate features with Toolbars, menus, and keyboards,

1	Choose New from the File menu, choose Options, then choose New Template or Edit Template.

2	Choose Associate from the Templates feature bar.

3	Choose Features, then select a feature from the List.

4	Specify the items you want associated from Toolbars, Menus, and Keyboards.

5	Select features and specify more associations, then choose OK.

To associate macro triggers,

1	Choose New from the File menu, choose Options, then choose New Template or Edit Template.

2	Choose Associate from the Templates feature bar.

3	Choose Triggers, select a trigger from the List.

4	Choose the macro you want associated with the trigger from the Macros drop-down list.

5	Select triggers and specify more macro associations, then choose OK.

See Also

Build Prompts

Copy/Remove Objects

Create or Edit Templates

Macro Triggers


Sample Formulas

Purpose

You create different kinds of formulas as the following examples illustrate.

     	A1

Displays the value found in cell A1.

     	+E45

Adds all the values found in the cells above cell E45.

     	Wage*Time

Multiplies the value in a cell named "Wage" by the value in the cell named "Time."

     	LN(TABLE A.Data)

Displays the natural logarithm of the value in a cell named "Data" in the table named "Table A."

     	POWER(2,January.Week1)

Raises 2 to the value in the cell intersection "January.Week1."

     	[C4]-D14

Subtracts the value in D14 from the value in the absolute cell address C4.

     	IF(ACOS(1)=0,1,0)

Displays a 1 if the condition ACOS(1)=0 is true or a 0 if the condition is false. This is an example of nested functions.

     	LEFT("New York",3)

Displays the first 3 characters ("New") in the text string "New York."  All text strings require quotes.

     	SUM(A10:A18)/B1

Adds all values in a range of cells A10 through A18, then divides by the value in B1. A colon between two cell addresses creates a range of cells.

     	PMT(8.5%/12,-2000,18,3500,0)

Calculates the periodic payments on an investment with an interest rate of 8.5%, a present value of $2000, 18 periods, and a future value of $3500.

     	(hms(14,0)-hms(10,30))*120*24

Calculates the amount owed based on a start time (10:30AM), stop time (2:00PM), and hourly rate of $120.

Note that spaces are not needed between values, operators, and functions. Also notice that column and function letters can be uppercase or lowercase.

See Also

Arithmetic Operators

Create a Formula

Logical Operators

Table Functions


cell intersection (def)
cell intersection

A cell intersection provides a way to reference data. To reference an intersection, specify the names or addresses of the intersecting table components separated by a period.


relative and absolute cell addresses (def)
relative and absolute cell addresses

The cell addresses you type into a formula (for example, C4-C12) are relative cell addresses. This means that if the formula is copied to a new cell, the cell addresses in the formula are updated to be in the same relative position to the new cell as those in the original formula were to the original cell.

For example, if you typed the formula C4-C12 into cell C14, then copied it to cell D14, the formula D4-D12 would be created.

You can also create absolute cell addresses that are not updated when they are copied. To specify an absolute cell address, enclose the cell in brackets (for example, [C4]).

For example, if you typed the formula [C4]-C12 into cell C14, then copied it to cell D14, the formula [C4]-D12 would be created.

You can also create an absolute cell reference by naming the cell.

You can create mixed cell addresses with an absolute column letter and relative row number, or vice versa. For example: [C]4 or C[14].


nested function (def)
nested function

A nested function is a function within a function.


Arithmetic Operators

     	+ (Addition)

Adds values.

     	- (Negation)

Makes values negative.

     	- (Subtraction)

Subtracts the value on the right from the value on the left.

     	* (Multiplication)

Multiplies values.

     	/ (Division)

Divides the value on the left by the value on the right.

     	% (Remainder)

Returns the remainder of a division calculation.

     	% (Percent)

Divides the value on the left of the operator by 100. Be sure there is another operator or a separator following the % operator, or that it is the last operator in the formula. If a % is between two values, it becomes the Remainder operator.

     	^ (Power)

Raises the value on the left to the power indicated by the value on the right.

     	! (Factorial)

Calculates the factorial of the number preceding it. Do not place an equals sign (=) following the ! or it will become the Not equal to operator.

See Also

Create a Formula

Logical Operators

Sample Formulas


Logical Operators

Logical operators compare two or more numeric or text values and returns a result of 1 if the statement is true or 0 if the statement is false.

Use the following logical operators for calculations:

     	= (Equal to)

     	> (Greater than)

     	< (Less than)

     	<> (Not equal to)

     	!= (Not equal to)

     	>= (Greater than or equal to)

     	<= (Less than or equal to)

     	& (AND)

When placed between two or more logical statements, returns a 1 (true) if all of the statements are true and a 0 (false) if any of the statements are false.

     	! (NOT)

Inverts the meaning of a function or another operator.

     	| (OR)

When placed between two or more logical statements, a 1 (true) is returned if at least one of the statements is true. A 0 (false) is returned if all of the statements are false.

     	^^ (XOR)

When placed between two or more logical statements, the EXclusive OR operator (XOR) returns a 1 (true) if one or the other but not both of the statements in the formula are true (or if an odd number of statements are true). It returns a 0 (false) if neither or both of the statements are true (or if an even number of the statements are true).

See Also

Arithmetic Operators

Create a Formula

Sample Formulas


Create a Formula

Purpose

You can use a variety of features in WordPerfect to create many kinds of formulas in tables and floating cells.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table cell or floating cell where you want to create and calculate a formula.

2	Choose Formula Bar from the Table menu.

3	Click the mouse pointer in the Formula Edit text box (to the right of [image]).

4	Type cell addresses, operators, and values in the Formula Edit text box (for example, A1+B5+C4).

or

Click the mouse pointer in a cell or select a range of cells to insert cell addresses in the Formula Edit text box.

5	If you want to insert a predefined WordPerfect function, choose Functions from the Formula Bar, select a function, choose Insert, then define any arguments in that function.

6	If you want to insert the name of a table or floating cell, choose Names from the Formula Bar, select a name, then choose Insert.

7	Click [image] to insert the formula into the cell and turn off Formula Edit mode.

or

Click [image] to cancel the formula or changes you have made to the formula and turn off the Formula Edit mode.

See Also

Arithmetic Operators

Create Table

Logical Operators

Sample Formulas

Table Formula Feature Bar

Table Functions

Table Names in Current Document


Pause

Tools, Macro, Pause

Purpose

Use Pause to temporarily stop a macro you are playing or recording.

Steps

To pause a macro you are playing or recording,

1	Choose Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Pause.

or

Click [image] on the Macro bar.

The macro remains paused until you choose Pause again, click [image], or press the Enter key.

See Also

Record/Play/Edit a Macro


Create a Chart from a Table

Purpose

You can use the data in a table to create a chart containing the same information. When you create a chart from a table, the two are associated.

Steps

1	Create a table with the data you want to include in a chart.

      	Use the top row (Row 1) and the first column (Column A) for data labels.

2	With the insertion point positioned in the table, choose Chart from the Graphics menu.

You are now in the Chart Editor of a graphics program.

3	In Chart Editor, you can change the chart to a different type, add a legend, or edit the attributes of the chart (series color, chart frame, and so forth).

      	To change chart data and label names, you need to return to the table in your document.

4	To return to the table in your document, click the mouse pointer outside the chart.

If you move the chart to a different place in your document, it will still maintain its association with the table.

See Also

Update a Chart Associated with a Table

Use a Graphics Program


Update a Chart Associated with a Table

Purpose

If you have a chart associated with a table, you can specify that the chart automatically update when you make changes to the data in the table, or you can update the chart manually.

Steps

To set automatic update for an associated chart,

1	Choose Calculate from the Table menu.

2	Select Calculate Table or Calculate Document.

3	Select Update Associated Charts.

4	Choose OK.

The chart will automatically update after you make the next change in your table.

To update an associated chart manually,

1	Choose Calculate from the Table menu.

2	If you have formulas in your table, make sure Calculate Table or Calculate Document is selected.

3	Make sure Update Associated Charts is deselected.

4	After making changes to the data in your table, position the mouse pointer over the chart, click the right mouse button, then choose Update Chart From Table.

See Also

Calculate

Create a Chart from a Table


Business Letter

When you create letters, you can add watermarks, graphics, and letterheads. You can also use a preformatted letter template that includes a letterhead.

     	Fonts

Change size and appearance of text by selecting a different font and font size. Shape text into a design with TextArt.

     	Flush Right

Align text at the right margin such as addresses and dates. Use the Date feature to add the current date to your letter.

     	Watermark

Use any clip art image to create a watermark behind text. WordPerfect comes with a variety of clip art images, some designed for use as watermarks.

     	Horizontal Lines

Create horizontal or vertical lines. Place a horizontal line in a header or footer and have it repeat on every page.

     	Center a Line

Center a line or center a page. To center a paragraph between margins use a double-indent. To space text so that it aligns at both margins use full justification.

See Also

About Formatting

Document Basics


Newsletter with TextArt

Enhance documents with TextArt, format with columns, or display detailed information in a table. You can also use a preformatted newsletter template.

     	TextArt

Shape text into designs and add patterns and color.

     	Columns

Format text in newspaper columns and have text fill in the first column then continue to the next. Or format text in parallel columns and enter information across columns (columns and rows).

     	Tables

Use a table instead of tabs, indents, or parallel columns to format detailed information in columns and rows. You can alter table lines and fill colors, as well as perform math functions. Use a Table Expert to apply table styles for you.

     	Bulleted Lists

Create a bulleted list to catch the eye and make important information stand out.

     	Line Between Columns

For lines between columns, use Column Borders to create a vertical separator line.

     	Horizontal Lines

Create horizontal or vertical lines. Place a horizontal line in a header or footer and have it repeat on every page.

See Also

About Formatting

Document Basics


Text Boxes in Columns

Put text in a box for emphasis. Then rotate it, shade it, remove the border, or add a shadow behind the box.

     	Text Box

Create a pull quote using the default text box (top and bottom borders only).

     	Drop Shadow

Create a three-dimensional effect with a shadow. If you select Put Box on Page, you can extend a box across columns.

     	Rotate Contents

Change fonts and font size and rotate the contents of a box.

     	Fill Style and Border

Add shading or change the style of the border or remove it altogether.

See Also

About Formatting

Document Basics


Report with Pie Chart

Create reports using charts, graphs, and equations. You can also use a preformatted report template.

     	Reverse Text

Create a dark background with contrasting text (white text on black).

     	Columns

Format text in newspaper columns and have text fill in the first column then continue to the next. Or format text in parallel columns and enter information across columns (columns and rows).

     	Pie Charts and Graphs

Use Chart on the Graphics menu to create charts and graphs.

     	Place a Box Across Columns

Position any image across columns (equation, table, chart, or graph). Place it in a graphics box (if not created in one), then select Put Box on Page.

     	Equations

Use Equations to access math symbols and create them in a box.

See Also

About Formatting

Document Basics


Form Using a Table

Create record keeping forms using a table. You can begin with one of the preformatted templates, or create your own record keeping form.

     	Format Row

Type instructions in header rows and format the row differently from the rest of the table.

     	Table

Begin with a basic table, then adjust it by joining and splitting cells to create the kind of form you want. Or use a Table Expert to create a table for you.

     	Add Shading (Fill) or Table Lines

Emphasize cells by changing the shading. Change the appearance of table borders and lines or remove them.

     	Join Cells Vertical

Join cells to create a larger cell. You can also format text differently in the larger cell, for example, format a column.

     	Join Cells Horizontal

Join cells to make room for more information on the form.

     	Split Cells

Split cells or divide them into smaller cells for small items on the form (for example, yes and no items, check boxes).

See Also

About Formatting

Document Basics


Flyer with Border

Create flyers with borders and graphics.

     	Enlarge First Letter

Enlarge the first character of a paragraph (drop cap) and select a font and relative position for that character only.

     	Insert Images

Images you insert in your document are created in a graphics box. You can then move and size the box with your mouse or edit the image.

     	Format Text Close to Image

Make text format close to the image (change how text wraps) instead of at the edge of the graphics box.

     	Borders

Create a border around a paragraph, column, or page. Choose from a variety of border styles or customize your own.

See Also

About Formatting

Document Basics


Book with Headers and Footers

Format and print in booklet format for either bound or folded documents. For folded cards, you can also use a preformatted card template.

     	Booklet Printing

For folded documents, subdivide one page into several, type text, then have WordPerfect arrange the pages in the correct order and orientation for folding.

     	Header

Create a header to repeat on every page (with or without incrementing page, chapter, or volume numbers).

     	Binding Width/Duplexing

Shift text away from the binding edge of the paper. If your printer supports duplexing, you can print on both sides of the page.

     	Heading Styles

Use a heading style to format headings in a book or report. This can save you time formatting and editing and ensures consistency.

     	Indent Both Sides

Use a double-indent to move text in from both margins.

     	Footer

Create a footer to repeat on every page (with or without incrementing page, chapter, or volume numbers).

     	Page Numbering

Turn on page numbering and select a position, number style, or beginning number.

See Also

About Formatting

Document Basics


QuickTips

QuickTips provide information about the icons and buttons on the Toolbar and Power Bar.  To turn off the text which displays at the location of the mouse pointer, see Toolbar/Power Bar Options.

See Also

Help Prompts


image (def)
image

Clip art, drawings, scanned pictures, or other graphics files you can retrieve into an application.


headings (def)
headings

QuickFormat uses automatic paragraph styles to format headings. Whenever you select Headings on the QuickFormat dialog box, an automatic paragraph style is created (if necessary) and applied to the heading where the insertion point is located and to any headings that you format with QuickFormat until you turn off QuickFormat.

When you turn on QuickFormat, if the heading at the insertion point is already formatted with an automatic paragraph style, the existing style is used to format other headings. Or, if the heading at the insertion point is already formatted with a normal paragraph style, a new automatic style is created and applied to the headings.


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

My First Documents

Document Basics

Preformatted Documents

WordPerfect Bars

Personal/Business Documents

Letters

Memos

Envelopes

Labels

Mass Mailings (Merge)

Resumes

Newsletters

Calendars

Folded and Bound Documents

Papers, Books, Reports

Papers, Books, Reports

Bibliography (Hanging Indent)

Outline

Footnotes

Endnotes

Index

Table of Contents/Authorities

Forms

Fax Forms

Record Keeping Forms

Awards Certificates

Forms to Fill In at the Computer

Merge Addresses to Form Letters

Use Preformatted Templates

Open and Save Documents

Open a Document

Start New Documents

Open Documents (Retrieve)

View Documents Without Opening

Convert Files

Open Multiple Documents

Open and Close Windows

Cascade Windows

Tile Windows

Arrange Windows

Size Windows

Save and Close Documents

Save Documents

Lock Files with a Password

Close and Exit

Find Documents I Have Saved

Manage Files and Directories

Find Files I Use Most (QuickList)

Back Up Current Document as I Work

Use Timed Backup

Create/Edit Text

Create Text

Choose Text Font, Size, Attributes

Shape Text (TextArt)

Enlarge First Letter (Drop Cap)

Create Reversed Text

Change Between Upper (ABC) and Lower (abc)

Add Characters (Symbols, Other Languages)

Rotate a Line of Text

Automate Text Changes (Styles)

Select, Move, Delete

Select Text to Change

Move Text with the Mouse

Move Text with Cut, Copy, Paste

Move to an Exact Location (Go To)

Move to a Bookmark

Delete

Undelete

Undo Deletions and Changes

Search for Text

Find and Replace Text

Find Files with Same Text (QuickFinder)

Find Words with Similar Form

Sort Text

Sort Words

Sort Lines and Paragraphs

Sort Merge Records

Sort in Tables and Columns

Check Documents

Check Spelling

Look Up Similar Words (Thesaurus)

Check Grammar

Correct Text Automatically (QuickCorrect)

Create Lists and Numbering

Automate Creating a List

Create Bulleted Lists and Numbering

Number Lines

Number Paragraphs

Number Pages

Number Pages in Headers/Footers

Number Anything (Counters)

Create Outline Numbering

Work with Large Documents

Create a Document That Includes Other Documents

Compare Two Documents for Differences

Attach a Non-printing Summary

Create a Bookmark to Mark My Place

Change How Documents Display

Change View Modes

Use Zoom to Edit or View Documents

Hide or Show Editing Symbols

Display Comments

Attach Information to Documents

Create Hidden Text

Insert Comments on Screen

Create a Document Summary

Format Document

Change Tabs, Margins, Line Spacing

About Formatting

Set Tabs (Ruler Bar)

Set Tabs

Set Margins

Create a Margin for Binding

Space Text Between Margins (Justify)

Change Line Spacing

Change Paragraph Spacing, Indent

Adjust Line Height (Typesetting)

Center, Align, Indent, Word/Letter Spacing

Center a Line

Center a Page

Align Text Flush Right

Align Text on a Decimal

Indent One Paragraph

Indent Several Paragraphs

Change Word/Letter Spacing

Copy or Edit Format

Copy Current Format

Create a Style of Current Format

Make Text Fit Current Format

Keep Text Together

View Format Codes (Reveal Codes)

Make Changes for a Later Page (Delay Codes)

Define Formatting for All Documents (Initial Codes Style)

Use Styles

About Styles

Select a Style

Create/Edit a Style

Use Outline Styles

Use Graphics Styles

Use Table Styles

Create Columns

Use Tabs

Use Indent

Create Columns

Align Text in Columns and Rows (Tables)

Create Tables (Columns and Rows)

About Tables

Create Tables

Delete Tables

Format Tables

Change Lines/Border and Add Shading

Insert Columns or Rows

Do Math in Tables

Repeat an Incrementing Pattern (Numbers, Days)

Merge into a Table

Create Footnotes/Endnotes, Headers/Footers

Create Footnotes

Create Endnotes

Edit Footnotes/Endnotes

Create Headers/Footers

Edit Headers/Footers

Use Watermarks

Create Outline Format

Create an Outline

Define Outline Formats

Create Outline Styles

Change the Size of My Paper

Select a Paper Size

Create a Paper Size

Create Labels

Create Envelopes

Subdivide a Page into Several Pages

End Page at an Exact Location (Page Break)

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Add Pictures

About Graphics

Insert Images (Graphics/ClipArt)

Create Graphs or Charts

Create Tables

Shape Text (TextArt)

Add a Watermark Behind Text

Add Characters (Symbols, Icons)

Edit Images in Documents

Move and Size Graphics with the Mouse

Position Graphics Exactly

Size Graphics Exactly

Change Image Appearance (Color, Rotate, Scale)

Edit Image (Image Tools)

Contour Text Around an Image

Create New Images (Edit ClipArt)

Use a Graphics Program to Modify an Image

Create Lines and Borders

Insert Straight Lines

Insert Lines Between Columns

Create Borders Around Text

Customize Borders

Create Text Effects

Create and Shape Text (TextArt)

Enlarge First Letter (Drop Cap)

Create Reversed Text

Create Text in a Box

Rotate Text in a Box

Add a Caption

Rotate a Caption

Add Text to Graphics

Create Borders Around Text

Create Charts, Graphs, Equations

Create Charts (Pie, Bar, Line)

Create Equations

Create Motion and Sound

Create Sound Clips

Add Video Clips

Print Documents

Print Documents

About Printing

View Documents Before I Print

Print Documents

Print Documents on Disk

Cancel Print Jobs

Print on Both Sides (Duplex)

Print on a Different Size Paper

Change Paper Size

Print Envelopes

Print Labels

Print Several Pages on One Page

Print Booklets, Pamphlets, Cards

Make Printing Adjustments

Adjust for Binding Width

Print Reversed Text

Print Sideways (Landscape, Rotate Text)

Print a Range of Pages

Print from a Different Paper Tray

Adjust for Feeding Paper Manually

Print in Different Fonts

Select or Change Printers

Select a Printer

Change Printer Settings

Print on a Network

Change Network Settings

Troubleshooting

Why Can't I Print

Why Can't I Get More Fonts

Why Does My Printed Document Look Different

Use Time-Saving Features

Use Buttons

Use the Power Bar to Format Documents

Use the Toolbar for Often-Used Features

Use the Ruler Bar for Tabs, Margins, Tables

Find Files

Find Files I Use Most (QuickList)

Find Files from an Index (QuickFinder)

Automate Formatting

Use Preformatted Templates

Make Text Fit Existing Format

Copy Existing Text Appearance (QuickFormat)

Create Formatting Styles

Create Styles from Existing Text

Automate Spelling Corrections

Use QuickCorrect

Work with Large Documents

Create a Document That Includes Other Documents

Compare Two Documents for Differences

Attach a Non-printing Summary

Create a Bookmark to Mark My Place

Mass Produce Documents and Data (Merge)

About Merge

Create Form Files

Create Data Files

Perform Merges

Merge an Address List to Envelopes

Merge Information to Labels

Merge into Expanding Tables

Create Keyboard Merges

Automate Building of Lists, Tables, Indexes

Create an Index, List, Table of Contents/Authorities

Automate Tasks with Macros

Play Existing Macros

Use Macros Shipping with WordPerfect

Create/Edit Macros

Assign Macros to Buttons

Customize WordPerfect

Change Screen Colors

Change Reveal Codes Colors

Change Text/Printing Colors

Change Overall Screen Colors

Customize Toolbar

Create/Edit Toolbars

Change Keyboards

Switch to the WP for DOS Keyboard

Map My Own Keyboard

Change WordPerfect Setup (Preferences)

Display Preferences (Document, Ruler, Zoom)

Environment Preferences (Format, Menus, Save)

File Preferences

Convert Preferences (Delimiters, Metafiles)

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences

Writing Tools Preferences (Spell Check, Grammatik)

Print Preferences

Toolbar/Power Bar Options

Status Bar Options

Customize Menus

Edit Pulldown Menus

Work with Other Languages

Change Language Formats for Dates, Sort, Footnotes, Tables

Add Characters (Symbols, Other Languages)

Change Units of Measure

Send, Link, Launch, and Import

Send a Fax

Send Electronic Mail

Send Mass Mailings (Merge)

Import or Link Spreadsheets/Databases

Link Other Windows Applications (DDE)

Embed Objects (OLE)

Scan Images into WordPerfect

Create Hypertext  Links


How Do I

Create Documents

My First Documents

Personal/Business Documents

Papers, Books, Reports

Forms

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Open a Document

Open Multiple Documents

Save and Close Documents

Find Documents I Have Saved

Back Up Current Document as I Work

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Create Text

Select, Move, Delete

Search for Text

Sort Text

Check Documents

Create Lists and Numbering

Work with Large Documents

Change How Documents Display

Attach Information to Documents

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Change Tabs, Margins, Line Spacing

Center, Align, Indent, Word/Letter Spacing

Copy or Edit Format

Use Styles

Create Columns

Create Tables (Columns and Rows)

Create Footnotes/Endnotes, Headers/Footers

Create Outline Format

Change the Size of My Paper

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Add Pictures

Edit Images in Documents

Create New Images (Edit ClipArt)

Create Lines and Borders

Create Text Effects

Create Charts, Graphs, Equations

Create Motion and Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Print Documents

Print on a Different Size Paper

Make Printing Adjustments

Select or Change Printers

Print on a Network

Troubleshooting

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Use Buttons

Find Files

Automate Formatting

Automate Spelling Corrections

Work with Large Documents

Mass Produce Documents and Data (Merge)

Automate Building of Lists, Tables, Indexes

Automate Tasks with Macros

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Change Screen Colors

Customize Toolbar

Change Keyboards

Change WordPerfect Setup (Preferences)

Customize Menus

Work with Other Languages

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import

Send a Fax

Send Electronic Mail

Send Mass Mailings (Merge)

Import or Link Spreadsheets/Databases

Link Other Windows Applications (DDE)

Embed Objects (OLE)

Scan Images into WordPerfect

Create Hypertext  Links


How Do I

Create Documents

My First Documents

Document Basics

Preformatted Documents

WordPerfect Bars

Personal/Business Documents

Papers, Books, Reports

Forms

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

My First Documents

Personal/Business Documents

Letters

Memos

Envelopes

Labels

Mass Mailings (Merge)

Resumes

Newsletters

Calendars

Folded and Bound Documents

Papers, Books, Reports

Forms

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

My First Documents

Personal/Business Documents

Papers, Books, Reports

Papers, Books, Reports

Bibliography (Hanging Indent)

Outline

Footnotes

Endnotes

Index

Table of Contents/Authorities

Forms

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

My First Documents

Personal/Business Documents

Papers, Books, Reports

Forms

Fax Forms

Record Keeping Forms

Awards Certificates

Forms to Fill In at the Computer

Merge Addresses to Form Letters

Use Preformatted Templates

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Open a Document

Start New Documents

Open Documents (Retrieve)

View Documents Without Opening

Convert Files

Open Multiple Documents

Save and Close Documents

Find Documents I Have Saved

Back Up Current Document as I Work

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Open a Document

Open Multiple Documents

Open and Close Windows

Cascade Windows

Tile Windows

Arrange Windows

Size Windows

Save and Close Documents

Find Documents I Have Saved

Back Up Current Document as I Work

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Open a Document

Open Multiple Documents

Save and Close Documents

Save Documents

Lock Files with a Password

Close and Exit

Find Documents I Have Saved

Back Up Current Document as I Work

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Open a Document

Open Multiple Documents

Save and Close Documents

Find Documents I Have Saved

Manage Files and Directories

Find Files I Use Most (QuickList)

Back Up Current Document as I Work

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Open a Document

Open Multiple Documents

Save and Close Documents

Find Documents I Have Saved

Back Up Current Document as I Work

Use Timed Backup

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Create Text

Choose Text Font, Size, Attributes

Shape Text (TextArt)

Enlarge First Letter (Drop Cap)

Create Reversed Text

Change Between Upper (ABC) and Lower (abc)

Add Characters (Symbols, Other Languages)

Rotate a Line of Text

Automate Text Changes (Styles)

Select, Move, Delete

Search for Text

Sort Text

Check Documents

Create Lists and Numbering

Work with Large Documents

Change How Documents Display

Attach Information to Documents

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Create Text

Select, Move, Delete

Select Text to Change

Move Text with the Mouse

Move Text with Cut, Copy, Paste

Move to an Exact Location (Go To)

Move to a Bookmark

Delete

Undelete

Undo Deletions and Changes

Search for Text

Sort Text

Check Documents

Create Lists and Numbering

Work with Large Documents

Change How Documents Display

Attach Information to Documents

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Create Text

Select, Move, Delete

Search for Text

Find and Replace Text

Find Files with Same Text (QuickFinder)

Find Words with Similar Form

Sort Text

Check Documents

Create Lists and Numbering

Work with Large Documents

Change How Documents Display

Attach Information to Documents

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Create Text

Select, Move, Delete

Search for Text

Sort Text

Sort Words

Sort Lines and Paragraphs

Sort Merge Records

Sort in Tables and Columns

Check Documents

Create Lists and Numbering

Work with Large Documents

Change How Documents Display

Attach Information to Documents

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Create Text

Select, Move, Delete

Search for Text

Sort Text

Check Documents

Check Spelling

Look Up Similar Words (Thesaurus)

Check Grammar

Correct Text Automatically (QuickCorrect)

Create Lists and Numbering

Work with Large Documents

Change How Documents Display

Attach Information to Documents

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Create Text

Select, Move, Delete

Search for Text

Sort Text

Check Documents

Create Lists and Numbering

Automate Creating a List

Create Bulleted Lists and Numbering

Number Lines

Number Paragraphs

Number Pages

Number Pages in Headers/Footers

Number Anything (Counters)

Create Outline Numbering

Work with Large Documents

Change How Documents Display

Attach Information to Documents

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Create Text

Select, Move, Delete

Search for Text

Sort Text

Check Documents

Create Lists and Numbering

Work with Large Documents

Create a Document That Includes Other Documents

Compare Two Documents for Differences

Attach a Non-printing Summary

Create a Bookmark to Mark My Place

Change How Documents Display

Attach Information to Documents

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Create Text

Select, Move, Delete

Search for Text

Sort Text

Check Documents

Create Lists and Numbering

Work with Large Documents

Change How Documents Display

Change View Modes

Use Zoom to Edit or View Documents

Hide or Show Editing Symbols

Display Comments

Attach Information to Documents

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Create Text

Select, Move, Delete

Search for Text

Sort Text

Check Documents

Create Lists and Numbering

Work with Large Documents

Change How Documents Display

Attach Information to Documents

Create Hidden Text

Insert Comments on Screen

Create a Document Summary

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Change Tabs, Margins, Line Spacing

About Formatting

Set Tabs (Ruler Bar)

Set Tabs

Set Margins

Create a Margin for Binding

Space Text Between Margins (Justify)

Change Line Spacing

Change Paragraph Spacing, Indent

Adjust Line Height (Typesetting)

Center, Align, Indent, Word/Letter Spacing

Copy or Edit Format

Use Styles

Create Columns

Create Tables (Columns and Rows)

Create Footnotes/Endnotes, Headers/Footers

Create Outline Format

Change the Size of My Paper

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Change Tabs, Margins, Line Spacing

Center, Align, Indent, Word/Letter Spacing

Center a Line

Center a Page

Align Text Flush Right

Align Text on a Decimal

Indent One Paragraph

Indent Several Paragraphs

Change Word/Letter Spacing

Copy or Edit Format

Use Styles

Create Columns

Create Tables (Columns and Rows)

Create Footnotes/Endnotes, Headers/Footers

Create Outline Format

Change the Size of My Paper

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Change Tabs, Margins, Line Spacing

Center, Align, Indent, Word/Letter Spacing

Copy or Edit Format

Copy Current Format

Create a Style of Current Format

Make Text Fit Current Format

Keep Text Together

View Format Codes (Reveal Codes)

Make Changes for a Later Page (Delay Codes)

Define Formatting for All Documents (Initial Codes Style)

Use Styles

Create Columns

Create Tables (Columns and Rows)

Create Footnotes/Endnotes, Headers/Footers

Create Outline Format

Change the Size of My Paper

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Change Tabs, Margins, Line Spacing

Center, Align, Indent, Word/Letter Spacing

Copy or Edit Format

Use Styles

About Styles

Select a Style

Create/Edit a Style

Use Outline Styles

Use Graphics Styles

Use Table Styles

Create Columns

Create Tables (Columns and Rows)

Create Footnotes/Endnotes, Headers/Footers

Create Outline Format

Change the Size of My Paper

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Change Tabs, Margins, Line Spacing

Center, Align, Indent, Word/Letter Spacing

Copy or Edit Format

Use Styles

Create Columns

Use Tabs

Use Indent

Create Columns

Align Text in Columns and Rows (Tables)

Create Tables (Columns and Rows)

Create Footnotes/Endnotes, Headers/Footers

Create Outline Format

Change the Size of My Paper

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Change Tabs, Margins, Line Spacing

Center, Align, Indent, Word/Letter Spacing

Copy or Edit Format

Use Styles

Create Columns

Create Tables (Columns and Rows)

About Tables

Create Tables

Delete Tables

Format Tables

Change Lines/Border and Add Shading

Insert Columns or Rows

Do Math in Tables

Repeat an Incrementing Pattern (Numbers, Days)

Merge into a Table

Create Footnotes/Endnotes, Headers/Footers

Create Outline Format

Change the Size of My Paper

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Change Tabs, Margins, Line Spacing

Center, Align, Indent, Word/Letter Spacing

Copy or Edit Format

Use Styles

Create Columns

Create Tables (Columns and Rows)

Create Footnotes/Endnotes, Headers/Footers

Create Footnotes

Create Endnotes

Edit Footnotes/Endnotes

Create Headers/Footers

Edit Headers/Footers

Use Watermarks

Create Outline Format

Change the Size of My Paper

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Change Tabs, Margins, Line Spacing

Center, Align, Indent, Word/Letter Spacing

Copy or Edit Format

Use Styles

Create Columns

Create Tables (Columns and Rows)

Create Footnotes/Endnotes, Headers/Footers

Create Outline Format

Create an Outline

Define Outline Formats

Create Outline Styles

Change the Size of My Paper

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Change Tabs, Margins, Line Spacing

Center, Align, Indent, Word/Letter Spacing

Copy or Edit Format

Use Styles

Create Columns

Create Tables (Columns and Rows)

Create Footnotes/Endnotes, Headers/Footers

Create Outline Format

Change the Size of My Paper

Select a Paper Size

Create a Paper Size

Create Labels

Create Envelopes

Subdivide a Page into Several Pages

End Page at an Exact Location (Page Break)

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Add Pictures

About Graphics

Insert Images (Graphics/ClipArt)

Create Graphs or Charts

Create Tables

Shape Text (TextArt)

Add a Watermark Behind Text

Add Characters (Symbols, Icons)

Edit Images in Documents

Create New Images (Edit ClipArt)

Create Lines and Borders

Create Text Effects

Create Charts, Graphs, Equations

Create Motion and Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Add Pictures

Edit Images in Documents

Move and Size Graphics with the Mouse

Position Graphics Exactly

Size Graphics Exactly

Change Image Appearance (Color, Rotate, Scale)

Edit Image (Image Tools)

Contour Text Around an Image

Create New Images (Edit ClipArt)

Create Lines and Borders

Create Text Effects

Create Charts, Graphs, Equations

Create Motion and Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Add Pictures

Edit Images in Documents

Create New Images (Edit ClipArt)

Use a Graphics Program to Modify an Image

Create Lines and Borders

Create Text Effects

Create Charts, Graphs, Equations

Create Motion and Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Add Pictures

Edit Images in Documents

Create New Images (Edit ClipArt)

Create Lines and Borders

Insert Straight Lines

Insert Lines Between Columns

Create Borders Around Text

Customize Borders

Create Text Effects

Create Charts, Graphs, Equations

Create Motion and Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Add Pictures

Edit Images in Documents

Create New Images (Edit ClipArt)

Create Lines and Borders

Create Text Effects

Create and Shape Text (TextArt)

Enlarge First Letter (Drop Cap)

Create Reversed Text

Create Text in a Box

Rotate Text in a Box

Add a Caption

Rotate a Caption

Add Text to Graphics

Create Borders Around Text

Create Charts, Graphs, Equations

Create Motion and Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Add Pictures

Edit Images in Documents

Create New Images (Edit ClipArt)

Create Lines and Borders

Create Text Effects

Create Charts, Graphs, Equations

Create Charts (Pie, Bar, Line)

Create Equations

Create Motion and Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Add Pictures

Edit Images in Documents

Create New Images (Edit ClipArt)

Create Lines and Borders

Create Text Effects

Create Charts, Graphs, Equations

Create Motion and Sound

Create Sound Clips

Add Video Clips

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Print Documents

About Printing

View Documents Before I Print

Print Documents

Print Documents on Disk

Cancel Print Jobs

Print on Both Sides (Duplex)

Print on a Different Size Paper

Make Printing Adjustments

Select or Change Printers

Print on a Network

Troubleshooting

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Print Documents

Print on a Different Size Paper

Change Paper Size

Print Envelopes

Print Labels

Print Several Pages on One Page

Print Booklets, Pamphlets, Cards

Make Printing Adjustments

Select or Change Printers

Print on a Network

Troubleshooting

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Print Documents

Print on a Different Size Paper

Make Printing Adjustments

Adjust for Binding Width

Print Reversed Text

Print Sideways (Landscape, Rotate Text)

Print a Range of Pages

Print from a Different Paper Tray

Adjust for Feeding Paper Manually

Print in Different Fonts

Select or Change Printers

Print on a Network

Troubleshooting

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Print Documents

Print on a Different Size Paper

Make Printing Adjustments

Select or Change Printers

Select a Printer

Change Printer Settings

Print on a Network

Troubleshooting

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Print Documents

Print on a Different Size Paper

Make Printing Adjustments

Select or Change Printers

Print on a Network

Change Network Settings

Troubleshooting

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Print Documents

Print on a Different Size Paper

Make Printing Adjustments

Select or Change Printers

Print on a Network

Troubleshooting

Why Can't I Print

Why Can't I Get More Fonts

Why Does My Printed Document Look Different

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Use Buttons

Use the Power Bar to Format Documents

Use the Toolbar for Often-Used Features

Use the Ruler Bar for Tabs, Margins, Tables

Find Files

Automate Formatting

Automate Spelling Corrections

Work with Large Documents

Mass Produce Documents and Data (Merge)

Automate Building of Lists, Tables, Indexes

Automate Tasks with Macros

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Use Buttons

Find Files

Find Files I Use Most (QuickList)

Find Files from an Index (QuickFinder)

Automate Formatting

Automate Spelling Corrections

Work with Large Documents

Mass Produce Documents and Data (Merge)

Automate Building of Lists, Tables, Indexes

Automate Tasks with Macros

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Use Buttons

Find Files

Automate Formatting

Use Preformatted Templates

Make Text Fit Existing Format

Copy Existing Text Appearance (QuickFormat)

Create Formatting Styles

Create Styles from Existing Text

Automate Spelling Corrections

Work with Large Documents

Mass Produce Documents and Data (Merge)

Automate Building of Lists, Tables, Indexes

Automate Tasks with Macros

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Use Buttons

Find Files

Automate Formatting

Automate Spelling Corrections

Use QuickCorrect

Work with Large Documents

Mass Produce Documents and Data (Merge)

Automate Building of Lists, Tables, Indexes

Automate Tasks with Macros

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Use Buttons

Find Files

Automate Formatting

Automate Spelling Corrections

Work with Large Documents

Create a Document That Includes Other Documents

Compare Two Documents for Differences

Attach a Non-printing Summary

Create a Bookmark to Mark My Place

Mass Produce Documents and Data (Merge)

Automate Building of Lists, Tables, Indexes

Automate Tasks with Macros

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Use Buttons

Find Files

Automate Formatting

Automate Spelling Corrections

Work with Large Documents

Mass Produce Documents and Data (Merge)

About Merge

Create Form Files

Create Data Files

Perform Merges

Merge an Address List to Envelopes

Merge Information to Labels

Merge into Expanding Tables

Create Keyboard Merges

Automate Building of Lists, Tables, Indexes

Automate Tasks with Macros

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Use Buttons

Find Files

Automate Formatting

Automate Spelling Corrections

Work with Large Documents

Mass Produce Documents and Data (Merge)

Automate Building of Lists, Tables, Indexes

Create an Index, List, Table of Contents/Authorities

Automate Tasks with Macros

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Use Buttons

Find Files

Automate Formatting

Automate Spelling Corrections

Work with Large Documents

Mass Produce Documents and Data (Merge)

Automate Building of Lists, Tables, Indexes

Automate Tasks with Macros

Play Existing Macros

Use Macros Shipping with WordPerfect

Create/Edit Macros

Assign Macros to Buttons

Customize WordPerfect

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Change Screen Colors

Change Reveal Codes Colors

Change Text/Printing Colors

Change Overall Screen Colors

Customize Toolbar

Change Keyboards

Change WordPerfect Setup (Preferences)

Customize Menus

Work with Other Languages

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Change Screen Colors

Customize Toolbar

Create/Edit Toolbars

Change Keyboards

Change WordPerfect Setup (Preferences)

Customize Menus

Work with Other Languages

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Change Screen Colors

Customize Toolbar

Change Keyboards

Switch to the WP for DOS Keyboard

Map My Own Keyboard

Change WordPerfect Setup (Preferences)

Customize Menus

Work with Other Languages

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Change Screen Colors

Customize Toolbar

Change Keyboards

Change WordPerfect Setup (Preferences)

Display Preferences (Document, Ruler, Zoom)

Environment Preferences (Format, Menus, Save)

File Preferences

Convert Preferences (Delimiters, Metafiles)

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences

Writing Tools Preferences (Spell Check, Grammatik)

Print Preferences

Toolbar/Power Bar Options

Status Bar Options

Customize Menus

Work with Other Languages

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Change Screen Colors

Customize Toolbar

Change Keyboards

Change WordPerfect Setup (Preferences)

Customize Menus

Edit Pulldown Menus

Work with Other Languages

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


How Do I

Create Documents

Open and Save Documents

Create/Edit Text

Format Document

Add Pictures, Graphics, Sound

Print Documents

Use Time-Saving Features

Customize WordPerfect

Change Screen Colors

Customize Toolbar

Change Keyboards

Change WordPerfect Setup (Preferences)

Customize Menus

Work with Other Languages

Change Language Formats for Dates, Sort, Footnotes, Tables

Add Characters (Symbols, Other Languages)

Change Units of Measure

Send, Link, Launch, and Import


Using Help

The following information explains basic features of a Help topic (this screen is a Help topic).

Pop-up definitions are dot-underlined, colored words and phrases that you click to see a "pop-up" window that displays information. The pop-ups below explain the buttons on the top of this Help screen, and are examples of the pop-ups found in Help. Click once to read them, then click again to close them.

Contents

Search

Back

History

Print

Close

Jump terms are underlined, colored words and phrases that move you to another Help topic. To read the topic about Context-sensitive Help, click this jump term:  context-sensitive Help, then click the Back button to return to this Help topic.

	The light bulb is an icon containing a hint. Click the light bulb to read the hint.
	Text following a route icon shows the menus and buttons you choose to access a feature.
	Text following an exclamation point is important information.
	Text following a reference icon directs you to the printed documentation.
Many Help topics contain graphics you can click to display a pop-up definition.


object linking and embedding (OLE) (def)
object linking and embedding (OLE)

The process of creating a document in one application (client or container application) that contains text or graphics created in another application (server application). When a linked object is altered in the server application, it is automatically updated in the client/container application. Embedded objects are not updated.


Close button (def)
Close button

A Help button you can use to close the Help window.


ODMA Support

Purpose

ODMA (Open Document Management API) lets you use other ODMA-supporting document management systems you have installed instead of WordPerfect's file management dialog.

Steps

To use a WordPerfect file management dialog,

1	Request a WordPerfect file management dialog box from the current document management system.

To return to your document management system,

1	Open a WordPerfect file management dialog box.

2	Choose the appropriate button.

See Also

Managing Files


route (def)
 route

The path that indicates where a feature is found. The hand icon points to the steps you take to access the feature.


jump term (def)
jump term

A graphic or underlined, colored word or phrase you can choose to go to a related Help topic.


Open a Copy of a File

Purpose

Use Open As Copy to open a document as a read-only copy. You can read the document and make changes to it, but you must save it with a different filename.

Steps

1	Choose Open from the File menu, then select Open As Copy.

2	Specify the filename you want, then choose Open.

3	Read the file or make changes to it.

4	Choose Save As from the File menu, type a new name for the file, then choose Save.

See Also

Opening Files


Locating Applications

Macro Facility, Play, Locate

Purpose

When you play a macro, the Macro Facility checks the BIF file for the path to the application's .exe. If the location is not in the .BIF, Macro Facility asks you to specify the location of the application's .exe.

Steps

1	From the Macro Facility, choose Play File macro from the Macros menu.

2	Select the macro you want to play, then choose Play.

3	Specify the location of the .exe file for the application.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Select Directory


Context-Sensitive Help

Purpose

Use Shift+F1 or F1 to get context-sensitive Help in a dialog box, menu, or window. Shift+F1 requires a mouse and provides more specific help than F1.

Steps

To use Shift+F1,

1	Press Shift+F1 in a dialog box, menu, or window.

2	Click the item or control you want information about.

To use F1,

1	Press F1 while a menu item is highlighted or when a dialog box or window is open.

or

Choose the Help button in a dialog box.

See Also

Using Help


 Hint

Find allows you to use multiple wildcard characters (* and ?) in your search string.


Assign Characters to Keys

Purpose

Use the Keyboard Editor and the Characters feature to assign characters in other alphabets to combinations of keys (such as A+Alt) on your keyboard.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Keyboard.

2	Select the existing keyboard layout you want to add the characters to, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, type a name for the new keyboard layout, then choose OK.

3	Click in the list of possible key combinations, then select the key combination you want to assign to a character by scrolling or typing the letter.

4	Select Play a Keyboard Script, then click in the text box.

5	Press Ctrl+W to bring up the Characters dialog box.

6	Choose the character set you want to use, then select the character you want to assign.

7	Choose Insert and Close.

8	Choose Assign Script.

9	Choose OK, choose Select to use the new keyboard layout, then choose Close.

See Also

WordPerfect Characters


Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder, Concepts

Purpose

Use Concept Builder to expand your QuickFinder searches by including alternative forms of words such as conjugations, synonyms, and other spellings.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box.

2	Type the word(s) you want to Search For, then choose Concepts.

3	Select the search term for which you want to include alternate words.

4	Choose from the following options:

Word Forms

Thesaurus

Thes. -> Word Forms

Typo

Phonetic

5	Select the original or alternative words you do not want to use and choose Disable. (Select disabled words and choose Enable to include them again.)

6	Choose OK to include the enabled alternative words in the search.

7	Choose Find to begin the search including the alternative words.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Search For

QuickFinder Search In

Refine QuickFinder Searches


Select Directory

Purpose

Use the folder icon to select the directory you want. It appears next to text boxes where you need to specify a directory name. When you choose OK, the directory you selected appears in the text box.

Steps

1	Click the folder icon.

2	Select the drive and directory you want to list the files in.

or

Choose a QuickList entry.

3	Choose OK.


Filename

Purpose

Use the Filename text box to specify the file you want. You can type in the full pathname of a file, or select it from the list of files in the current directory. You can also use the History list to access a list of previously opened files or selected directories.

Steps

To select a particular filename,

1	In a directory dialog box, select the drive and directory you want to list the files in.

or

Choose a QuickList entry.

2	Specify the name of the file you want to open, select or save.

3	Choose OK.

or

Right-click on the files list, then choose the option you want.

To select a previously selected filename or directory,

1	In a directory dialog box, click the arrow to the right of the Filename text box.

2	Select the name of the file you want to open, or the directory you want to use.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Directories List

Drives

File List

File Options

QuickList


List Files of Type

Purpose

Use the List Files of Type drop-down list to choose the type of files you want to display. For example, choosing Text Files (*.txt) displays all the files in the current directory with a .TXT extension.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, choose the file type you want to display in the file list.

See Also

Directories List

Drives

File List

QuickList

Save File As Type


Drives

Purpose

Use the Drives drop-down list to choose the drive in which you want to list directories and files.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, choose the drive you want.

See Also

Directories List

File List

QuickList


File List

Purpose

Use the file list box to view the files in the currently selected drive and directory, and to select the files you want to use.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the type of files you want to list.

2	Select the drive and directory whose files you want to list.

or

Select a QuickList item.

3	Select the file(s) you want.

4	Choose OK.

or

Right-click on the files list, then select the option you want.

See Also

Directories List

Drives

File List Display

File Options

List Files of Type

QuickList

Save File As Type


QuickList

Purpose

Use the QuickList to access directories or files without entering the full path every time. Use the QuickList options to change the default directory display in your directory dialog boxes and to edit your QuickList.

Steps

To display the QuickList,

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose QuickList.

2	Choose Show QuickList, Show Directories, or Show Both.

To use the QuickList,

1	Select the QuickList item you want.

2	Select the file(s) you want.

3	Choose OK.

or

Right-click on the files list, then select the option you want.

See Also

Add or Edit QuickList Item

Delete QuickList Item

Print Lists

Open/Save As Setup


Viewer

Purpose

Use the Viewer to display, print, or play files without retrieving them into the document window.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list, then select a file from the file list.

2	Choose View.

3	Right-click on the Viewer window, then select an option from the QuickMenu to use Viewer features.

4	Choose Close from the Control menu to exit the Viewer.

See Also

Additional Information about Viewer

Viewer Info

Viewing Files


File Options

Purpose

Use the File Options pop-up list to choose options you want to perform on the selected file(s) or directory.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to affect.

2	Choose File Options, then choose from the following options:

Copy

Move

Rename

Delete

Change Attributes

Print

Print File List

Create Directory

Remove Directory

Rename Directory


Directories List

Purpose

Use the Directories list box to view a list of directories and subdirectories in a selected drive and to select the directory you want to use.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select a drive from the Drives drop-down list, then double-click directory names to list their subdirectories.

2	Double-click a directory name to select that directory and display the names of the files in it.

3	Right-click on the Directories list, then choose Create Directory to create a subdirectory within a selected directory.

or

Choose Remove Directory to remove the selected directory.

See Also

Create Directory

Drives

File Options

Print Lists

QuickList

Remove Directory


Sorting Files

Open/Save As Setup, Sort By and Sort Order

Purpose

Use Sort By to sort filenames in the files list box by filename, extension, size, date/time, descriptive name, or descriptive type. Use Sort Order to specify an ascending or descending order.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Setup.

2	Select a Sort By option.

3	Select a Sort Order.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Speedup Files

File List Display

Open/Save As Setup


File List Display

Open/Save As Setup, File List Display

Purpose

Use File List Display to specify which elements of a file's description will display in the file list box.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Setup.

2	Select a Show option.

3	Select Show Column Labels if you want to display headings for Custom Columns.

4	Select Show Hidden/System Files if you want to display hidden and system files.

5	Select Change Default Directory to change the default directory every time you move to a new directory.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Speedup Files

Open/Save As Setup

Sorting Files


Create Speedup Files

Open/Save As Setup, Create Speedup Files

Purpose

Use Create Speedup Files to make files display faster when you are displaying Document Summary information (descriptive name and type) in the file list.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Setup.

2	Select Custom Columns or Descriptive Name, Filename.

3	Select Create Speedup Files.

4	Specify a directory to store the speedup files.

5	If the directory specified does not exist, choose Yes to create the directory.

See Also

File List Display

Open/Save As Setup

Sorting Files


Word Forms

Includes conjugations, plurals, adjective, and adverb forms of the selected word in the search.


Save File As Type

Purpose

Use the Save File As Type drop-down list to choose the format of the file you want to save.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the drive and directory where you want to save your file.

2	Specify the name of the file you want to save.

3	Choose the format you want.

4	Choose OK to save the file in the selected format.

See Also

Directories List

Drives

Filename

File List

QuickList

Save Format


QuickFinder Search For

QuickFinder, Search For

Purpose

Use Search For to specify the word string or word pattern you want QuickFinder to find.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, type a word or phrase to search for.

2	Choose Operators, then choose options to refine your search.

3	Choose Concepts, choose the words you want to include, then choose OK.

4	Specify a File Pattern and choose a Search In option to add further search criteria.

5	Choose Find.

See Also

Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Search In

Refine QuickFinder Searches


QuickFinder

Purpose

Use QuickFinder to search for specific files by file pattern, words or phrases, summary fields (such as descriptive name, abstract, or typist), date range, or QuickFinder (full-text) index. QuickFinder indexes are full-text indexes of all the words in a collection of documents.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then specify your search criteria.

2	Type a file pattern to search for.

3	Type a text string to search for.

4	Choose a Search In option.

5	Select WordPerfect Documents Only to limit the search to documents in WordPerfect 5.0/5.1/5.2/6.0 format.

6	Specify a From date and To date to specify files whose DOS revision date falls within a date range.

7	Choose Find to obtain a list of filenames that match your search criteria. The Search Results List displays all matching filenames.

Choose from the following options for more information:

File Pattern

Search For

Search In

Concepts

Operators

Options

See Also

Additional Information about QuickFinder

Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Preferences


Create or Edit Index Criteria

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use QuickFinder Indexer to create and edit indexing criteria (the directories, files, or indexing options included in your index) and to generate QuickFinder indexes for quick searches. QuickFinder indexes are full-text indexes of all the words in a collection of documents.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Choose Create, type a name for the index, then choose OK.

or

Select the name of the index you want to edit, then choose Edit.

3	Type the name of the directory or file you want to add.

or

Choose Browse to display a list of files and directories, then select the directories you want to index, then choose Add. Select the directories you do not want to index, then choose Remove.

4	Select Include Subtree to include all subdirectories.

5	Choose Options to set individual indexing preferences.

6	Choose Generate to create the index.

If you are editing an index, indicate if you want to regenerate the entire index or update the index with new or modified files, then choose OK.

7	From QuickFinder, enter search criteria, then choose Find to search the newly created index.

Choose the following option for more information:

Options

See Also

Add Directory or File

Index Name

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Viewing Files

Viewer, select a file

Purpose

Use the Viewer to display, print, or play the contents of text, graphics, audio-visual, sound, cursor, icon, and fax files. The Viewer may not show all formatting exactly as it appears in the file.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list, then select a file from the file list.

2	Choose View.

Use the controls in the Viewer to play, stop, reset, fast forward, rewind, or move to the beginning or end of audio-visual or sound file.

3	To use features supported by the Viewer, right-click inside the Viewer window, then select an option from the QuickMenu. The QuickMenu will change, depending on what type of file you are viewing.

Copy to Clipboard

Document Summary

Document Text

Find

Find Next

Find Previous

Font

Go To Page

Graphic Conversion

Hex Display

Invert

Next Page

Previous Page

Print

Remove Highlights

Rotate

Viewer Info

Word Wrap

Zoom

4	Choose Close from the Viewer Control menu to exit the Viewer.

See Also

Printing from the Viewer

Viewer Info


Delete Index

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete Index to delete an existing QuickFinder index.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then select the index you want to delete.

2	Choose Options, choose Delete, then choose Yes.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


QuickFinder Document Summary Fields

QuickFinder, Options, Summary Fields

Purpose

Use Summary Fields to display and search a list of document summary fields. Only WordPerfect 5.0/5.1/5.2/6.0-level documents that contain document summary information will be found.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Options, then choose All Summary Fields to expand the dialog box to display all possible document summary fields.

or

Choose Default Summary Fields to display a selected set of summary fields.

2	Specify the text, numbers, or dates you want to find.

3	Specify additional searching criteria such as file patterns, phrases, or date ranges.

4	Choose Find to perform the search.

See Also

Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Options

Refine QuickFinder Searches


Clear

QuickFinder, Options, Clear

Purpose

Use Clear to remove all present QuickFinder search criteria, including all document summary fields scrolled off-screen (if the dialog has been expanded using Default Summary Fields or All Summary Fields under Options).

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Options, then choose Clear.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Options

QuickFinder Document Summary Fields


Thesaurus

Includes synonyms of the selected word from the Thesaurus list in the search.


Thes. -> Word Forms

Includes conjugations, plurals, adjective, and adverb forms of the synonyms of the selected word in the search.


Typos

Includes possible misspellings and typos of the selected word in the search, and words the selected word might be a misspelling or typo for.


QuickFinder File Pattern

QuickFinder, File Pattern

Purpose

Use File Pattern to find files with filenames that contain characters or extensions in common. You can specify multiple directories or file patterns in this field.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, type a file pattern. Use wildcards to help define the pattern.

2	Type a word string to Search For, along with any operators you want.

You may specify additional search criteria in any of the QuickFinder fields, such as Search For and Date Range.

3	Choose Find to perform the search.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Search For

QuickFinder Search In


QuickFinder Search In

QuickFinder, Search In

Purpose

Use Search In to specify which drives, directories, or indexes you want to search for files.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose a Search In option.

If you selected QuickFinder Index, select the index you want to search from. Information about the index appears on the next line of the dialog box.

If you selected Disk, choose the disk you want to search.

2	Specify your search criteria in the Search For, File Pattern, Date Range, or Document Summary fields, then choose Find.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Search For


Phonetic

Includes phonetic spellings that sound like the selected word in the search.


Scan Off

Appears as /Noscan

Disables QuickFinder's scanning in proximity and quoted searches. This results in a longer list of files that include the search words, but does not check their order or closeness.


button (def)
button

A graphic that represents an option or command. Select the button to activate the option or to execute the command.


template (def)
template

A page layout, chart, or background format you can use as a model.


help prompt (def)
help prompt

A short explanation of the menu item or option you have selected.


folder icon (def)
 folder icon

A small file folder icon next to a text box. The folder icon appears on dialog boxes and is used to access another dialog box to select files or change directories. Sometimes called a list button.


fat bits (def)
fat bits

Small squares of color used to build bitmap images. Also called pixels.


bitmap (def)
bitmap

A graphic formed by a series of dots (pixels). Sometimes called a paint image or a raster image.


menu (def)
menu

A list of options displayed on screen from which you can select a particular function or command.


pathname (def)
pathname

The address of a file. A full pathname includes the drive, the root directory, any subdirectory names, and the filename.


directory (def)
directory

An index of filenames and subdirectories. A directory can be divided into subdirectories. A root directory is the main directory of a disk. All other directories branch from the root.


directory dialog box (def)
directory dialog box

Dialog boxes that allow you to open, save, name, find, view, copy, move, rename, delete, and print files. They also let you create and remove directories. Directory dialog boxes appear when you use any feature that retrieves or saves a file, such as Open, Save As, Insert File, and so on.


Relevancy in QuickFinder Searches

QuickFinder, Options, Estimated Relevance Ranking and Full Word Count Relevance

Purpose

Use Estimated Relevance Ranking and Full Word Count Relevance to let QuickFinder rank the documents satisfying the search query in order of relevancy, based on the number of words found. Complex queries with several words will give higher Relevancy numbers, since relevancy is additive. Relevancy numbers apply only to the current search query-they are not comparable across different queries.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, define a search query using a file pattern or word pattern, along with any operators, date ranges, and document summary field information you want to search for.

2	Choose Options, then choose Estimated Relevance Ranking.

or

Choose Full Word Count Relevancy.

3	Choose Find.

The Search Results List appears sorted in order of relevancy, with the most relevant at the top of the list. This is how QuickFinder determines relevancy:

Scan and Index searching with Full Word Count Relevance:  QuickFinder automatically uses a scanning search.  The Search Results List displays the number of times the search text is found in the document. This search takes longer but is more precise.

Index searching with Estimated Relevance Ranking:  The Search Results List displays the number of hits (search elements) found, determined by the level of the index (document paragraph, line, and so on).

Scan searching with Estimated Relevance Ranking:  The Search Results List displays the estimated # of hits per 1000 words. If the search word(s) is found on page 1, QuickFinder estimates how many hits the document would yield in each 1000 words.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Search Results List


dialog box (def)
dialog box

Dialog boxes let you communicate with an application. They display warnings and messages, and they let you select and implement options by choosing appropriate command buttons. Dialog boxes have a title bar and a control menu, but they do not have a menu bar. They can be moved to different locations on the screen. Most dialog boxes must be closed before you can work in the document window, but a few allow you to move between the window and the dialog box.

When a dialog box option is unavailable and cannot be used, it appears dim. If subsequent actions make the item available, it changes to a normal appearance.


text box (dialog box) (def)
text box (dialog box)

The area in a dialog box where you type text or where the application types text for you. The selection insertion point must be in the text box before you can begin to type.


Viewer Info

Lets you display default settings by viewer or file type.


Find Next

Lets you find the next occurrence of the current Viewer search text. (Find Next appears only if you have used Find in a text file.)


Find Previous

Lets you find the previous occurrence of the current Viewer search text. (Find Previous appears only if you have used Find in a text file.)


drop-down list (def)
drop-down list

A list of options that appears to "drop down" from an option when you click a button in a dialog box. Drop-down lists are marked by downward-pointing arrows.


pop-up list (def)
pop-up list

A list of options that appears when a pop-up button is selected. Most pop-up lists are marked by double arrows or triangles and display mutually exclusive options. The button itself shows the selected option. Other pop-up lists, marked by single arrows or triangles, show the feature name rather than the selected option.


headword (def)
headword

A word that can be looked up in the Thesaurus. A reference marked with a bullet is a headword. Select a headword to display other references which are divided into nouns (n), verbs (v), adjectives (a), and antonyms (ant).


keyboard script (def)
keyboard script

A keyboard script can contain text, extended and WordPerfect characters, and simple commands (such as keystrokes that bring up a dialog box). You can use any keystroke combination available in the Keyboard Editor. Type keystroke combinations in braces: {Alt+F7}.


About QuickFinder

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, About

Purpose

The WordPerfect QuickFinder File Indexer is an application you can use to create indexes for selected documents and then rapidly search through these indexes for documents containing a specific word or phrase. You can also use QuickFinder to search for specific files and file patterns.

Use About QuickFinder to read about your version of QuickFinder, the release date, program paths, and initialization files.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then choose Options.

2	Choose About.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Add or Edit QuickList Item

QuickList, Add Item

Purpose

Use Add QuickList Item to add items to the list of directories and files you use frequently. Use Edit QuickList Item to edit your list of frequently used directories and files.

Steps

To add a QuickList item,

1	Enter any directory dialog box.

2	Right-click on the QuickList, then choose Add Item.

3	Specify the directory or filename you want to add to the QuickList.

4	Type a descriptive name.

5	Choose OK.

To edit a QuickList item,

1	Enter any directory dialog box.

2	Select the item you want to edit.

3	Right-click on the QuickList, then choose Edit Item.

4	Make the changes you want.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Delete QuickList Item

QuickList


Toolbar Image Editor

Toolbar, right-click, Toolbar Editor, double-click a button, Edit

Purpose

Use the Toolbar Image Editor to change the graphic on a button.

Steps

1	Right-click on a Toolbar, then choose Preferences.

2	Select a Toolbar, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, select Create a New Toolbar, specify a name for the new Toolbar, then choose Create.

3	Double-click the button you want, then choose Edit.

4	Select the colors you want to use with the left and right mouse buttons.

5	Select Draw to change colors one square at a time.

or

Select Fill to change areas of one color to another color.

6	Choose from the following options:

Copy

Paste

Undo

Clear

7	Choose OK and Close.

See Also

Edit Button and Menu Item Properties

Toolbar Customize

Toolbar Editor


Toolbar Editor

Toolbar, right-click, Edit

Purpose

Use the Toolbar Editor to create and edit Toolbars.

Steps

1	Right-click on a Toolbar, then choose Preferences.

2	Select a Toolbar, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, select Create a New Toolbar, specify a name for the new Toolbar, then choose Create.

3	Select Activate a Feature, select a category and feature, then choose Add Button.

or

Select Play a Keyboard Script, type the keystrokes the button will play, then choose Add Script.Select Launch a Program, choose Select File, specify the file you want to run, then choose OK.

or

Select Play a Macro, choose Add Macro, then specify the location, path, and filename of the macro, then choose OK to add a file macro.

or

Select Play a Macro, choose Add Template Macro, select a template macro and location, then choose OK to add a template macro.

4	Drag a Separator onto the Toolbar to add a space between buttons.

5	Drag a button or separator on the Toolbar to move it.

6	Drag a button or separator off the Toolbar to delete it.

7	Choose OK and Close.

See Also

Toolbar Customize

Toolbar Image Editor


Toolbar Customize

Toolbar, right click, Toolbar Editor, double-click a button

Purpose

Use Toolbar Customize to change the text and graphics on buttons and to edit help prompts for buttons.

Steps

1	Right-click on a Toolbar, then choose Preferences.

2	Select a Toolbar, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, select Create a New Toolbar, specify a name for the new Toolbar, then choose Create.

3	Double-click the button you want to customize.

4	Type a new button label.

5	Type a new help prompt.

6	Choose Edit, change the button graphic, then choose OK.

7	Choose Properties, edit the macro path, application information, or keyboard script, then choose OK.

8	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Edit Button and Menu Item Properties

Menu Bar Editor

Toolbar Editor

Toolbar Image Editor


Change File Attributes

Purpose

Use Change Attributes to change the Archive, Read-Only, Hidden, and System attributes of one or more files.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to change. Make sure the selected files are not already open.

2	Right-click on the files list, then choose Change Attributes.

3	Choose from the following options:

Archive

Read-Only

Hidden

System

4	Choose OK.

See Also

File Options


 Hint

To open a file without choosing OK, double-click a filename in the file list box of a directory dialog box that lets you open files.


Remove Highlights

Removes any highlights placed in the Viewer file by Find.


 Hint

Type an ampersand (&) in front of any character you want to make a mnemonic.


Drag and Drop Capabilities

Purpose

Use the drag-and-drop capabilities built into directory dialog boxes to launch applications, open files, package files as OLE objects, and create Windows Program Manager icons for applications.

Steps

To launch an application,

1	In a directory dialog box, drag a filename from the list box onto the .EXE file for the application you want to launch.

This launches the application and opens the selected file within it.

To open a file in an open application,

1	Open the application you want to work in.

2	Open a directory dialog box in another application.

3	Drag the filename of the file you want from the files list onto the title bar of the application.

To package a file as an OLE object,

1	Open a directory dialog box.

2	Drag the filename of the file you want from the files list into an open document window in a different application.

To create an application icon,

1	Open a directory dialog box.

2	Drag an .EXE file into a Program Group in Windows Program Manager.

See Also

Managing Files

Opening Files


 Hint

New key assignments work only when a document window is active (not when a dialog box is open).


 Hint

Filenames can be a maximum of eight characters, followed by a period and a three-character extension. When you name a document, do not use the following characters:  * + = [ ] : ;   < > ? / \ |. A period can be used only to separate the first part of the filename from the filename extension. For example, if you specify the filename GIRAFFE.ABCD, an application will read and record the name as GIRAFFE.ABC.

If you do not specify an extension, an application saves the file with the extension that identifies the format selected. Specify a filename that ends with the period if you do not want to add the default extension.


Import Indexes

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Import

Purpose

Use Import to access QuickFinder indexes created by others.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Choose Options, then choose Import. You can select more than one index at a time to import.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


 Hint

You will not be able to recover the files or subdirectories after you delete them.

If you do not select a different directory before choosing Remove Directory, the application will remove the current directory.


Rename Directories

Purpose

Use Rename Directory to give directories new names.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, right-click on the Directories list, then choose Rename Directory.

2	Specify the new location or name for the selected directory, then choose Rename.

See Also

Create Directory

Remove Directory


Archive

Archives or backs up the file(s) the next time you run a third-party backup program.


Copy Files

Purpose

Use Copy to copy one file or multiple files into other drives or directories.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to copy.

2	Right-click on the files list, then choose Copy.

3	Specify the path or filename for the file(s).

4	Select Don't replace files with the same size, date, and time to avoid copying files that are identical to the files they would replace.

5	Choose Copy.

You can also copy files by selecting a filename from the list box and dragging it to another drive or directory in the Directories list box or the QuickList.

See Also

Move Files

Rename Files


Create Directory

Purpose

Use Create Directory to create a new directory or subdirectory in the current drive.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the drive or directory you want to add a directory to.

2	Right-click on the Directory list, then choose Create Directory.

3	Type a name for the directory.

4	Choose Create.

See Also

File Options

Remove Directory

Rename Directory


Index Name

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create

Purpose

Use Index Name to specify a name for the QuickFinder index you are about to create.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Choose Create.

3	Type a name for the index, then choose OK.

See Also

Create Index

QuickFinder


Read-Only

Protects the file(s) from being modified or deleted.


Password Protect

Purpose

Use Password Protect to assign a password to a WordPerfect document when you save it as a file and to remove a password from a file. When you protect a document with a password, any associated backup or temporary files created by the application are also protected.

      	Enhanced Password Protection is case sensitive and includes powerful encryption capabilities. The Password feature is not available with all applications and file formats. If you save a password protected file in a non-WP format or WP 4.2 format, the password is removed.

Steps

To assign a password to a file,

1	In a directory dialog box, type the name of the file you want to save.

or

Select the name of the file you want to replace with the file you are saving.

2	Choose a WordPerfect format that supports the Password Protect feature.

3	Select Password Protect, then choose OK.

4	If you chose WordPerfect 6.0 format, select Enhanced or Original password protection, then choose OK.

5	Type the password that you want to use, then choose OK.

6	Re-type the password, then choose OK.

To open a password-protected file,

1	In a directory dialog box, type the name of the protected file you want to open, then choose OK.

2	Type the assigned password, then choose OK.

To remove a password from a file,

1	In a directory dialog box, specify the name of the protected file, then choose OK.

2	Type the password, then choose OK.

3	In the open password-protected file, choose Save As from the File menu.

4	Specify the name of the protected file, deselect Password Protect, then choose OK.

5	Choose Yes to replace the password-protected file.


Custom Columns

If you also select Show Column Labels, Custom Columns lets you select from a list of column types to display in a file list.


Location for Index Files

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Preferences

Purpose

Use Location for Index Files to identify the directory where you want to place your QuickFinder indexes.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Choose Options, then choose Preferences.

3	Specify a location for Index Files, then choose OK.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Copy

Lets you copy the image to the Clipboard.


Delete Files

Purpose

Use Delete to delete one or more files.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to delete.

2	Right-click on the files list, then choose Delete.

3	Choose Delete.

See Also

Copy Files

File Options

Move Files


Hidden

Hides the file(s) in directory dialog box file lists and QuickFinder Search Results lists, and makes it a hidden file for DOS.


Paste

Lets you paste the Clipboard contents to the image editor.


 Hint

To select a column label, click a blank space between column labels with the right mouse button, then choose an option. You may need to scroll right to find a blank space.


Wildcard Off and Wildcard On

Appear as /Nowildcard and /Wildcard

Wildcard Off disables wildcard functionality and accepts * and ? as characters in your search query.

Wildcard On returns QuickFinder's wildcard capability and treats * and ? as wildcards, not as characters.


Undo

Lets you reverse your last change.


Network

Purpose

Use the Network options list to view and edit network settings. The number and type of options will vary depending on your network software. Network only appears if your computer is connected to a network.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Network.

Depending on the network driver and version you are using, the options that appear will vary. Choose the Help buttons on the Network dialog boxes for more information.


Clear

Lets you remove the entire graphic from the editing area.


Add Directory or File

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create or Edit, Add Directory or File

Purpose

Use Add Directory or File to create or edit a directory pattern that you want to include in the index.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, specify an index name, then choose OK.

2	Type the pathnames of the drives and directories you want to index.

or

Choose Browse to select the drives and directories to be indexed.

3	Select Include Subtrees to include subdirectories.

4	Choose Add to add the directory pattern to the list of directories to be indexed.

5	Choose Generate to generate the index.

See Also

Create or Edit Index Criteria

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Index File Information

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Information

Purpose

Use Index File Information to display information about the contents of your QuickFinder index files.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer.

2	Choose Options, then choose Information.

You must have an index created to use this option.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Index Method

QuickFinder, Indexer, Generate

Purpose

Use Index Method to regenerate the entire index or just update the index with new, modified, or deleted files. Updating an index is faster than regenerating the entire index. But as the incremental (.INC) index file gets large, regenerate the entire index to speed up the updating process.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then choose an index to update.

2	Choose Generate.

3	Choose Index All Files to regenerate the entire index.

or

Choose Update Index With New or Modified Files to update the index with new, modified, or deleted files.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Individual Index Options

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create or Edit, Options

Purpose

Use Individual Index Options to specify indexing conditions for the selected QuickFinder Index.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, specify an index, then choose Edit.

2	Choose Options.

3	Choose from the following options:

Entire Document

Entire Document-Summary Fields

Text Only

Summary Fields Only

Filename Only

4	Select WordPerfect Documents Only to exclude unknown formats.

5	Select Include Numbers in Index to index numbers.

6	Specify file extensions you want to exclude from the index.

7	Specify an Index Level to determine how large an area to look for word patterns.

8	Specify how the index should interpret extended characters in unrecognized formats.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Create or Edit Index Criteria

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Keyboard Editor

Purpose

Use the Keyboard Editor to create or edit a keyboard layout by assigning features to keys on your keyboard. You can assign features and actions to most keys such as alphanumeric keys, number pad keys, positioning keys, and function keys. You can also assign keystrokes that include modifier keys. When you press a keystroke, you activate the feature or command mapped to that keystroke.

Steps

1	Open the Keyboard Editor.

2	Select Activate a Feature, select the keystroke to assign, select a category and feature, then choose Assign Feature.

or

Select Play a Keyboard Script, select the keystroke to assign, type the script, then choose Assign Script.

or

Select Launch a Program, select the keystroke to assign, choose Select File, specify the file you want to run, then choose OK.

or

Select Play a Macro, select the keystroke to assign, choose Assign Macro, specify the location, path, and filename of the macro, then choose OK to add a file macro.

or

Select Play a Macro, select the keystroke to assign, choose Assign Template Macro, select a template macro and location, then choose OK to add a template macro.

3	Choose Unassign to remove the assignment from the selected keystroke.

4	Select Assignment Appears on Menu to display the selected keystroke on the pull-down menus.

5	Select Allow Assignment to Characters to assign a feature, script, macro, or program to a number or letter key without modifier keys.

If you assign an alphanumeric key, it will no longer act as a number or letter key. For example, if you map the Bold command to the letter B, pressing that key will turn on Bold. It will no longer allow you to type the letter B.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Assign Characters to Keys


QuickFinder Search Query

QuickFinder, Options, Load Search Query, Save Search Query, Delete Search Query

Purpose

Use QuickFinder Options to save, reuse, or delete a QuickFinder search query.

Steps

To save a search query,

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, define a search query using a file pattern or word pattern, along with any operators, date ranges, and document summary field information you want to search for.

2	Choose Options, then choose Save Search Query.

3	Type a name for the search, then choose Save.

To reuse a saved search query,

1	Choose Options, then choose Load Search Query.

2	Select the search query you want to retrieve, then choose Load.

To delete a search query,

1	Choose Delete Search Query.

2	Select the search query you want to delete, then choose Remove.

If you accidentally delete a name from the Search Query list, choose Cancel to exit the dialog box without saving the changes.

See Also

QuickFinder Options


Prefix Mode On and Off

Appear as /Prefix and /Noprefix

Prefix Mode On treats all search terms as wildcard searches.  For example, (/Prefix cat & dog) finds "cats," "catapult," "catalepsy," "dogs," "doggerel," and so on.

Prefix Mode Off turns off this functionality and searches only for the words specified.


Menu Bar Editor

Menu Bar, right click, Preferences, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use the Menu Bar Editor to move, delete, add features to, and create new menus on the menu bar.

Steps

1	Right-click on a menu bar, then choose Preferences.

2	Select a Menu Bar, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, select Create a New Menu Bar, specify a name for the new Menu Bar, then choose Create.

3	Select Activate a Feature, select a category and feature, then drag the feature to the menu where you want it.

or

Select Play a Keyboard Script, type the keystrokes the menu item will play, then choose Add Script.

or

Select Launch a Program, choose Select File, specify the file you want to run, then choose OK.

or

Select Play a Macro, choose Add Macro, then specify the location, path, and filename of the macro, then choose OK to add a file macro.

or

Select Play a Macro, choose Add Template Macro, select a template macro and location, then choose OK to add a template macro.

4	Drag an item from one menu to another to move it.

5	Drag an item from a menu to delete it.

6	Drag the Menu icon to a menu to add a cascading submenu.

7	Drag the Separator icon to the menu to add a dividing line.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Edit Menu Text


Edit Menu Text

Menu Bar, right-click, Menu Bar Editor, double-click a menu item

Purpose

Use Edit Menu Text to edit the text on menus and on menu help prompts.

Steps

1	Open the Menu Bar Editor, then double-click the menu item you want to edit.

2	Type new text for the menu item.

3	Type a new Help Prompt.

4	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Menu Bar Editor


System

Identifies the file(s) to DOS as part of your computer's operating system. The file(s) are not displayed in directory dialog box file lists or QuickFinder Search Results lists.


Move Files

Purpose

Use Move to move one or more files to a different drive or directory.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to move.

2	Right-click on the files list, then choose Move.

3	Type the path or filename you want the file(s) moved to.

or

Click the list button, select the directory you want the files moved to, then choose OK.

4	Choose Move.

You can also move files by selecting a filename from the list box and pressing Alt or Shift while dragging it to another drive or directory in the Directories list box or the QuickList.

See Also

Copy Files

File Options


Move Index File

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Move

Purpose

Use Move Index File to move a QuickFinder index file to a different file location.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Select the index you want to move.

3	Choose Options, then choose Move.

4	Type a new filename and network or local directory, then choose OK.

See Also

Network Index File Location

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Network Index File Location

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Move

Purpose

Use Move Index File to move a QuickFinder index file to a network file location.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then choose Options.

2	Select the index you want to move.

3	Choose Move.

4	Type a new network or local directory and filename, then choose OK.

See Also

Location for Index Files

Move Index File


Managing Files

Purpose

In certain applications, file management capabilities are provided in directory dialog boxes. For example, you can use this dialog box to select directories, choose macros, locate specific files, open documents, and save documents as new or renamed files. You can find and select directories and files using the drive, directory, and file lists. You can also change network connection or document management options if you are connected to a network or have alternate document management programs.

To find a more specific Help topic about your task, use the Search button above to look up the title of a specific dialog box or option.

      	The options that appear on this dialog box will change depending on its title and the application in which it appears.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Filename

File List

Save File As Type

Directories List

QuickList

Drives

List Files of Type

See Also

Drag and Drop Capabilities

File Options

Network

ODMA Support

Opening Files

Saving Files


Open/Save As Setup

Purpose

Use Open/Save As Setup to specify how you want to display the file list and to set the Speedup Files options for directory dialog boxes.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Setup.

2	Make the changes you want, then choose OK.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Create Speedup Files

File List Display

Sorting Files

See Also

Managing Files


Print Files

Purpose

Use Print to print one or more files without opening them into the current document window.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to print.

2	Right-click on the files list, then choose Print.

3	Choose Print.

See Also

File Options

Print Lists


Print Lists

Purpose

Use Print List to print a list of selected files or all files displayed in the file list box, the Directory List, or the QuickList.

Steps

To print a file list,

1	In a directory dialog box, choose Setup, then select the File List Display options you want. The information displayed on a printed file list is identical to the information displayed in the file list box.

2	Select the files in the file list that you want to include on the printed list. Skip this step if you want to print the entire file list.

3	Right-click on the files list, then select Print File List.

4	Choose the type of list you want to print.

5	Select Include Subdirectories to print subdirectories in addition to the list.

6	Choose Setup, select a printer, orientation, and paper size and source, then choose OK.

7	Choose Change, select a font, style, and size, then choose OK.

8	Choose Print.

To print a directory list,

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then right-click on the Directories List.

2	Choose Print Directory List.

3	Select the printing option you want.

4	Choose Setup, select a printer, orientation, and paper size and source, then choose OK.

5	Choose Change, select a font, style, and size, then choose OK.

6	Choose Print.

To print a QuickList,

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose QuickList.

2	Choose Print QuickList.

3	Select the printing option you want.

4	Choose Setup, select a printer, orientation, and paper size and source, then choose OK.

5	Choose Change, select a font, style, and size, then choose OK.

6	Choose Print.

See Also

File Options

Print Files


QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder, Indexer

Purpose

Use the QuickFinder File Indexer to create or edit indexes. QuickFinder indexes are full-text, alphabetical lists of every word contained in the files and directories you specify as well as information about the files. You cannot view or print QuickFinder indexes; they are highly compressed for QuickFinder use only. Searching a QuickFinder index for a word or phrase is extremely fast, compared to opening and searching each individual file.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Choose Create, type an index name, then choose OK.

or

Select the name of the index you want to edit, then choose Edit.

3	Type the name of the directory or file you want to add, then choose Add.

or

Choose Browse for a list of files and directories.Select the directories you do not want to include in an existing index, then choose Remove.

4	Select Include Subtree to include all subdirectories under the directories you have added to the list.

5	Choose Options to specify individual index options.

6	Choose Generate to generate the index of the selected files.

or

Choose an Index Method option to update a previously created index.

See Also

Additional Information about QuickFinder

Create or Edit Index Criteria

Index Method

Individual Index Options

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer Options


QuickFinder Indexer Preferences

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Preferences

Purpose

Use Preferences to change how QuickFinder creates an index. Most of the options affect the speed of indexing.

Steps

To change options for all indexes,

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Choose Options, then choose Preferences.

3	Specify how often you want to display indexing progress.

4	Specify a Location for Index Files.

5	Select Expand Browse Dialog to display the Filename and Directories list boxes by default.

6	Choose Advanced>> to set further Indexer defaults.

7	Specify which file extensions you want to exclude.

8	Select WordPerfect Documents Only to limit indexing to documents in WordPerfect format.

9	Choose index contents and indexing levels.

10	Select Include Numbers in Index to index numbers as well as words.

11	Choose an option for Extended Characters.

12	Choose OK.

To change options for a particular index,

1	Select the index.

2	Choose Edit, then choose Options.

See Also

Additional Information about QuickFinder

Individual Index Options

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Remove Directory

Purpose

Use Remove Directory to remove a directory and to delete any subdirectories and files contained in the directory you want to remove. If you do not select a different directory, the application will delete the current directory.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the directory you want to remove.

2	Right-click on the Directories list, then choose Remove Directory.

3	Choose Yes to delete the selected directory, including all files and subdirectories in it.

See Also

Create Directory

Delete Files

File Options

Rename Directory


Rename Files

Purpose

Use Rename to give one or more files new names and locations.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to rename.

2	Right-click on the files list, then choose Rename.

3	Specify the new path or filename for the selected file(s), then choose OK.

4	Choose Rename.

See Also

File Options

Move Files

Select Directory


Rename Index

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Rename

Purpose

Use Rename Index to give a QuickFinder index a different name.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then select an index name.

2	Choose Options, then choose Rename.

3	Type a new name, then choose OK.

See Also

Index Name

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Entire Document

Indexes both text and document summary fields, including subfunctions:  headers, footers, footnotes, tables, graphics, and so on. However, document summary information is combined with text information in the index.


QuickFinder Search Results List

QuickFinder, Find, Search Results

QuickFinder, Options, Last Search Results

Purpose

A Search Results List, generated by a QuickFinder search, contains the files that match the search criteria you entered. From the Search Results List you can open as many as nine files. You can also copy, move, rename, delete, preview, or print files, or save the list for reference in further searching.

Steps

To generate and use a list of search results,

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, type a search query, then choose Find.

If any files match the search criteria, a Search Results List will display. If not, you will see a No Files Found message.

2	Select the file(s) you want to process from the Search Results List, then choose either Open, View, or one of the File Options.

or

Choose QuickFinder to continue searching.

To save your Search Results List for future use,

1	Select Save Search Results from the Search Results List, then choose either Open or Close.

2	Choose QuickFinder again to retrieve the saved search results list, choose Options, then choose Last Search Results.

To further refine your search,

1	Choose QuickFinder from the Search Results List.

2	Note that Search In contains a new item called Search Results List. Choose this item if you want to use your previously created search results list.

3	Select Add Matching Files to Search Results List to include matching files to your list.

4	Choose Find. The Search Results List will be displayed again if you have any matching files.

Choose from the following options for more information:

View

QuickFinder

File Options

Sort Setup

See Also

Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Summary Fields

Refine QuickFinder Searches

Relevancy in QuickFinder Searches


QuickFinder Search Results Sort Setup

QuickFinder, Find, Search Results, Sort Setup

Purpose

Use Search Results Sort Setup to sort files in the QuickFinder Search Results by filename, extension, size, date/time, descriptive name, descriptive type, or path, in ascending or descending order.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, type a search query, then choose Find.

2	Choose Sort Setup in the Search Results List.

3	Choose a Sort criterion.

4	Choose an Ascending or Descending sort order, then choose OK.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Search Results List

Relevancy in QuickFinder Searches


Entire Document-Summary Fields

Indexes both text and document summary fields, including subfunctions:  headers, footers, footnotes, tables, graphics, and so on. Document summary information is indexed separately to increase speed when searching document summary fields.


Viewer Find

Purpose

Use Viewer Find to highlight all occurrences of the search words or phrases in the file.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list, then select a text file from the file list.

2	Choose View.

3	Right-click inside the Viewer window, then choose Find from the QuickMenu.

4	Type the text you want to find. If you want to find a phrase, enclose it in quotation marks.

5	Select Match Whole Word Only if you do not want to find the search text within other words, like "cat" in "vacation."

6	Select Case Sensitive if you want to search for capital letters just as you have typed them.

7	Press Enter.

8	Choose Find Next or Find Previous to locate other instances of the search text.

9	Choose Close.

See Also

Viewer

Viewing Files


Viewer Font

Purpose

Use Viewer Font to select the font (size and typeface) you want to display in the Viewer.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list, then select a text file from the file list.

2	Choose View.

3	Right-click inside the Viewer window, then choose Font from the QuickMenu.

4	Select a font and point size.

5	Select Bold or Italic if you want the entire Viewer text in bold or italic.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Printing from the Viewer

Viewer

Viewing Files


WordPerfect Characters

Ctrl+W

Purpose

Use WordPerfect Characters to access characters that do not appear on your keyboard, such as phonetic characters and characters in other alphabets. You can insert these characters at your insertion point in a document or in some dialog box text boxes. You can also assign a frequently used character to a specific key on the keyboard. Not all fonts include all characters. Excluded characters are represented by a hollow box on your screen.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the character, then press Ctrl+W.

2	Select the character set you want, then select a character.

or

Specify a character number.

3	Choose Insert to insert the character and leave the dialog box open.

or

Choose Insert and Close to insert the character and close the dialog box.

See Also

Assign Characters to Keys


.BIF file (def)
.BIF file

Binary Initialization File. A file that contains the settings information for certain applications.


QuickFinder Indexer Options

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options

Purpose

Use the QuickFinder Indexer Options to specify indexing preferences or index operations.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then choose Options.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Information

Delete

Rename

Move

Import

Preferences

About

See Also

Individual Index Options

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


QuickFinder Options

QuickFinder, Options

Purpose

Use Options to display summary fields and the results of the last search, and to refine, save, delete, or reuse searches.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Options.

2	Choose No Summary Fields to hide document summary fields.

or

Choose Default Summary Fields to display a portion of the possible document summary fields.

or

Choose All Summary Fields to display all possible summary fields.

3	Choose Last Search results to display the results of the last search.

4	Choose the search query options you want.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Full Word Count Relevancy

No Summary Fields

Default Summary Fields

All Summary Fields

Last Search Results

Clear

Load Search Query

Save Search Query

Delete Search Query

See Also

Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder

Refine QuickFinder Searches


group box (def)
group box

A set of related options in a dialog box, often with its own subtitle.


dialog box title bar (def)
dialog box title bar

The horizontal bar across the top of the dialog box that contains the name of the dialog box and the Control-menu box.


active (def)
active

A window or dialog box that is currently in use. Called the current window when a document is displayed.


.ALL file (def)
.ALL file

A file that contains information for several different printers. WordPerfect and other suite applications use .ALL files to generate .PRS files for your specific printer when you select a printer.


alphanumeric (def)
alphanumeric

Composed of letters or numerals or both. Text and data can be sorted alphanumerically or numerically. When sorting something numerically, 2 comes before 10. When sorting something alphanumerically, 10 comes before 2.


ANSI (def)
ANSI

American National Standards Institute. One of the standard formats for representing characters on a computer. The ANSI character set consists of 256 characters. The first 128 characters are the same as the ASCII character set; the second 128 (characters 129-256) differ from the IBM extended character set. Compare with ASCII.


application (def)
application

Software designed to carry out a certain kind of action or activity, such as word processing, electronic mail, or spreadsheet entries. Sometimes called a program.


application icon (def)
application icon

A unique icon that represents the application when it is minimized.


argument (def)
argument

A variable, constant, or expression required by a command or function.


ASCII (def)
ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange. One of the standard formats for representing characters on a computer. The extended ASCII character set consists of 256 characters. ASCII text is useful when you share files between programs. A DOS text file is usually in ASCII format. Compare with ANSI.


attributes (def)
attributes

The elements that determine the appearance of text (for example, bold, italic, 10-point) or a graphic (for example, fill, line width, background color).


automatic font change (AFC) (def)
automatic font change (AFC)

A font change that the user does not explicitly specify in the document but that automatically takes place to handle a change in the current attribute, size, or position of text.


back up (def)
back up

To save copies of files for safekeeping. You can back up files as you work on them to protect your work in case of a power failure or machine problem, and you can applications make archive copies of your files to safeguard against replacing the original document.


baseline (def)
baseline

The invisible line upon which text is placed. Each letter sits immediately on the baseline. For letters with descenders (such as g, j, p, and y), the descenders drop below the baseline.


baud (def)
baud

The conventional unit of measurement used to describe data transmission speed. One baud is one bit per second.


baud rate (def)
baud rate

The speed at which data is transmitted from one digital device to another, such as over a modem or between a computer and printer. The devices must be configured at the same baud rate for information to transfer between them correctly.


BIOS (def)
BIOS

The Basic Input/Output System or the part of the computer operating system that communicates with the screen, the keyboard, printers, and other peripheral devices.


built-in font (def)
built-in font

A font that is built into the printer.


bullet (def)
bullet

A symbol, such as a filled circle, that may precede each item in a list.


byte (def)
byte

The amount of space needed to store a single character (number, letter, or code). A byte generally represents eight binary digits (bits). 1024 bytes equals one kilobyte (K).


cache (def)
cache

A buffer area in a computer or a special section of random access memory (RAM). A cache is continually updated to contain recently accessed data or program instructions to reduce access time while a program is running.


card (def)
card

A removable printed-circuit board that is plugged into an expansion slot (such as a graphics card, clock card, sound card, or fax card).


cartridge fonts (def)
cartridge fonts

A group of fonts contained on a ROM chip in a plastic cartridge that plugs into a printer. The chips contain font definitions that do not require downloading and are not lost from memory in a power failure.


cascade (def)
cascade

To display document windows in overlapping format on the screen. Compare with tile.


cascading menu (def)
cascading menu

An additional list of menu items opening from a single menu item.


CD-ROM (def)
CD-ROM

Compact Disk-Read Only Memory. Means of data storage using optical storage technology. A single CD-ROM disk can hold more than 650 megabytes of information, or half a billion characters of text. Unlike floppy disks, most CD-ROM disks can be read from but not written to.


cell (def)
cell

The intersection of a row and a column in a table or spreadsheet.


check box (def)
check box

A small box next to an option in a dialog box. Clicking an empty check box selects the option; clicking a marked check box deselects the option.


check mark (def)
check mark

Mark placed next to a menu item that is turned on. When the item is turned off or when it is not active, the check mark is removed.


choose (def)
choose

To use a mouse or the keyboard to pick a menu item or dialog box option that initiates an immediate action. Compare with select.


clear (def)
clear

To remove the X from a check box, or to remove a check mark from a menu item. If a check box is clear, that option is turned off.


click (def)
click

To press and release a mouse button (usually the left button) once.


Clipboard (def)
Clipboard

An area of memory, also called a buffer, where text and graphics can be stored to await further action. It is a temporary holding place for items that have been cut or copied. The item remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy an additional item or until you exit Windows.


close (def)
close

To shut down or exit a dialog box, window, or application.


codes (def)
codes

Hidden markers that control how documents appear on the screen and at the printer. Most commands insert codes into a document. You can see these codes by choosing Reveal Codes.


command (def)
command

An instruction given to a computer to carry out a particular action.


command button (def)
command button

A button in a dialog box that carries out a command such as Open, Close, Exit, OK, or Cancel. The selected command button is indicated by a dotted rectangle.


compressed file (def)
compressed file

A file that has been specially prepared to conserve disk space. Applications are shipped with compressed files; you must run the Installation Program before you can use them.


Control menu (def)
Control menu

The menu containing commands that will open, close, maximize, minimize, or restore a window or dialog box. You can display a Control menu by clicking the Control-menu box or by pressing Alt+Spacebar.


Control-menu box (def)
Control-menu box

A small rectangular button in the upper-left corner of a window or dialog box. Clicking a Control-menu box displays the Control menu; double-clicking the Control-menu box closes the window or dialog box. Several windows can be open at the same time, each with its own Control-menu box.


conversion (def)
conversion

A process by which files created in one application are changed to a format that can be used in another application.


CUA (def)
CUA

Common User Access. A set of terminology, keystrokes, and commands designed by Microsoft to provide standardization among applications. Suite applications come with a keyboard that is CUA compliant.


current directory (def)
current directory

The directory at the end of the current directory path. It is the directory that is searched first for a requested file and where a file is stored if you do not specify a path.


DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) link (def)
DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) link

A connection between a file created by a Windows application that supports DDE and a WordPerfect document. This connection lets you transfer information from the source file into the WordPerfect document. If both files are open, the transferred information can be updated automatically when information changes in the source file.

WordPerfect for Windows also can establish spreadsheet links to some spreadsheet applications that do not support dynamic data exchange.


default (def)
default

A program's predetermined setting or action that takes effect unless specifically changed.


delimiter (def)
delimiter

Most commonly used to refer to a character or code that marks the beginning or end of an item, such as a sentence, paragraph, page, record, field, or word. Also used in dynamic delimiters to refer to a character that expands to enclose part of an equation.


deselect (def)
deselect

To remove the X from a check box, or to remove a check mark from a menu item.


desktop (def)
desktop

The screen background and environment for all applications in Windows.


dimmed (def)
dimmed

The appearance of an icon, command, or button that cannot be chosen or selected.


display font (def)
display font

Also called screen font. Font as it appears on the computer screen.


dither (def)
dither

To combine several different colored pixels to create a new color.


document window (def)
document window

The window in which documents are created or edited.


DOS (def)
DOS

Disk Operating System. Software that oversees disk I/O, video support, keyboard control, and internal commands. A computer needs a disk operating system to function.


DOS prompt (def)
DOS prompt

The on-screen characters, such as C:\>, indicating that you can enter DOS commands.


double-click (def)
double-click

To press and release the mouse button twice in rapid succession.


drag (def)
drag

To move text or an object by positioning the pointer on the item you want to move, pressing the mouse button, moving the mouse, then releasing the mouse button.


driver (def)
driver

A set of commands used to run a peripheral device such as a printer or monitor. For example, .PRS files are drivers that instruct a printer on how to print a WordPerfect file. Also called printer driver.


ellipsis (def)
ellipsis

A punctuation mark consisting of three successive periods (...). Choosing a menu item or command button with an ellipsis opens a dialog box.


expanded memory (def)
expanded memory

Specification for addressing more than 640K of memory. To access expanded memory, you need a special memory board or driver.


extended memory (def)
extended memory

Random access memory that exceeds the DOS standard of one megabyte. It is built into the hardware of a 286, 386, or 486 computer. It can be accessed with a memory management program.


file (def)
file

A collection of information stored on disk under a single name.


file extension (def)
file extension

The optional three-letter suffix following the period in a filename. For example, .EXE.


file format (def)
file format

The arrangement and organizational pattern of the information in a file. The application under which a file was created determines its format. Files created in one application are not accessible by another application unless they are converted to the proper format.


filename (def)
filename

The name given to a data file used by applications to perform open and save operations. In DOS and Windows applications, filenames can have as many as eight characters with an optional extension of as many as three characters. The filename and extension are separated with a period.


fixed-pitch font (def)
fixed-pitch font

Also called monospaced font. A font that allocates the same amount of space for every character (for example, an  i  takes up as much horizontal space as a  w ). Compare with proportionally spaced font.


font (def)
font

A group of letters, numbers, and symbols with a common typeface. Fonts are described by name, appearance, and size, as in Helvetica Bold 10pt.


function keys (def)
function keys

A set of keys, usually labeled F1, F2, F3, and so on, used by themselves or with Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys to provide quick access to certain features in an application.


Saving Files

File, Save or Save As

Purpose

You can save hundreds of files on a hard disk, which works like a filing cabinet with directories and subdirectories as file drawers and folders that group similar files. You can save files with new names, save them in different directories, or save them in different formats. If you do not specify a directory or format,  applications save files in the current directory and default format.

You should use Save periodically to avoid losing your work if a power or system failure occurs. You can also use the Backup features to avoid losing your work.

Steps

1	Choose Save or Save As from the File menu.

2	Select the directory where you want to save the file from the Directories list box or the QuickList.

or

Type the full path for the file before the filename.

3	Type a filename for the file.

or

Select the file you want to replace with the saved file.

4	Choose the format you want.

5	Choose Save to save the file in the selected format.

See Also

Opening Files

Save File As Type

Save Format


handle (def)
handle

An on-screen marker, usually a small black square, that lets you size and manipulate an object or item in a drawing. Handles appear around selected objects. To use a handle, drag it with the mouse.


hexadecimal (def)
hexadecimal

A numbering system based on 16 digits, 0 through F, used in computer programming as a convenient shorthand for working with binary numbers.


highlight (def)
highlight

The change to a reverse-video appearance when a menu item or area of text is selected.


icon (def)
icon

A small graphics image that represents an application, a command, or a tool. Clicking or double-clicking an icon will produce an action.


inactive window (def)
inactive window

A window that is not currently being used. Its title bar changes appearance, and keystrokes and mouse actions do not affect its contents. An inactive window can be activated by clicking it.


incrementing button (def)
incrementing button

A button in a dialog box that lets you specify an amount by clicking it with the mouse instead of typing numbers.


.INI file (def)
.INI file

A file that stores setup and startup information for Windows applications.


insertion point (def)
insertion point

A blinking vertical bar that designates the position on the screen where text or codes will be inserted or deleted. Sometimes called a cursor. Compare with mouse pointer.


kerning (def)
kerning

Altering the space between a pair of characters to give a uniform appearance.


kilobyte (K) (def)
kilobyte (K)

1024 bytes of information or storage space.


landscape orientation (def)
landscape orientation

The position of the page in which the long edge of the page runs horizontally. Compare with portrait orientation.


language code (def)
language code

A two-letter code that represents the language of files such as .MOR, .THS, .TRS, and .ICR files.


leading (def)
leading

The amount of white space between lines of type.


.MOR file (def)
.MOR file

The main dictionary file for use with Spell Checker. The .MOR file may also contain hyphenation information.


list box (def)
list box

A box that displays a list of choices. When a list is too long to display all choices, it will have a scroll bar, so that you can view additional items.


list button (def)
list button

In dialog boxes, a way to get to another dialog box to select files or change directories. It appears as a small file-folder button next to a text box.


macro (def)
macro

A series of commands and menu selections in a file that can be replayed by a few keystrokes or by a mouse click.


main dictionary (def)
main dictionary

The Spell Checker dictionary provided with WordPerfect and other suite applications, or a compatible third-party dictionary.


megabyte (M) (def)
megabyte (M)

1024 kilobytes (1,048,576 bytes) of information or storage space.


memory (def)
memory

A computer's data storage area, measured in RAM and ROM.


menu bar (def)
menu bar

The area at the top of a window containing headings for pull-down menu items.


message box (def)
message box

A type of dialog box that appears with information, a warning, an error message, or a request for confirmation to carry out a command or action.


MIDI (def)
MIDI

Musical Instrument Digital Interface.  A format that allows communication of musical data between devices such as computers and synthesizers.


mnemonics (def)
mnemonics

Underlined letters on menu commands or dialog box options indicating keystroke access for that item or option.


modem (def)
modem

Modulator/demodulator. A device that transmits digital computer data over telephone lines. Modems can be external or internal (built into the computer).


monospaced font (def)
monospaced font

Fonts that use the same amount of horizontal space for each character in the font (for example, an  i  takes up as much horizontal space as a  w ). Monospaced fonts are also referred to as fixed-pitch fonts. Compare with proportionally spaced fonts.


mouse button (def)
mouse button

The part of the mouse that can be pressed (or clicked) manually and that controls certain functions that may be customized to suit the user. WordPerfect documentation uses mouse button to mean the left button (button 1).


pointer (def)
pointer

A symbol that indicates a position on screen as you move the mouse on your desktop.


movement keys (def)
movement keys

Keys on the keyboard that control insertion point movement within a document. They include the arrow keys, Page Up, Page Down, Home, and End.


multitasking (def)
multitasking

A process that allows a computer to perform various tasks simultaneously. Also, the method by which some operating systems allow the user to open and run several applications at one time.


newspaper column (def)
newspaper column

Text flows down a column to the bottom of a page, then starts again at the top of the next column to the right. Compare with parallel column.


open (def)
open

To start an application, to insert a document into a new document window, or to access a dialog box.


option (def)
option

A choice inside a dialog box or on a menu.


outline family (def)
outline family

The collective term for a main level in an outline and all subordinate levels and text under it. For example, if the main levels of an outline are numbered I, II, III, and so on, an outline family would include item I and items A, B, and C under it, with all related text.


palette (def)
palette

An on-screen box or window that contains tools, available colors, or possible fill patterns.


parallel column (def)
parallel column

Text grouped across the page in rows. The next row starts below the longest column of the previous row. Compare with newspaper column.


parallel interface (def)
parallel interface

An interface in which several bits of information (usually 1 byte) are transmitted simultaneously. Compare with serial interface.


parallel printer (def)
parallel printer

A printer that accepts information by way of a parallel interface.


parameter (def)
parameter

A variable used with a command to indicate a specific value or option.


path (def)
path

The address that tells a computer where to locate a directory or file on a disk or network. A path includes the drive, the root directory, and any subdirectory names that branch from the root directory.


pitch (def)
pitch

The number of monospaced characters printed per linear inch.


pixel (def)
pixel

Short for picture element. A pixel is the smallest dot that can be represented on a screen or in a paint (bitmap) graphic.


point (def)
point

To move the mouse until the tip of the mouse pointer rests on an item.


point size (def)
point size

Unit of measure commonly used to indicate font sizes. One point equals 1/72".


pop-up definition (def)
pop-up definition

A graphic or dot-underlined, colored word that you can click to display a definition or explanation.


port (def)
port

A connection device between a computer and another component, such as a printer or modem. For example, a printer cable is plugged into the printer port on the computer so information can be sent to the printer.


portrait orientation (def)
portrait orientation

The position of the page in which the long edge of the page runs vertically. Compare with landscape orientation.


print queue (def)
print queue

The list of print jobs waiting to be sent to a particular printer.


printer definition (def)
printer definition

A file that contains instructions for a program (like WordPerfect) to format printed pages on a particular printer. Also known as a printer driver.


printer driver (def)
printer driver

The software that enables a program to communicate with the printer so that information can be printed. WordPerfect printer drivers are identified by a .PRS file extension. Also called drivers.


program (def)
program

Software designed for a certain use, such as word processing, electronic mail, or spreadsheet entries. Also called an application.


proportionally spaced font (def)
proportionally spaced font

Also called a variable-pitch font. Fonts that vary the amount of horizontal space used by characters in the font (for example, the letter i usually gets less space than the letter w). Compare with monospaced fonts.


.PRS file (def)
.PRS file

A file that contains the printer definition and a complete description of a print station (printer, sheet feeder, fonts, and forms). A .PRS file is created from a .ALL file when a printer is selected.


QuickList (def)
QuickList

A list that lets you access a directory or group of files without entering the full pathname every time you want to locate the same group of files.


QuickMenu (def)
QuickMenu

A pop-up menu that lists a specific set of items that apply to a particular feature. You can open a QuickMenu by placing the mouse pointer over the object and pressing the right mouse button. Click the left mouse button to choose the option you want.


radio button (def)
radio button

One of a set of buttons found before options in a dialog box. Only one radio button in a set can be selected at a time.


RAM (def)
RAM

Random Access Memory. The working space or temporary storage area for the program you are using and the document on your screen. RAM is erased when the power is turned off.


Restore button (def)
Restore button

A button that lets you return the window to the size and position it was prior to being either maximized or minimized.


ROM (def)
ROM

Read Only Memory. The part of a computer's main memory that contains the basic programs that run the computer when it is turned on. ROM cannot be erased.


root directory (def)
root directory

The fundamental directory of a disk, created when the disk is formatted.


scalable font (def)
scalable font

A font that can be printed in virtually any point size, depending on the limits of the software and printer used.


screen font (def)
screen font

Also known as a display font. A font, usually rendered in low-resolution, that mimics a printer font.


scroll (def)
scroll

To move the insertion point through a document or list that extends beyond the screen display.


scroll bar (def)
scroll bar

The bars on the right side and bottom of the window that let you move vertically and horizontally through a document, list, or graphic by clicking the scroll arrows or dragging the scroll box.


select (text or objects) (def)
select (text or objects)

To highlight text that will be affected by the next action.


select (options or commands) (def)
select (options or commands)

To use a mouse or the keyboard to pick a menu item or dialog box option that does not initiate an immediate action. The action takes place after you choose OK. Compare with choose.


selection insertion point (def)
selection insertion point

The highlighted text, dotted rectangle, or insertion point that shows you where the next keystroke or mouse action will apply in a dialog box or window.


serial interface (def)
serial interface

An interface in which information is transmitted one bit at a time. Compare with parallel interface.


serial printer (def)
serial printer

A printer that accepts information from the computer by way of a serial interface. Compare with parallel printer.


shortcut key (def)
shortcut key

A keystroke or keystroke combination that gives you quick access to a feature.


size (def)
size

To change the size of a selected item by dragging the sizing handles that surround it.


sizing handle (def)
sizing handle

The small solid squares that appear on the borders of a graphics box or a graphics line that has been selected. You can drag these handles to size the box and its contents.


soft font (def)
soft font

A font file that is located in a file on a disk. When the printer is switched on, soft font files must be copied (downloaded) from the disk to the printer.


sort key (def)
sort key

Words, fields, or phrases that are used to define criteria in sorting specific items in a document.


spreadsheet (def)
spreadsheet

A grid made up of columns and rows that contain data or formulas often used for financial planning, cost estimating, and other accounting tasks.


spreadsheet import (def)
spreadsheet import

To copy information from a spreadsheet file into a WordPerfect document one time only. Compare with spreadsheet link.


spreadsheet link (def)
spreadsheet link

A connection from a spreadsheet file into a WordPerfect document. It lets you transfer information from the spreadsheet into the document. You can update the transferred information as often as necessary to reflect changes made in the spreadsheet file.


Status Bar (def)
Status Bar

The line at the bottom of a document window that shows information such as the document number, page, line, and vertical and horizontal position of the insertion point.


submenu (def)
submenu

An additional list of menu items opening from a single menu item.


supplementary dictionary (def)
supplemental dictionary

A dictionary created and personalized by the user. Supplemental dictionaries include words and phrases not found in the main dictionary.


syntax (def)
syntax

The rules for organizing elements in an operation. For example, macro commands require a specific syntax or organization for them to function properly.


temporary file (def)
temporary file

A file that a program creates when it is running. Temporary files are deleted when the program is exited properly. For example, WordPerfect creates temporary overflow and backup files.


text box (graphics) (def)
text box (graphics)

A type of graphics box that can be used for placing and rotating text.


text file (def)
text file

A file saved in ASCII file format. It contains text, spaces, and returns, but no formatting codes.


tile (def)
tile

To display open windows side by side, with no window overlapping any other window. Compare with cascade.


toggle (def)
toggle

To turn a feature on and off with the same keystroke or menu selection.


variable-pitch font (def)
variable-pitch font

Also called proportionally spaced font. A font that varies the amount of space used by each character. Compare with monospaced font.


wildcard (def)
wildcard

Character used to replace one character (?) or any number of characters (*) in a search string. These two characters are conventions in most applications.


window (def)
window

A method of displaying a document so that many of its elements appear graphically and many features are immediately available as on-screen choices. The place where you type your documents is called a document window.


workspace (def)
workspace

The part of the document window where you actually work with the text of the document.


.WPG file (def)
.WPG file

WordPerfect graphics file. A file extension added to images in the WordPerfect graphics image format.


WYSIWYG (def)
WYSIWYG

What You See Is What You Get. Refers to a computer screen display that approximates the printed page, showing fonts and graphics in correct proportions.


zoom (def)
zoom

To expand or reduce the image of a document or graphic on the screen. Zooming does not change the actual size of the text or graphics.


application window (def)
application window

The window that contains the operating features of the application, such as the menu bar, Toolbar, and document window. Document windows are placed within the application window and, if your computer has enough memory, you can open as many as nine document windows at a time.


title bar (def)
title bar

The horizontal bar across the top of each window that contains the name of the window, the Control-menu box, and the maximize, minimize, and restore buttons. Sometimes the title bar also contains Help prompts that give you information about menu items you select.


minimize button (def)
minimize button

A button that you use to shrink an application window or document window to an icon.


maximize button (def)
maximize button

A button that you use to enlarge a small application window or document window to its maximum size. A window that is smaller than a full-screen window, but not minimized to an icon, can also be maximized by double-clicking its title bar.


Toolbar (def)
Toolbar

A feature that contains buttons representing features you use often. You can create your own customized Toolbars.


Power Bar (def)
Power Bar

A group of buttons representing frequently used features.


Contents button (def)
Contents button

A Help button you can use to return to the main Contents screen which helps you quickly navigate through specific areas of Help.


Search button (def)
Search button

A Help button you can use to search for Help topics by typing keywords.


Back button (def)
Back button

A Help button you can use to return to the last topic you opened.


History button (def)
History button

A Help button you can use to display the last 40 Help topics you opened, with the most recent at the top of the list. To reopen a topic, double-click it.


Print button (def)
Print button

A Help button you can use to print the current Help topic.


Browse buttons (def)
Browse buttons

Buttons which display the previous (<<) or next (>>) topic in a series of grouped or associated topics. When you reach the first or last topic in the series, the corresponding previous or next button is dimmed.


 Hint

You can reduce the size and move the Help window to keep it on-screen while you follow the steps.

Choose Always on Top from the Help menu above to display the Help window "on top" of other applications, even when it is minimized. Or, size both Help and the application window so they do not overlap.


 Hint

Choose an option from the Save File As Type list to save a file in a format other than the default for the current application. WordPerfect and other suite applications save the file with a default extension that identifies the selected file type and format. You can type a period at the end of the filename to save the file without an extension, or type your own extension.

Some extensions with special meaning include .ALL, .BAT, .BIF, .COM, .DLL, .EXE, .INI, .PRS, .SET, .WCM, .WPT, and .WWK. Do not use these extensions when saving documents unless you have a specific reason for doing so.


 Hint

Click and drag to select a continuous range of items. You can also click an item at one end of the range, then hold down the Shift key and click the item at the other end of the range.

Press Ctrl while clicking each item you want to select noncontinuous items. Press Ctrl+/ to select all items.

Click inside the file list, then type the first letters or numbers of the filename to move to a specific file in a file list sorted by filename, size, or date/time. When the file list is sorted by extension, descriptive name, or descriptive type, those items are used in searching.


 Hint

If the Toolbar is displayed, you can right-click over the Toolbar, then choose Edit.


 Hint

If you map a number or letter key without a modifier key, it will no longer act as an alphanumeric key.


Document Text

Lets you view the body of a document (instead of the Document Summary).


Save Format

Purpose

The Save Format dialog box appears when you attempt to save a document which was converted from another format when you opened the document.

Save Format allows you to save the file in the current default format, the original format, or in another format.

Steps

1	Open a document that was saved in a format other than your current default format, make any changes you want, then choose Save As from the File menu.

2	Choose the default format or the original format.

or

Choose Other, choose OK, then choose the format you want.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Managing Files

Open/Save As Setup

Save File as Type

Saving Files


Hex Display

Lets you display a file in hexadecimal mode. You can print any kind of file as a hexidecimal document.


Copy to Clipboard

Lets you copy selected text from the Viewer to the Clipboard.


Document Summary

Lets you view the Document Summary of a file (instead of the body of the document).


Word Wrap

Lets you wrap document text in the Viewer window so all text shows regardless of the window size.


Opening Files

File, Open

Purpose

Use Open to open as many as nine documents or windows in the same application. Open works with documents you have previously saved as files on a hard disk or floppy disk. When you want to edit a document that is saved on disk, you need to open a copy of the file into a window. The file then becomes active in your computer's memory so that you can edit it. The changes you make are not recorded on disk until you save the file again.

Steps

1	Choose Open from the File menu.

2	Select the drive and directory you want to list the files in.

3	Select the file you want.

or

Type the full path, separated by commas, of as many as nine files at one time to open multiple files.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Managing Files

Open a Copy of a File

Saving Files


Find

Lets you find words or phrases in the document displayed in the Viewer.


Font

Lets you change the font that will show in the Viewer.


 Hint

Press Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Backspace to reset to the default keyboard and menu bar from your document.


Text Only

Indexes only textual information without summary fields or other subfunctions.


 Hint

To assign a WordPerfect Character to a key, select Allow assignment to characters, select a key from the list box, select Play a Keyboard Script, press Ctrl+W, select and insert the character, then choose Assign Script.


 Hint

Filling in more than one field performs a logical AND operation.


 Hint

Make sure you have documents with document summary information.


 Hint

If you choose No Summary Fields from the Options drop-down list to collapse the QuickFinder dialog box, all document summary fields are cleared and are not used in the search.


 Hint

Updating the index with new or modified files speeds up the indexing process.


 Hint

Index level refers to the amount of information stored in the index, that is, which document, paragraph, line, or sentence the word is contained in. Indexing at the larger levels (document, hard page, or page) decreases the size of the index. Indexing at the smaller levels increases the index size but allows you to find multiple words within the same line, sentence, or paragraph much faster.


 Hint

If a query has been saved with document summary fields (expanded mode), then the summary fields display when you load the query.


Filename Only

Indexes only DOS filenames.


Summary Fields Only

Indexes only document summary fields.


Viewer Go To Page

Viewer, right-click, Go To Page

Purpose

Use Viewer Go To Page to view multiple-page fax files.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list, then select a text file from the file list.

2	Choose View.

3	Right-click inside the Viewer window, then choose Go to Page from the QuickMenu.

4	Specify the page number you want to view.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Viewer


 Hint

If a language that you often use contains special characters (WordPerfect Characters), you can create a keyboard for that language by mapping those characters to the keys of your choice.


Toolbar directional arrows (def)
Toolbar directional arrows

The arrows found on a Toolbar that is longer than the screen. The directional arrows let you scroll the Toolbar to show buttons not displayed on the screen.


client application (def)
client application

An application that can link and embed text or graphics created in a server application. Also called a container application.


Control Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Control Menu to position, size, close, and switch application windows. Double-click the control-menu box, then choose an option from the Control Menu.

Restore

Move

Size

Minimize

Maximize

Next

Exit

Switch To


copy (def)
copy

To duplicate text or graphics and place them on the Clipboard.


document (def)
document

Any file you create, including drawings, text, slide shows, spreadsheets, and so on.


embed (def)
embed

To place an item created in one application into a document created in another application. For example, you can embed text created in WordPerfect into a Presentations drawing window.


Close

Control Menu, Close

Purpose

Use Close to close a document or to exit an application.

Steps

1	Choose Close from the Control menu.

2	Choose Yes to save changes and exit the document or application.

See Also

Switch To


export (def)
export

To save a document in a different format so that it can be used in another application.


feature (def)
feature

A special capability or tool in an application.


figure (def)
figure

Clip art or other graphics files you can retrieve into an application.


format (def)
format

A collective term for margins, spacing, page length, point size, and the general visual appearance of the printed page.


help topic (def)
help topic

A Help screen containing a brief description of a feature with step-by-step instructions on how to use it. Help topics often contain jump terms, pop-up definitions, and See Also lists.


import (def)
import

To retrieve information from one application into another.


inactive (def)
inactive

The state of an application, window, dialog box, or option that is currently not available or in use.


keyboard layout (def)
keyboard layout

A group of shortcut keys saved together in a file. In many applications, you can create customized keyboard layouts.


keyword (def)
keyword

A word (also known as a search term) you type in the Search feature to find a Help topic for a particular feature or task. For example, if you search for the keyword "zoom," the Help system finds topics about the Zoom feature.


Maximize

Control Menu, Maximize

Purpose

Use Maximize to enlarge a window to full size.

Steps

1	Activate the window you want to maximize, then choose Maximize from the Control menu.

or

Double-click the title bar of the window you want to maximize.Click the Maximize button (the up-arrow button on the window title bar).

See Also

Minimize


Minimize

Control Menu, Minimize

Purpose

Use Minimize to reduce a window to an icon.

1	Activate the window you want to minimize, then choose Minimize from the Control menu.

or

Click the Minimize button (the down-arrow button on the window title bar).

See Also

Maximize


modifier keys (def)
modifier keys

The collective name for the Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys. When pressed simultaneously with other keys (such as function keys), modifier keys change the original functions of those keys.


Move

Control Menu, Move

Purpose

Use Move to relocate a window on the screen.

Steps

1	Activate the window you want to move, then choose Move from the Control menu. Use the arrow keys to move the window to a new location, then press Enter.

or

Drag the title bar to the new location.

See Also

Size


Next

Control Menu, Next

Purpose

Use Next to scroll through open document windows.

Steps

1	Choose Next from the Control menu.

See Also

Switch To


paste (def)
paste

To insert the contents of the Clipboard into the active window or application.


print wheel (def)
print wheel

A detachable printer wheel containing various typefaces.


Restore

Control Menu, Restore

Purpose

Use Restore to return a window to its previous size and position.

Steps

1	Activate the window you want to restore, then choose Restore from the Control menu.

or

Click the Restore button (the double-arrow button on the window title bar).

See Also

Maximize

Size


scroll arrows (def)
scroll arrows

The arrows that appear at either end of a scroll bar. Mouse users click the scroll arrows to scroll. Keyboard uses use the arrow keys to scroll.


scroll box (def)
scroll box

The box within a scroll bar that you move with the mouse or arrow keys. Its position in the scroll bar corresponds to your general location in a file or dialog box (beginning, middle, or end).


server application (def)
server application

An application whose objects can be embedded or linked into other documents and applications.


Size

Control Menu, Size

Purpose

Use Size to modify the size of a window.

Steps

1	Activate the window you want to size, then choose Size from the Control menu. Use the arrow keys until the outline of the window is the size you want, then press Enter.

or

Place the pointer on the window border (the pointer becomes a double arrow), then drag the pointer to the size you want.

See Also

Maximize

Move

Restore


spooler (def)
spooler

An application you use to continue working while you wait for a document to print. When you choose to print, information is sent immediately to the spooler, and the spooler feeds the information to the printer as soon as the printer is ready.


Switch To

Control Menu, Switch To

Purpose

Use Switch To to activate other applications without exiting the current one.

Steps

1	Choose Switch To from the Control menu, select the application you want, then choose Switch To.

or

Press Alt+Tab.

See Also

Next


typeface (def)
typeface

A specific design of type, such as Courier or Palatino.


window border (def)
window border

The outside border of an application window or a tiled or cascaded document window. Drag the border to size the window.


wrap (def)
wrap

A word processing feature that breaks lines of text automatically to stay within a text area or page margins. The insertion point and any words that extend beyond the margin are carried to the next line or page.


Invert

Lets you change the display of fax files from black on white to white on black and vice versa.


Rotate

Lets you rotate the current page of a fax file 180 degrees.


Zoom

Lets you change your view of a fax, cursor, or icon file. You can enlarge faxes up to 200% or reduce them down to 50%. You can enlarge cursor and icon files up to 800%.

Zoom does not actually size the image, it only changes your view.


Print

Lets you print all or part of a text or hex file, select printers, change fonts, and specify margins.


Printing from the Viewer

Viewer, right-click, Print

Purpose

Use Print to print all or part of a text or hex file, select printers, change fonts, and specify margins.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list, then select a text file from the file list.

2	Choose View.

3	Right-click inside the Viewer window, then choose Print from the QuickMenu.

4	Specify the pages you want to print.

5	Choose Setup to select a printer or change printer options, then choose OK.

6	Select display Font to print using the current display font.

or

Select Specific Font, choose Change, select a font and a point size for printing, then choose OK.

7	Select Inches or Centimeters, then specify the margins for printing.

8	Choose Print.

See Also

Viewing Files


Refine QuickFinder Searches

QuickFinder, define a search

Purpose

Use the operators and switches from Operators lists to create and refine complex searches. Search operators and switches apply to all text that follows in the Search For text box.

      	Search switches should be placed before the search terms they will affect. Use parentheses to group search terms, switches, and operators. Search operators bind in the following order if no parentheses or switches are used:  NOT, FOLLOWED BY, AND, OR.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Operators, then choose options to refine your search.

2	Select the category you want, then choose the operator, switch, or document summary field you want to use.

These are the search operators you can use:

And (&)

Followed By (..)

Group ()

Not (!)

Or (|)

These are the matching operators you can use:

Zero or More Characters (*)

Any Single Character (?)

Case Insensitive

Case Sensitive

Prefix Mode On and Off

These are the switches you can use for word proximity searches:

Document

Field

Hard Page

Line

Page

Paragraph

Phrase ("")

Record

Sentence

Within # Words

These are the switches you can use to search specific parts of a document:

Entire

First Page

Summary Only

Text Only

You can also search any Summary Fields included in the document.

These are the Other operators you can use:

Scan Off

Wildcard Off and On

3	Type the word or phrase you want to search for. Place the switches after the words they affect, and use parentheses to group a search query.

4	Choose Insert to insert the operator or switch and leave the dialog box open.

or

Choose Insert and Close to insert the operator or switch and close the dialog box.

5	Choose Find.

See Also

Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Search For


And (&)

Appears as &, AND, or a space.

For example, mountain & goat, mountain AND goat, and mountain goat all find documents containing the search terms "mountain" and "goat."


Any Single Character (?)

Appears as ?.

For example, mountain? finds all documents containing the word "mountain" plus a single character, like "mountains."


Case Sensitive

Appears as /Case.

Finds search terms that match upper- and lowercase pattern of the search terms. For example, /Case Zoo finds "Zoo," but not "zoo."


Document

Appears as /Document.

Finds search terms in the same document (this option resets all other levels).


Entire

Appears as /Entire.

Finds search terms in all document text and in all document summary information. This is the default switch.


Field

Appears as /Field.

Finds search terms in the same field. Use this option with database-oriented files such as Merge files. Works on non-index searches only.


First Page

Appears as /FirstPage.

Finds search terms only in the first page of the document text and in the document summary.


Followed By (..)

Appears as ...

For example, mountain .. goat finds document that contain both search terms, with "mountain" before "goat" somewhere in the document.


Group ()

Appears as ( ) with search text in between.

For example, (/FirstPage (/Line subject reorganization) "John Smith" companyX) finds documents with the first page containing the search terms "subject" and "reorganization" on the same line, with "John Smith" and "companyX" appearing on the same page.


Hard Page

Appears as /HardPage.

Finds search terms in the same section of a document, bounded by hard pages.


Line

Appears as /Line.

Finds search terms on the same line of the document, as currently formatted on disk.


Not (!)

Appears as ! or NOT.

For example, mountain ! goat and mountain NOT goat both find documents containing the word "mountain" but not the word "goat."  Documents that contain both are not included.


Case Insensitive

Appears as /NoCase.

Finds search terms that match the search terms, ignoring upper- and lowercase. For example, /NoCase Zoo finds both "Zoo" and "zoo."  This is the default setting.


Or (|)

Appears as | or OR.

For example, mountain | goat and mountain OR goat both find documents containing "mountain" or "goat" or both search terms.


Page

Appears as /Page.

Finds search terms on the same page of the document, as currently formatted on disk.


Paragraph

Appears as /Paragraph.

Finds search terms on in the same paragraph of the document.


Phrase ("")

Appears as " " with a search phrase between.

Finds phrases, exactly as you type them. For example, "Dr. Jane Smith" finds Dr. Jane Smith, but not Dr Jane Smith or Dr. J. Smith.


Record

Appears as /Record.

Finds search terms in the same record. Use this option with database-oriented files such as Merge files. Works on non-index searches only.


Sentence

Appears as /Sentence.

Finds search terms in the same sentence of the document.


Summary Fields

Appears as /Summary=name, /name, or /Summary=n.

Finds search terms in the document summary field you specify. The name of the field replaces the field number or name in the switch pattern. For example, /Summary=Typist Shauna finds documents with "Shauna" in the Typist field of the Document Summary.


Summary Only

Appears as /Summary.

Finds search terms in all document summary information, but not in the document itself.


Text Only

Appears as /Text.

Finds search terms in all document text, excluding headers, footers, and document summaries.


Within # Words

Appears as /#.

Finds search terms that are within a certain number of words of each other. For example, /2 finds search terms within two words of each other.


Zero or More Characters (*)

Appears as *.

For example, mountain* finds documents containing all variation of words that begin with "mountain," with or without other characters. This includes "mountain," "mountains," "mountainous," and so on.


Edit Button and Menu Item Properties

Toolbar or Menu Bar, right-click, Edit, double-click a script, macro, or program item, Properties

Purpose

Use Properties to set the path or command line and working directory for buttons and menu items that run macros or launch applications, or to edit keyboard scripts.

Steps

To change application launch properties,

1	Open the Toolbar or Menu Bar Editor.

2	Double-click the application button or menu item you want, then choose Properties.

3	Specify the command line for the application.

4	Specify the working directory for the application.

5	Select Run Minimized if you want the application to be minimized when it opens.

6	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

To change macro paths,

1	Open the Toolbar or Menu Bar Editor.

2	Double-click the macro button or menu item you want, then choose Properties.

3	Specify the path for the macro.

4	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

To edit keyboard scripts,

1	Open the Toolbar Editor or Menu Bar Editor.

2	Double-click the keyboard script button or menu item you want, then choose Properties.

3	Edit the keyboard script.

4	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Menu Bar Editor

Toolbar Editor

Toolbar Image Editor

Toolbar Customize


Additional Information about QuickFinder

Speeding Up Indexing

The QuickFinder Indexer is one of the fastest indexers in the industry. However, there are ways to optimize indexing time. Here are some suggestions that can help you increase the speed of creating QuickFinder indexes:

     	Select a broad level of indexing for Index Level, such as Document or Paragraph.

     	Launch QuickFinder File Indexer in standalone mode (while no other programs are running).

     	Create an index that contains only document Summary Fields.

     	Exclude as many document types as you can.

     	Do not include numbers.

     	Index only WordPerfect documents if you have a mix of WP and non-WP documents.

     	If you are indexing a large number of small files, change the show indexing progress to a larger number.

Indexing with Startup Options

You can use the following startup options to automate updating QuickFinder indexes:

     	/ra:  Rebuilds all indexes listed in the QuickFinder Index Names list box.

     	/r-[long index name]:  Rebuilds only the specified index.

     	/ia:  Updates the specified index with new or modified files.

     	/i-[long index name]:  Updates the specified index with new or modified files.

     	/g-[long index name] and /ga:  "Smart update." If the .inc file is 10% the size of the .idx file, it will rebuild the index.  If it is smaller than 10%, it will update the index.

Because the Command Line is case sensitive, entries must be typed exactly. You can specify more than one index name, as long as you separate them with a comma and a space (for example, c:\wpc20\qfwin20.exe /r-newsletters, 1982 magazines).

QuickFinder Log Files

A QuickFinder log file is created when QuickFinder attempts to index a file that is open or password protected. The log file has the same name and directory location as the QuickFinder index file, but has a .LOG file extension.

Saving QuickFinder Indexes

QuickFinder saves indexes after every generation. You name the file when you create the index, and QuickFinder stores the indexes as files that use a .IDX extension (for example, BRIEFS92.IDX). Incremental index files receive a .INC extension. Error messages are stored in a file with a .LOG extension. You can specify the directory where indexes are stored using the Location for Index Files option on the QuickFinder Indexer Preferences dialog box.

Running QuickFinder as a Standalone Application

You can run QuickFinder independent of any other Corel application by double-clicking the QuickFinder icon in the Windows Program Manager.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


 Hint

You can use wildcard characters to include specific types of files. For example, typing c:\october\*.shw will include all files in the OCTOBER subdirectory of the C: drive with the extension .SHW; typing c:\october\*.* includes all files in the OCTOBER subdirectory.


Viewer Info

Viewer, right click, Viewer Info

Purpose

Use Viewer Info to display viewer capabilities by viewer and file type.

Steps

1	Right-click inside the Viewer, then choose Viewer Info.

2	Select Viewer to display available viewers.

or

Select File Type to display available file types.

3	Select the viewer you want to display the file types it can view.

or

Select the file type you want to display the compatible viewers.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Viewing Files


Additional Information about Viewer

Using the Viewer

The Viewer has been designed to:

     	Help you find a specific file quickly, especially when you know something about the content of the file.

     	Help you create documents by copying parts of the document you are viewing into another document.

     	Provide viewing capabilities for files located by a QuickFinder search. The Viewer highlights the word or phrase searched for and displays the document at the first occurrence of the search text.

     	Let you assign viewers to specific types of files.

     	Let you look at or hear a file before you use it in a document.

     	Let you print all or part of a file without retrieving it into a document.

If a Viewer window is displayed, you can select a filename in any list box to view the contents of that file.

How the Viewer Works

The Viewer provides a quick display of the contents of a file. The Viewer can display text, graphics, codes, and faxes. It also plays audiovisual and sound files.

To enhance its speed, the Viewer has been designed to display document contents, but not all of the formatting. Thus, the Viewer does not provide full WYSIWYG viewing of file contents. Files display both text and graphics in the Viewer window. If a file you are viewing contains only graphics, you can view them if they are in a supported graphics format.

Types of Files the Viewer Displays

     	WordPerfect documents (4.2, 5.x, and 6.0 formats)

     	WordPerfect graphics files (.WPG)

     	Sound files (Waveform, MIDI)

     	Various non-WordPerfect document and spreadsheet files (including documents created in Word for Windows, AmiPro, and Lotus 123 spreadsheets)

     	Various graphics file formats

     	Fax files (DCX and some TIFF formats)

     	List of files contained in a ZIP file

     	Cursor and icon files

See Also

Viewer

Viewing Files


 Hint

The Language dialog box lists all of the languages WordPerfect currently supports. If WordPerfect adds support for a language, and you install the language module for that language, you can specify the two letter language code for the new language by typing the code in the Language text box.


 Hint

When you select a language, the application inserts the language code [Lang:xx]. The letters xx represent the two letter code indicating the language (such as CA for Catalan and DK for Danish). The application uses the new language code from that point on in the document or until they reach another language code. If you select text before selecting a language, a code for the new language is placed at the beginning of the selection, and a code for the previous language is placed at the end of the selection. For example, you can place different language codes around specific portions of text and have the application spell-check those sections using the specified languages.


 Hint

If you try to open a file that was created in a format other than the format the current application uses, the Convert File Format message box appears. Choose OK to convert the file.

If an application cannot convert the file, an error message will inform you that the file format is unknown. If this occurs, you may want to use the original program to save the file in DCA/RTF or RTF format. If neither of these formats is available, you can save the file as an ASCII (DOS) text file. However, some formatting features in your file may be lost when you open it into the current application.


 Hint

More than 1,500 characters and symbols are grouped into fifteen character sets. Each numbered character set contains a certain type of character. For example, character set 0 contains ASCII characters, and character set 8 contains Greek characters. Most of these characters are listed in the WordPerfect Characters dialog box.

Each character in a set is also numbered. The combination of the set number and the character number identifies each character. For example, the Italian currency symbol is in character set 4, and is number 61. Therefore, that character's number is 4,61.


Graphic Conversion

Lets you convert graphics for viewing. If you choose Disable Graphics Conversion from the QuickMenu, you can use the conversion button in the Viewer to convert individual graphics files for viewing.


 Hint

The language and country as listed on the outside of your applications package is the package language. Screen elements (dialog boxes and menus), dates, and tables display in this language.

To change package languages, use the /LXX startup command (where XX is the two letter language code) when you start your application, or manually add "Resource Language=XX" (where XX is the two letter language code) to your WIN.INI file. If you do not specify a resource language, the application searches the path directories and uses the first YYYYYYXX.DLL it can find (where YYYYYY is the program's acronym and XX is the specified language).

If you are using a language with a non-Roman alphabet (such as Greek, Cyrillic, or Hebrew), choose the correct character map to greatly reduce document size.


 Hint

The Toolbar can be positioned on the Left, Right, Top, or Bottom of your screen, or it can be a floating Palette. You can also drag the Toolbar to position it on your screen.

The Toolbars can appear with Text Only, Picture Only, or Picture and Text.


Exclude Files

Ignores all specified file types. All files with .EXE, .COM, and .DLL extensions are excluded by default.


Expand Browse Dialog

Lets you specify how the Create and Edit Index dialog boxes appear. If you select Expand Browse Dialog, the Filename, Drives, and Directories display each time the dialog box is opened. (Applies to all indexes.)


Extended Characters in Non-WP Documents

Lets you specify how extended characters in documents other than WordPerfect formats are treated in the index. If you are indexing a document created in Windows, choose Interpret as ANSI; if you are indexing a document created in DOS, choose Interpret as ASCII. If you have both or are unsure, select Exclude.


Include Numbers in Index

Indexes numbers as well as letters.


Index Contains

Lets you specify how much of a document to index.


Index Level

Lets you specify an area to search for word patterns (for example, on the same line, or in the same paragraph).


Index WordPerfect Documents Only

Indexes only WordPerfect 5.1/5.2 and 6.0 documents (but not WordPerfect 4.0 documents).


Location for Index Files

Lets you specify the default location for index files. (Applies to all indexes.)


Regenerating Indexes

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create or Edit, Generate

Purpose

Use Index All Files regenerate indexes by indexing all the files in the index again.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Select the index you want to update from the Index Names list box.

3	Choose Generate, select Index All Files, then choose OK.

4	Choose OK when the index is complete.

5	Choose Close, then choose Close again to return to your document.

See Also

Updating Indexes


Show Indexing Progress Every x Files

Lets you specify how many files will be indexed before the progress line shows change. (Applies to all indexes.)


Updating Indexes

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create or Edit, Generate

Purpose

Use Update Index with New or Modified Files to add new information to the most recently generated index file.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Select the index you want to update from the Index Names list box.

3	Choose Generate, select Update Index With New or Modified Files, then choose OK.

4	Choose OK when the index is complete.

5	Choose Close, then choose Close again to return to your document.

See Also

Regenerating Indexes


Delete QuickList Item

QuickList, Delete Item

Purpose

Use Delete Item to remove an item from a QuickList.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box.

2	Select the item you want to delete.

3	Right-click on the QuickList, then choose Delete Item.

4	Choose Yes.

See Also

Add or Edit QuickList Item

QuickList


counter box (def)
counter box

A box in which you specify a number by typing or by using the incrementor/decrementor buttons.


Go to Page

Lets you specify the page number you want to view.


Next Page

Lets you move to the next page of the fax file.


Previous Page

Lets you move to the previous page in the fax file.


UNC Drive Mappings

Purpose

When your computer is part of a network, use Universal Naming Convention (UNC) drive mapping formats anywhere you specify a filename.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list.

2	Specify the filename of the file, using the following drive mapping conventions:

Format	Syntax
UNC Acceptable	\\Server\Volume\Dir\Dir etc... //Server/Volume/Dir/Dir etc...
Novell Acceptable	Server/Volume:Dir\Dir etc... Server\Volume:Dir/Dir etc...
3	Choose OK.

See Also

Managing Files